Advanced User Guide
E
CT2-D147-A
© CANON INC. 2021
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Compatible Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instruction Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Quick Start Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
About This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Compatible Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Preparation and Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Inserting/Removing Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Inserting/Removing Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Turning on the Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Attaching/Detaching RF Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Multi-Function Shoe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Using the Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using Eye Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Menu Operations and Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Quick Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Touch-Screen Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Shooting Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fv: Flexible-Priority AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
P: Program AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Tv: Shutter-Priority AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Av: Aperture-Priority AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
M: Manual Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Shooting and Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
HDR PQ Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
HDR Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Auto Lighting Optimizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Highlight Tone Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Anti-Flicker Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Shooting with Speedlites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Flash Function Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Custom White Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
White Balance Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Color Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Picture Style Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Picture Style Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Picture Style Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Clarity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Lens Aberration Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Long Exposure Noise Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Dust Delete Data Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Multiple Exposures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Focus Bracketing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Interval Timer Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Silent Shutter Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Shutter Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Releasing Shutter without Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Customizing Quick Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Shooting with the Touch Shutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Image Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
High-Speed Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Metering Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Display Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Optical Viewfinder Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Shooting Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Viewfinder Display Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Display Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Metering Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Manual Exposure Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Exposure Lock (AE Lock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
General Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tab Menus: Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Movie Recording Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
High Frame Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Movie Recording Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Movie Cropping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Sound Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
HDR Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Canon Log Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Movie Self-Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Shutter Button Function for Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Zebra Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Time Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Other Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
General Movie Recording Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
AF/Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
AF Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Movie Servo AF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Selecting the AF Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Manual Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Servo AF Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Customizing AF Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Selecting the Drive Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Using the Self-Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Remote Control Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Tab Menus: Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Image Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Magnified Image Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Voice Memo Recording and Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Movie Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
4K Movie Frame Grab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Playback on a TV Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Protecting Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Erasing Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Rotating Still Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Changing Movie Orientation Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Rating Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Copying Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Print Ordering (DPOF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
RAW Image Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Converting HEIF to JPEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Slide Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Setting Image Search Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Browsing Images with the Main Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Browsing Images with the Rate+Quick Control Dial 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Switching the Main Dial and Quick Control Dial 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Rate/Voice Memo Button Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Customizing Playback Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Displaying the Highlight Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
AF Point Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Playback Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Movie Play Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
HDMI HDR Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Communication Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Tab Menus: Communication Functions Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Available Communication Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Camera Connect Communication from Smartphones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Wi-Fi Connections with a Computer Using EOS Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Basic Communication Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Image Transfer to FTP Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Sending Images to a Web Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Remote Control (EOS Utility). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Controlling the Camera with Browser Remote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Ending Connections or Reconnecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Airplane Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Checking and Editing Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Syncing Time Between Cameras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Setting Up GPS Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Resetting Communication Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Tab Menus: Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
Folder Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
File Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
File Naming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Card Formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Auto Rotate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Adding Orientation Information to Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Date/Time/Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Video System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Beeps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Headphones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
Power Saving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Screen and Viewfinder Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Screen Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Viewfinder Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Screen and Viewfinder Color Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Fine-Tuning Viewfinder Color Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
UI Magnification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
HDMI Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Touch Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Multi-Function Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Shutter at Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
Sensor Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
App Selection for USB Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
Resetting the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
Custom Shooting Mode (C1-C3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
Save/Load Camera Settings on Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Battery Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
Copyright Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
System Status Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Other Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Custom Functions/My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Tab Menus: Custom Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Custom Function Setting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Tab Menus: My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Registering My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Importing Images to a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Using an Optional USB Power Adapter to Charge the Camera. . . . . . . . . . . 974
Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
ISO Speed in Movie Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
Trademarks and Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
Introduction
Before starting to shoot, be sure to read the following
To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the
Safety Instructions and Handling
Precautions. Also read this Advanced User Guide carefully to ensure that you use the
camera correctly.
Take some test shots, and understand about product liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded. If
the camera or memory card is faulty and images cannot be recorded or transferred to a
computer, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in some countries prohibit the unauthorized use of images recorded with the
camera (or music/images with music transferred to the memory card) for purposes other
than personal enjoyment.
Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc. may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
Connecting other devices
Use the included interface cable or a Canon cable when connecting the camera to a
computer or other device. When connecting an interface cable, also use the included
cable protector (
).
• Package Contents
• Compatible Accessories
• Instruction Manuals
• Quick Start Guide
• About This Guide
• Compatible Cards
• Safety Instructions
• Handling Precautions
• Part Names
• Software
9
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is
missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap (Camera Cover R-F-5), battery compartment cap, and shoe cover)
Eyecup ER-h
Battery Pack LP-E19
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger LC-E19
(with protective cover)
Strap
Interface Cable
10
Cable Protector
The camera does not come with a memory card ( ) or HDMI cable.
Attach Eyecup ER-h to the viewfinder eyepiece.
Be careful not to lose any of these items.
No software CD-ROM is included. Software ( ) can be downloaded from the Canon
website.
Caution
The transmission rate when the included interface cable is used is equivalent to
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.1 Gen 1).
11
Instruction Manuals
The included Instruction Manual provides basic camera instructions.
Advanced User Guide
Complete instructions are provided in this Advanced User Guide.
For the latest Advanced User Guide, refer to the following website.
https://cam.start.canon/C010/
Lens Instruction Manuals
View or download from the following website.
https://cam.start.canon/
For software instruction manuals, see Software Instruction Manuals.
Note
Select [ : Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera screen.
13
Set the shooting mode to [ ] ( ).
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
Focus on the subject ( ).
A tracking frame [ ] appears over any face detected.
Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the
subject.
Take the picture ( ).
Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
By default, the camera shoots in [ ] mode ( ).
16
7.
8.
9.
About This Guide
Icons in This Guide
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample Photos
Icons in This Guide
<
>
Indicates the Main dial.
<
>
Indicates Quick control dial 1.
<
>
Indicates Quick control dial 2.
<
>
Indicates the Multi-controller.
<
>
Indicates the Smart controller.
<
>
Indicates the lens control ring.
<
>
Indicates the Set button.
*
Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the operation for the button you pressed, as
timed after you release the button.
In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera's buttons and
displayed on the screen are also used in this guide when discussing relevant operations
and functionality.
Links to pages with related topics.
Warning to prevent shooting problems.
Supplemental information.
Tips or advice for better shooting.
Troubleshooting advice.
18
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and
Sample Photos
Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to < > ( )
and the Multi-function lock feature is off ( ).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults.
Illustrations in this guide show the camera with the RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM lens
attached as an example.
Sample photos in this guide are only for illustration.
In references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount adapter is used.
19
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity. If the card is new
or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format it
with this camera (
).
CFexpress cards
* Type-B compatible
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
* UHS-II and UHS-I cards compatible
Cards That Can Record Movies
When recording movies, use a card with ample performance (fast enough writing and
reading speeds) for the movie recording quality (
).
In this manual, “CFexpress card” refers specifically to CFexpress cards, “SD card”
refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards collectively, and “card” refers to all memory
cards in general.
* A card is not included. Please purchase it separately.
20
WARNING :
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the product or others.
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person's neck may result in strangulation.
The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If
swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use with the product.
Do not disassemble or modify the product.
Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence of
smoke or a strange smell.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the
product.
Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
Do not leave a lens or a camera/camcorder with a lens attached, exposed without the
lens cap attached.
The lens may concentrate the light and cause fire.
Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
This may cause electric shock.
Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or
provided battery packs.
• Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
• Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
• Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
• Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins
or other metal objects.
• Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
• When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other
means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing, flush the
exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact, flush thoroughly with
copious amounts of clean running water and seek immediate medical assistance.
21
Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.
• Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a
dry cloth.
• Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
• Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
• Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact
with metallic pins or other metal objects.
• Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during
lightning storms.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the
power cord.
Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use when
the product is still warm in temperature.
Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5 - 40 °C
(41 - 104 °F).
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended
periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and blistering,
even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar equipment is
recommended when using the product in hot places and for people with circulation problems
or less sensitive skin.
Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect of electromagnetic
waves and even result in accidents.
22
CAUTION :
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise
physical injury or property damage may
result.
Do not fire the flash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time.
This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using the
product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.
Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other part of your body,
and objects away from the flash unit while taking pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.
Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when touched.
Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product attached
on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the product or
expose the product to strong impacts.
Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
Only mount the product on a tripod that is sufficiently sturdy.
Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.
This may cause injury or may result in an accident.
Do not touch any parts inside the product.
This may cause injury.
If any abnormal skin reaction or irritation occurs during or following the use of this
product, refrain from further use and get medical advice/attention.
After movie recording or repeated continuous shooting over an extended period,
do not touch the screen storage compartment (A), which may be hot. This
may cause burns.
Do not touch CFexpress cards immediately after shooting.
Cards may be hot, which may cause burns. Cards are more likely to be hotter
when [
: Auto pwr off temp.] is set to [High]. Wait until the card has cooled
down before removing it.
23
Handling Precautions
Camera care
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
To maximize the camera's dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal cover, battery
compartment cap, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly closed. Also attach the
shoe cover to the multi-function shoe.
This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help prevent sand,
dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting inside, but it is impossible to
prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow
dirt, dust, water, or salt to get on the camera.
If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust, or salt gets
on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
Using the camera in dusty or dirty locations may lead to damage.
Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or salt to
remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that moisture (water),
dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly consult the nearest Canon Service
Center.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet
or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong
radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera
malfunction or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct sunlight. High
temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to disassemble the
camera yourself.
Do not block shutter curtain operation with your finger or other objects. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
Only use a commercially available blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, or
other parts. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body
or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera's electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the
contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera malfunction.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room, condensation may
form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in
a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of
the bag.
If condensation forms on the camera, to avoid damage, do not use the camera or
remove the lens, card, or battery. Turn the camera off and wait until the moisture has
fully evaporated before resuming use. Even after the camera is completely dry, if it is still
internally cold, do not remove the lens, card, or battery until the camera has adjusted to
the ambient temperature.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store the
camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the camera is in storage,
press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still
working.
24
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and corrosion
such as in a chemical lab.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before
using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot
such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera checked by your nearest Canon
Service Center or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still photo/movie
shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting may occur.
When shooting with backlighting, keep the sun sufficiently away from the angle of view.
Always keep intense light sources such as the sun, lasers, and other intense artificial
light sources out of the image area and not near it. Concentrated intense light may
cause smoke or damage the image sensor or other internal components.
Attach the lens cap to prevent direct sunlight and other light from entering the lens when
you are not shooting.
Screen and viewfinder, LCD panel
Although the screen and viewfinder are manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be dead,
and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction.
They do not affect the images recorded.
If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see
remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only temporary and will disappear
when the camera is left unused for a few days.
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may look black in
high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force, physical shock,
or vibration.
Keep dust and foreign material out of the card opening.
Do not touch the card's electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic.
Do not affix any stickers, etc. on the card.
Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field, such as a
television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a case.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Cards may become hot after long sessions of repeated continuous shooting or still photo
shooting/movie recording. This is not a malfunction.
25
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the rear end up and
attach the rear lens cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts
(1).
Smudges on the image sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the camera's
internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If smudges are visible on images, have
the sensor cleaned by a nearest Canon Service Center.
26
(1) Self-timer lamp/AF-assist beam
(2) Shutter button
(3) Multi-function button 2 (M-Fn 2)
(4) Depth-of-field preview button
(5) Grip
(6) <
> Vertical-grip Multi-function button
(7) <
> Vertical-grip Main dial
(8) Vertical-grip shutter button
(9) RF lens mount index
(10) Lens mount
(11) Lens lock pin
(12) Lens release button
(13) Shutter curtain/Image sensor
(14) Remote control terminal
(15) Contacts
(16) Vertical-grip depth-of-field preview button
(17) Vertical-grip Multi-function button 2 (M-Fn 2)
(18) Tripod socket
(19) Serial number (body number)
(20) Accessory positioning hole
(21) Body cap
28
(
18
)
(
1
3
)
(
11
)
(
10
)
(30)
(29)
(28)
(27)
(26)
(24)
(23)
(25)
(22)
(21)
(20)
(19)
(
1
4
)
(
12
)
(
9
)
(17)
(16)
(31)
(15)
(33)
(32)
(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
29
(1) Eyecup
(2) Multi-function shoe
(3) Flash sync contacts
(4) <
> Focal plane mark
(5) <
> Drive mode/AF operation selection button
(6) Microphone
(7) <
> Flash exposure compensation/metering mode selection button
(8) Strap mount
(9) <
> External microphone IN terminal
(10) <
> Digital terminal
(11) <
> HDMI micro OUT terminal
(12) <
> Headphone terminal
(13) <
> Ethernet RJ-45 terminal
(14) <
> PC terminal
(15) Terminal cover
(16) Battery release handle
(17) Battery
(18) Battery compartment cap
(19) LCD panel
(20) <
> LCD panel info switching/illumination button
(21) <
> Exposure compensation/aperture value setting button
(22) <
> Mode button
(23) <
> AF point selection button
(24) <
> AE lock button
(25) <
> Quick control dial 2
(26) <
> AF start button/Smart controller
(27) <
> Quick Control button
(28) Access lamp
(29) Power/multi-function lock switch
(30) Speaker
(31) Screen
(32) <
> Menu button
(33) <
/ > Rating/voice memo button
30
(
1
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
12
)
(
11
)
(
1
0
)
(
13
)
(
14
)
(
1
9
)
(
2
4
)
(
23
)
(
1
7
)
(
18
)
(
20
)
(
21
)
(
1
5
)
(
2
2
)
(
1
6
)
(
9
)
(
8
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
31
(1) Viewfinder eyepiece
(2) <
> Multi-controller (can also be pressed straight in)
(3) <
> Info button
(4) <
> Set button
(5) <
> Quick control dial 1
(6) <
> Playback button
(7) <
> Network lamp
(8) <
> Magnify/reduce button
(9) <
> Erase button
(10) Dioptric adjustment knob
(11) <
> Still photo shooting/< > movie recording switch
(12) <
> Multi-function button
(13) <
> Main dial
(14) Strap mount
(15) Movie shooting button
(16) Card slot 1
(17) Card slot 2
(18) Card slot cover
(19) Card 1 eject button
(20) <
> Vertical-grip Multi-controller (can also be pressed straight in)
(21) <
> Vertical-grip AF start button/Smart controller
(22) <
> Vertical-grip Quick control dial 2
(23) <
> Vertical-grip AE lock button
(24) <
> Vertical-grip AF point selection button
32
LCD panel information display
Information displayed varies depending on camera status. For icon details, see Information
Display.
Viewfinder information display
Information displayed varies depending on camera status.
Battery Pack LP-E19
(1) Battery lock lever
(2) Contacts
(3) Protective cover
(4) Battery release handle
33
Battery Charger LC-E19
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E19 (
).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
6
)
(
5
)(
4
)
(
7
)
(
8
)
(1) Contacts
(2) Battery slots
(3) Power cord socket
(4) Recharge performance check button/Calibration button
(5) Charge lamp/Recharge performance check lamp/Discharge time lamp
(6) Calibration (discharge) lamp
(7) Protective cover (two included)
(8) Power cord
34
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the strap mount from the bottom, then pass it through the
strap buckle as shown. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not
loosen from the buckle.
35
Using the Cable Protector
When connecting the camera to a computer, use the included interface cable or a
Canon cable.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable when connecting the camera to a monitor or
other display device.
When connecting an interface cable, use the included cable protector. Using the
cable protector helps prevent accidental disconnection and terminal damage.
Preparation
The cable protector consists of the protector (1) and a clamp (2).
Attach the protector to the camera.
36
With the included interface cable and a slim commercially
available HDMI cable
1.
(3) Included interface cable
2.
(4) Slim commercially available HDMI cable
37
3.
4.
With an included or optional Canon interface cable and a thick
commercially available HDMI cable
1.
(5) Included or optional Canon interface cable
38
2.
(6) Thick commercially available HDMI cable
With only an optional Canon interface cable or a commercially
available HDMI cable
When using only an optional Canon interface cable or a thick/slim commercially available
HDMI cable, pass the cable through the clamp (2) as shown before attaching the clamp to
the cable protector.
39
Caution
Using the camera when an interface cable or HDMI cable is connected without the
cable protector may damage the camera terminal. Make sure each cable is
securely connected to the camera terminal.
40
Software
Software Overview
Downloading and Installing EOS Software or Other Dedicated Software
Software Instruction Manuals
Software Overview
This section summarizes software used with EOS cameras. Note that downloading and
installing the software requires an internet connection. The software cannot be downloaded
or installed in environments without an internet connection.
EOS Utility
Enables you to transfer your captured still photos and movies from the camera to a
connected computer, set various camera settings from the computer, and shoot remotely
from the computer.
Digital Photo Professional
Software recommended for users who shoot RAW images. Enables image viewing, editing,
printing, and more.
Picture Style Editor
Enables you to edit existing Picture Styles or create and save original Picture Style files.
This software is for users who are familiar with image processing.
GPS Log File Utility
Utility for converting GPS log files (.LOG) to KMZ format.
41
Downloading and Installing EOS Software or Other
Dedicated Software
Always install the latest version of the software.
Update any previous versions that are installed by overwriting them with the latest version.
Caution
Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software. The
software will not be installed correctly.
The software cannot be installed unless the computer is connected to the internet.
Previous versions cannot display images from this camera correctly. Also,
processing RAW images from this camera is not possible.
42
1.
Download the software.
Connect to the internet from a computer and access the following
Canon website.
https://cam.start.canon/
Select your country or region of residence and download the software.
Depending on the software, you may need to enter the camera's serial
number. The serial number is on the bottom of the camera.
Decompress it on the computer.
For Windows
Click the displayed installer file to start the installer.
For macOS
A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow the steps below to
startup the installer.
1.Double-click the dmg file.
• A drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.
If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive
icon to display it.
2.Double-click the installer file.
• The installer starts.
2.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
43
Preparation and Basic Operations
This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera
operations.
•
Charging the Battery
• Inserting/Removing Batteries
• Inserting/Removing Cards
• Using the Screen
• Turning on the Power
• Attaching/Detaching RF Lenses
• Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
• Multi-Function Shoe
• Using the Viewfinder
• Using Eye Control
• Basic Operations
• Menu Operations and Settings
• Quick Control
• Touch-Screen Operation
45
Charging the Battery
1.
Connect and plug in the battery charger.
Connect the power cord to the charger and plug the other end into a
power outlet.
All indicator lamps are off when no batteries are loaded.
2.
Remove the protective cover.
Remove the included protective covers from the charger and battery.
46
3.
Charge the battery.
Slide the battery in (in the opposite direction from protective cover
removal) and make sure it is securely attached to the charger.
You can load a battery into either slot or slot .
Charging begins automatically, and the charge lamp blinks or lights up
in green.
Charging is finished when all three charge lamps (50%/80%/100%)
are lit in green.
Charging a depleted battery takes approx. 2 hr. and 50 min. at room temperature
(23°C/73°F). The time required to charge the battery will vary greatly depending on the
ambient temperature and the battery's remaining capacity.
For safety, charging in low temperatures (5–10°C/41–50°F) takes longer (up to approx.
5 hr.).
Caution
Use Battery Charger LC-E19 to charge Battery Pack LP-E19 (both included). This
battery cannot be charged with Battery Charger LC-E4N/LC-E4.
Depending on the condition of the battery, charging to 100% capacity may not be
possible.
Note
If you load two batteries, they are charged one after another in the order you load
them.
47
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
Charge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used.
After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger from the power
outlet.
When not using the battery or charger, reattach the included protective covers.
Use the battery in an ambient temperature range of 0–45°C/32–113°F.
For optimal battery performance, use batteries where the ambient temperature is 10–
30°C/50–86°F. Lower temperatures may temporarily lower battery performance and
reduce battery life.
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount of power
current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life.
Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing the battery when it is fully
charged may lower the battery performance.
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz power source.
If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter for the respective country or
region. To avoid damage, do not connect to portable voltage transformers.
Check battery recharge performance, as needed.
Press the charger's <
> button during charging to check battery
recharge performance, as indicated by how many of the three lamps are lit in green.
: Battery's recharge performance is good.
: Battery's recharge performance is slightly degraded.
: Purchasing a new battery is recommended.
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having been fully charged,
the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery's recharge performance ( ) and purchase a new battery.
48
The < > lamp blinks.
This display advises you to calibrate (discharge) the battery, which will enable accurate
charging capacity determination and battery level display on the camera.
When the < > lamp blinks in green, calibration is recommended. To charge the
battery at this time, wait approx. 10 sec., and charging will begin automatically.
To perform calibration, press the < > button while the < > lamp is
blinking in green. The <
> lamp now remains lit in green, and discharging begins.
Charging begins automatically after discharging, but note that the more fully charged the
battery is, the longer discharging will take. Estimated time required for discharging is
indicated by the <14h>, <4h>, and <2h> lamp, with a blinking green <14h> lamp
indicating a discharge time of approx. 4–16 hours.
Calibration drains the remaining battery level, and after this, charging the battery will
take approx. 2 hr. 50 min. To cancel calibration in progress and start charging, remove
and reload the battery in the charger.
Caution
Multiple cycles of charging and use without calibration may result in inaccurate
battery level display ( ).
One battery can be charged while another is calibrated, but two batteries cannot be
charged or calibrated at the same time.
When performing calibration, consider using a battery that is nearly depleted.
Calibrating and then charging Battery Pack LP-E19 when it is fully charged takes
approx. 18 hr. 50 min.
Only the <100%> lamp is lit immediately after a battery is loaded.
Illumination of only the <100%> lamp in green immediately after charging begins
indicates that the internal battery temperature is out of range. Charging begins
automatically when the internal temperature returns to 5–40°C/41–104°F.
With two batteries loaded, illumination of only the <100%> lamp in green on the side of
the second battery indicates standby status.
All three lamps are blinking.
Charging is not possible when batteries other than Battery Pack LP-E19 are loaded in
the charger. In this case, the three charge lamps and <
> lamp blink in green.
If the three charge lamps blink in green consecutively during charging (with or without
blinking of the <
> lamp in green), remove the battery and contact your dealer or
the nearest Canon Service Center.
If the three charge lamps blink during calibration, remove the battery and contact your
dealer or the nearest Canon Service Center.
49
Inserting/Removing Batteries
Insertion
Removal
Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E19 into the camera.
Insertion
1.
Remove the battery compartment cap.
2.
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery firmly, all the way in, then turn the battery release
handle as shown by the arrow.
Caution
There may be a slight delay before the camera turns on when a battery is used in
the camera for the first time.
You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E19.
50
Note
Wipe away any dirt on the battery's water-repellent rubber lining (1) with a
moistened cotton swab.
51
Removal
1.
Turn the battery release handle and remove the battery.
Make sure the power switch is set to < > ( ).
Flip out the battery release handle, turn it as shown by the arrow, and
remove the battery.
To prevent short-circuits, always attach the included protective cover
( ) to the battery.
When not using the camera, attach the battery compartment cap ( ).
52
Inserting/Removing Cards
Insertion
Formatting the Card
Removal
This camera accepts two cards. Recording is possible as long as there is at least one
card in the camera.
With two cards inserted, you can select one card to record to, or you can record the same
image to both cards at once ( ).
Caution
Make sure the SD card's write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Insertion
1.
Slide the cover to open it.
53
2.
Insert the card.
Card 1 (CFexpress card)
Card 2 (SD card)
The card in the rear card slot is [ ] (CFexpress card), and the one in
front of it is [
] (SD card).
CFexpress card: With the card label facing you, insert the open side of
the card (2) into the card slot. Inserting cards the wrong way may
damage the camera.
The card 1 eject button (gray) pops out.
SD card: With the card label facing you, insert the card into the card
slot until it clicks into place.
54
3.
Close the cover.
Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
55
Removal
1.
Open the cover.
Set the power switch to < >.
Check that the access lamp (1) is off, then open the cover.
If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen, close the cover.
2.
Remove the card.
CFexpress card: Press the card 1 eject button (2) to eject the card.
SD card: Gently press the card in, then release it to eject it.
Pull the card straight out, then close the cover.
Caution
Do not remove cards immediately after a red [
] icon is displayed as you are
shooting. Cards may be hot, due to high internal camera temperature. Set the power
switch to <
> and stop shooting for a while before removing cards. Removing hot
cards immediately after shooting may cause you to drop and damage them. Be careful
when removing cards.
58
Note
The number of shots available varies depending on remaining card capacity and
settings such as image quality and ISO speed.
Setting [ : Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you from
forgetting to insert a card (
).
Caution
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being
written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do
not open the card slot cover during this time. To avoid corrupting image data
or damaging cards or the camera, never do any of the following while the
access lamp is lit or blinking.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or striking the camera.
• Unplugging or plugging in a power cord
(when using optional household power outlet accessories).
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start from
0001 ( ).
If a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and reinsert the
card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images and
then format the card with the camera ( ). The card may then return to normal.
Do not touch the card's contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do not expose
the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts, contact failure
may result.
Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)
Use of UHS-II microSDHC/SDXC cards with a microSD to SD adapter is not
recommended.
When using UHS-II cards, use SDHC/SDXC cards.
59
Using the Screen
You can change the direction and angle of the screen.
1.
Flip out the screen.
2.
Rotate the screen.
When the screen is out, you can tilt it up or down or rotate it to face the
subject.
Indicated angles are only approximate.
3.
Face it toward you.
Normally, use the camera with the screen facing you.
60
Caution
Avoid forcing the screen into position as you rotate it, which puts undue pressure
on the hinge.
When a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle range of the
flipped-out screen will be limited.
Note
Keep the screen closed and facing the camera body when the camera is not in use.
You can protect the screen.
A mirror image (right/left reversed) of subjects is displayed when the screen faces
subjects in front of the camera.
61
Turning on the Power
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
Changing the Interface Language
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Battery Level Indicator
< >
The camera turns on.
< >
The camera turns on. Multi-function locking is engaged ( ).
< >
The camera is turned off and does not function. Set the power switch to this position
when not using the camera.
Note
If you set the power switch to < > while an image is being recorded to the
card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the recording
finishes.
62
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
If you turn on the camera and the date/time/zone setting screen appears, see
Date/Time/
Zone to set the date/time/zone.
Changing the Interface Language
To change the interface language, see
Language.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever the power switch is set to < >, the sensor is cleaned automatically
(which may make a faint sound). During the sensor cleaning, the screen will display
[
].
Even during sensor cleaning, you can stop cleaning and shoot immediately by pressing
the shutter button halfway ( ).
If you repeatedly turn the power switch to < / > or < > within a short
time period, the [
] icon may not be displayed, but this does not indicate the camera is
malfunctioning.
63
Battery Level Indicator
When the power switch is set to <
>, the battery level will be indicated.
Display
Level (%) 100–70 69–50 49–20 19–10 9–1 0
Note
Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens's Image Stabilizer.
• Using Wi-Fi features.
• Using the screen frequently.
• Using accessories compatible with the multi-function shoe.
The number of available shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting
conditions.
Lens operations are powered by the camera's battery. Certain lenses may exhaust
the battery faster than others.
See [ : Battery info.] to check the battery status ( ).
64
Attaching/Detaching RF Lenses
Attaching a Lens
Detaching a Lens
Caution
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision.
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera's power switch to < >.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch
the rotating part.
Tips for avoiding smudges and dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body cap to
the camera.
Remove smudges and dust on the body cap before attaching it.
65
Attaching a Lens
1.
Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
2.
Attach the lens.
Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the
camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place.
66
3.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to <
>.
< > stands for autofocus.
< > stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate.
For RF lenses without a focus mode switch, set to [AF] or [MF] in the
camera menu, in [
: Focus mode].
4.
Remove the front lens cap.
67
Detaching a Lens
While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow.
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
Attach lens caps to the lens you removed.
68
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
Attaching a Lens
Detaching a Lens
All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching an optional Mount Adapter EF-EOS R.
The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1.
Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
69
2.
Attach the lens to the adapter.
Align the red or white mount index on the lens with the corresponding
mount index on the adapter and turn the lens as shown by the arrow
until it clicks into place.
(1) Red index
(2) White index
3.
Attach the adapter to the camera.
Align the red mount indexes (3) on the adapter and camera and turn
the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.
70
4.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to <
>.
< > stands for autofocus.
< > stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate.
5.
Remove the front lens cap.
71
Detaching a Lens
1.
While pressing the lens release button, turn the adapter as shown by
the arrow.
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
2.
Detach the lens from the adapter.
Hold down the lens release lever on the adapter and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
Attach lens caps to the lens you removed.
Caution
For lens precautions, see Attaching/Detaching RF Lenses.
72
Multi-Function Shoe
Using the Multi-Function Shoe
The multi-function shoe is a hot shoe that supplies power to accessories and offers
advanced communication functionality.
Using the Multi-Function Shoe
Removing the shoe cover
Remove the shoe cover (1) by pressing the part labeled (A) in the figure as shown with
your finger. After removal, keep the shoe cover in a convenient place to avoid losing it.
Attaching accessories
When attaching accessories that communicate through contacts of the multi-function
shoe, insert the accessory's mounting foot until it clicks into place, then slide the
mounting foot locking lever to secure it. For details, refer to the accessory's Instruction
Manual.
The following accessories cannot be attached directly to the multi-function shoe.
• Speedlite EL-1/600EXII-RT/600EX-RT/580EX II
• Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT (Ver. 2)/ST-E3-RT
• Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3
To use the accessories listed above with the camera, you will need Multi-Function Shoe
Adapter AD-E1, sold separately. For details, refer to the AD-E1 Instruction Manual.
When attaching accessories other than these that are designed for regular hot shoes,
insert the accessory's mounting foot all the way in, then slide the mounting foot locking
lever to secure it. For details, refer to the accessory's Instruction Manual.
Electronic Viewfinder EVF-DC2/EVF-DC1 cannot be attached to the multi-function shoe.
Attempting to attach it by force may damage it or the multi-function shoe.
73
Attaching the shoe cover
After removing accessories from the multi-function shoe, reattach the shoe cover to
protect the contacts from dust and water.
Slide the shoe cover all the way in by pressing the part labeled (B) in the figure, as
shown.
Caution
Attach accessories correctly as described in Attaching accessories. Loose
attachment may cause the camera or accessories to malfunction, and accessories
may fall off.
Blow off any foreign material on the multi-function shoe with a commercially
available blower or similar tool.
Allow the multi-function shoe to dry before use if it gets wet.
74
Using the Viewfinder
Adjusting the Viewfinder
Using Eyecup ER-hE (Sold Separately)
Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display to either the screen or
viewfinder ( ).
Adjusting the Viewfinder
1.
Turn the dioptric adjustment knob.
Turn the knob left or right to make the viewfinder display look sharp.
Caution
The viewfinder and screen cannot be activated at the same time.
At some aspect ratios, black bars are displayed on the top and bottom or left and
right edges of the screen. These areas are not recorded.
75
Using Eyecup ER-hE (Sold Separately)
Using Eyecup ER-hE may help improve eye control accuracy under intense light sources
and enhance viewfinder visibility outdoors.
1.
Detach the eyecup.
Press in the position indicated.
76
2.
Attach Eyecup ER-hE.
Hold the eyecup as shown.
Slide along the viewfinder eyepiece grooves to attach, and press all the
way in.
You can rotate Eyecup ER-hE as necessary for adjustment. It clicks
every 90° and can be rotated 360°.
77
3.
To remove Eyecup ER-hE:
Hold the eyecup as shown in step 2 and lift straight up.
78
Using Eye Control
Performing Calibration
Using Eye Control for AF
Configuring Pointer Display
Managing Calibration Data
You can control focusing by looking at AF points to select them in viewfinder shooting (eye
control).
The process of registering characteristics of your line of sight for accurate detection of eye
movement by the camera in viewfinder shooting is called calibration. Calibration enables
higher eye control accuracy.
Caution
Eye control is only available in still photo shooting.
Performing Calibration
After adjusting the viewfinder (
), perform calibration under the same conditions as when
you will shoot (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses).
During calibration, keep your eye near the viewfinder.
1.
Select [
: Eye control ].
79
2.
Select [Calibration (CAL)].
Calibration results (calibration data) are saved to the current [CAL no.]
number.
3.
Select [Start].
4.
Look through the viewfinder.
Holding the camera horizontally, look through the viewfinder so that the
four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced.
Press the < > button.
80
5.
Start calibration.
Look at the indicator displayed and press the < > button.
Keep looking at the indicator without blinking until it disappears.
This process is repeated for indicators at five positions (center, right,
left, top, and bottom).
6.
Perform calibration for vertical shooting.
For higher eye control accuracy, select [Refine] and perform calibration
for vertical shooting.
Holding the camera vertically, look through the viewfinder so that the
four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced, then repeat step 5.
If you will also shoot vertically with the camera grip facing the other
direction, perform calibration while holding the camera that way.
To finish calibration after performing calibration only for horizontal
shooting, go to step 7.
81
7.
Exit calibration.
Select [Exit]. Calibration results (calibration data) are saved to the
calibration number shown in step 2.
After calibration, look through the viewfinder and make sure the pointer
moves in response. If the pointer does not seem to follow your gaze
closely, perform calibration again.
Note
Also read General eye control precautions and Enhancing eye control accuracy.
82
Adding calibration data
To register calibration data for other users or eyewear conditions, select an available
number to assign the data to from the numbers labeled with [
] on the [CAL no.] screen,
then perform calibration.
83
Using Eye Control for AF
Caution
Always use eye control under the same eyewear conditions as when you
performed calibration (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses).
Note
Also read General eye control precautions and Enhancing eye control accuracy.
Menu settings
1.
Select [
: Eye control ].
2.
Select [Eye control
].
84
3.
Select [On].
You can enable switching between [Eye control] [Enable] and
[Disable] from the Quick Control screen by customizing the Quick
Control screen ( ).
4.
Select [CAL no.].
Select a calibration number matching your eyewear conditions (such as
with or without glasses).
5.
Select calibration data to use.
Press < >.
85
Operations in viewfinder shooting
1.
Look at the subject.
A pointer (1) is displayed when you look through the viewfinder.
With [ : Subject tracking] set to [On], a tracking frame [ ] (2) is
also displayed when subjects are detected.
Look at the position where you wish to focus. To focus at the position of
the tracking frame, look at the tracking frame.
The pointer may stop moving unless the camera can follow your eye
movement. If so, hold the camera away from your face for a moment,
then look through the viewfinder again so that the four corners of the
screen appear evenly spaced.
86
2.
Confirm the subject to start focusing.
Pressing the shutter button halfway confirms the subject to focus on.
With [ : AF area] set to [Whole area AF], the camera focuses in the
area near the pointer.
With the AF area set to an option other than [Whole area AF], the
camera focuses after moving the AF area to the pointer position.
With [ : AF operation] set to [ ], the active AF point turns
blue (3). The camera keeps tracking and focusing on the confirmed
subject while you hold down the shutter button halfway. To stop
tracking confirmed subjects, press the <
> button.
With [ : AF operation] set to [ ], the active AF point turns
green. Pressing the shutter button halfway sets the focus on the current
position.
Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
Caution
If the AF point does not move to your specified position after you confirm the
subject, hold the camera away from your face, then look through the viewfinder
again, or perform calibration again.
Note
You can assign eye control subject confirmation ([Move AF point by eye control])
and AF activation ([Metering and AF start]) to different buttons in [
: Customize
buttons].
With [ : AF area] set to [Whole area AF], the camera keeps tracking and
focusing on confirmed subjects even when you release the shutter button after
holding it down halfway. To stop tracking confirmed subjects, press the <
>
button.
87
Using eye control to display the focus guide
By setting [
: Focus guide] to [On], you can use eye control to display the focus guide
for assistance when focusing manually.
1.
Look at the subject.
Look at the subject to focus on.
2.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The focus guide (1) is displayed where you are looking.
For details on using the focus guide to focus, see Focus Guide.
Note
With [ : Subject tracking] set to [On], a tracking frame [ ] is also displayed
when subjects are detected.
88
General eye control precautions
When multiple people will use eye control on the same camera, each person should
select a different calibration number and perform calibration. Similarly, when the same
person will use eye control with and without glasses or contact lenses, a different
calibration number should be selected and calibration performed for each situation.
When using Eyecup ER-h or an optional Eyecup ER-hE, select a different calibration
number and perform calibration.
Hold the eyecup securely against your face to block out sunlight or other light and keep
your eye steady with the four corners of the screen appearing evenly spaced.
Calibration or eye control may not be possible in the following cases.
• When hard contact lenses are worn
• When color contact lenses are worn
• When special eyewear is worn, such as near-infrared blocking, mirrored, or bifocal
glasses or sunglasses
• When a mask is worn
• When your eye is too far from the viewfinder
• When your eye is too close to the viewfinder
• When your eye is too misaligned with the viewfinder
• When the viewfinder or your eyewear is dirty
• When the viewfinder is fogged up
• When your contact lenses are not fully in contact with your eyes
• When sunlight is shining directly into the viewfinder
Less responsive viewfinder display under low light may make eye control more difficult
to use.
89
Enhancing eye control accuracy
The camera can learn about eye characteristics from the calibration data it collects.
Eye control accuracy can be improved by repeating calibration under various levels of
brightness (such as indoors, outdoors, during the day, and at night) for the same
calibration number.
To use eye control in each camera orientation, repeat calibration for the same
calibration number with the camera held horizontally and vertically with the grip up and
down.
Keep the following tips in mind when performing calibration or using eye control.
• Look into the viewfinder so that the four corners of the screen appear evenly
spaced.
• Look at the subject.
• Avoid squinting.
• Avoid blinking.
• During calibration, look through the viewfinder as you do when shooting.
• If you use glasses, wear them correctly.
• In calibration outdoors, prevent sunlight from entering the viewfinder.
• Use Eyecup ER-hE (sold separately, ).
• Block out sunlight, to the extent possible, by keeping your face close to the
viewfinder.
• If it is difficult to perform calibration or eye control correctly, try keeping both eyes
open as you look through the viewfinder.
If eye control seems inaccurate
Eye control may be less accurate if your eye is off-center, relative to the viewfinder.
Adjust how you are holding the camera to your face, so that the four corners of the
screen appear evenly spaced.
Eye control may be less accurate if you point the camera downward during calibration.
Hold the camera straight when performing calibration.
90
Configuring Pointer Display
You can configure pointer display, including whether the pointer is visible or not.
Pointer display
Pointer visibility can be set to [On], [Shtg standby], or [Off].
• Select [Shtg standby] to keep the pointer visible from when you look through the
viewfinder until the moment you confirm the subject to focus on using eye control.
• The pointer may not always be displayed, depending on the state of the camera.
• In [ ] focus mode, setting [ : Focus guide] to [On] makes the pointer visible.
Sensitivity
Sensitivity of the pointer in response to eye movement is adjustable.
• Set toward the positive end to make the pointer responsive even to subtle eye
movement.
• Set toward the negative end to make the pointer less responsive.
Color
Choose [Orange], [Purple], or [White] as the pointer color.
Display size
Choose [Standard] or [Small] as the pointer display size.
91
Display format
Choose [ ] or [ ] as the style of pointer displayed.
92
Managing Calibration Data
Entering names
You can enter names to identify calibration data.
1.
Select a calibration data number.
Select the number and press the < > button.
2.
Enter text.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press <
> to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
When you are finished entering text, press the < > button and
select [OK].
93
Saving and loading calibration data
Registered calibration data can be saved to a card. You can also load calibration data from
a card to use it.
1.
Select [Calibration (CAL)].
2.
Select [Save/load (card)].
3.
Select [Save to card].
Select [Save to card] to save all calibration data on the camera to the
card.
Select [Load from card] to overwrite calibration data on the camera
with calibration data from the card.
94
Deleting calibration data
Eye control is less accurate if the same calibration number is used for calibration under
different eyewear conditions (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses) or by
multiple users. In this case, delete the calibration data and perform calibration again.
1.
Select [Calibration (CAL)].
2.
Select [Delete].
3.
Delete the calibration data.
Select the data to delete and press < >.
To delete all calibration data, select [Delete all] and press < >.
After you select [OK] on the confirmation screen, the data is deleted.
95
Basic Operations
Holding the Camera
Shutter Button
< > Main Dial
< > Quick Control Dial 1
< > Quick Control Dial 2
< > Multi-Controller
< > Mode Button
< > Multi-Function Button
< > AF Start Button/Smart Controller
< > Multi-Function Lock Switch
< > LCD Panel Info Switching/Illumination Button
Vertical Shooting
< > Control Ring
Button Backlighting
< > Info Button
96
Holding the Camera
Viewing the screen as you shoot
As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see
Using the Screen.
(1) Normal angle
(2) Low angle
(3) High angle
Shooting through the viewfinder
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
(1) Horizontal shooting
(2) Vertical shooting
1.With your right hand, hold the camera firmly by the camera grip.
2.With your left hand, support the lens from below.
3.Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4.Rest your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5.To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6.Hold the camera near your face and look through the viewfinder.
97
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can
further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing halfway
This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed
and aperture value.
The exposure value (shutter speed and aperture value) is displayed on the screen, in the
viewfinder, or on the LCD panel for 8 sec. (metering timer/
).
Pressing completely
This releases the shutter and takes the picture.
Preventing camera shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake. It
can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake, note the following:
• Hold the camera still, as shown in
Holding the Camera.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the shutter button
completely.
98
Note
The camera will still pause before taking a picture if you press the shutter button
completely without pressing it halfway first, or if you press the shutter button
halfway and immediately press it completely.
Even during menu display or image playback, you can return to shooting standby
by pressing the shutter button halfway.
99
< > Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the <
> dial.
Press a button such as < >, < >, < >, or < >, then turn
the <
> dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.
Used for operations such as setting the ISO speed, drive mode, AF operation, white
balance, and flash exposure compensation.
(2) Turn only the <
> dial.
Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed, aperture value, etc.
Note
The operations in (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the
Multi-function lock ( ).
100
< > Quick Control Dial 1
(1) After pressing a button, turn the <
> dial.
Press a button such as < >, < >, < >, or < >, then turn
the <
> dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.
Used for operations such as selecting the ISO speed, drive mode, AF operation, white
balance, and flash exposure compensation.
(2) Turn only the <
> dial.
Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.
Used for operations such as setting the exposure compensation amount and the
aperture value setting for manual exposures.
Note
The operations in (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the
Multi-function lock ( ).
101
< > Quick Control Dial 2
(1) After pressing a button, turn the <
> dial.
Press a button such as < >, then turn the < > dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.
Used for operations such as switching between main tabs on the menu screen.
(2) Turn only the <
> dial.
Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.
Used for operations such as setting the ISO speed.
Note
The operations in (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the
Multi-function lock ( ).
102
< > Multi-Controller
<
> is an eight-direction key with center button. To use it, press lightly with the tip of your
thumb.
Examples of using the Multi-controller
• AF point/magnified frame movement in still photo shooting or movie recording
• White balance correction
• Magnified area position movement during playback
• Quick Control
• Selecting or setting menu items
103
< > Mode Button
You can set the shooting mode.
Press the < > button, then use < >, < >, < >, or < > to select a
shooting mode.
104
< > AF Start Button/Smart Controller
On this control, you can press the center or drag with your finger.
Pressing the < > button activates autofocusing. This is equivalent to pressing
the shutter button halfway.
You can move the AF point by dragging on the smart controller after pressing the
<
> button. You can also adjust the sensitivity—the amount the AF point moves in
response to dragging ( ).
[Direct AF pt sel (during meter)] can be assigned to this control by selecting [Smart
controller] in [
: Customize buttons]. Assigning this function enables direct selection
of AF points as long as the metering timer is running.
Caution
Precautions when using the smart controller
In case of poor responsiveness if you are wearing gloves, use this control without
wearing the gloves.
The camera may not respond to touch operations with wet fingers.
106
< > LCD Panel Info Switching/Illumination Button
Each press of the < > button changes the information on the LCD panel.
Illuminate the LCD panel by holding down the < > button ( ).
108
Vertical Shooting
Vertical shooting controls such as buttons, dials, and a Multi-controller are arranged near the
bottom of the camera (
).
(1) Vertical-grip Multi-function button
(2) Vertical-grip Main dial
(3) Vertical-grip shutter button
(4) Vertical-grip Multi-function button 2
(5) Vertical-grip depth-of-field preview button
(6) Vertical-grip Multi-controller
(7) Vertical-grip AF start button/Smart controller
(8) Vertical-grip Quick control dial 2
(9) Vertical-grip AE lock button
(10) Vertical-grip AF point selection button
109
< > Control Ring
By default, exposure compensation can be set by turning the control ring of RF lenses or
mount adapters while pressing the shutter button halfway in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]
mode. Otherwise, you can assign a different function to the control ring by customizing
operations in [
: Customize dials] ( ).
110
Button Backlighting
< >, < >, < >, < >, and < / > button backlighting is activated during
LCD panel illumination, menu or Quick Control screen display, or image playback. This
makes it easier to see the button layout in low-light locations. Button backlighting is
deactivated when the metering timer starts, which is triggered by pressing the shutter button
halfway, for example.
111
< > Info Button
Each press of the < > button changes the information shown.
The following sample screens are for still photos.
112
Menu Screen
(1) Main tabs
(2) Secondary tabs
(3) Menu items
(4)
: Shooting
(5)
: Autofocus
(6)
: Playback
(7)
: Communication functions
(8)
: Set-up
(9)
: Custom Functions
(10)
: My Menu
(11) Menu settings
114
Menu Setting Procedure
1.
Display the menu screen.
Press the < > button to display the menu screen.
2.
Select a tab.
Each time you turn the < > dial, the main tab (group of functions)
will switch. You can also switch tabs by pressing the <
> button.
Turn the < > dial to select a secondary tab.
3.
Select an item.
Turn the < > dial to select an item, then press < >.
115
4.
Select an option.
Turn the < > dial to select an option.
The current setting is indicated in blue.
5.
Set an option.
Press < > to set it.
6.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button to return to shooting standby.
Note
The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed the
<
> button to display the menu screen.
Menu operations are also possible by tapping the menu screen or using < >.
To cancel the operation, press the < > button.
116
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: When focus bracketing has been set
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The menu item is dimmed if another function setting is
overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by selecting the dimmed menu item and pressing
<
>.
If you cancel the overriding function's setting, the dimmed menu item will become settable.
Caution
You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu items.
Note
In [ : Reset camera], you can reset menu functions to the default settings by
selecting [Basic settings] in [Reset individual settings] ( ).
117
Quick Control
You can directly and intuitively select and set the settings displayed.
1.
Press the <
> button ( ).
118
2.
Select a setting item and set your preferred option.
To select an item, turn the < > dial or press < > up or down.
To adjust the setting, turn the < > or < > dial, or press < >
left or right. Some items are set by pressing a button after this.
You can customize the setting items on the screen shown above in
[
: Customize Quick Controls] ( ).
To access the Customize Quick Controls screen, press and hold the
<
> button ( ).
Press < > vertically or horizontally to select an item on the screen
shown above.
To adjust the setting, turn the < >, < >, or < > dial. Some
items are set by pressing a button after this.
119
Touch-Screen Operation
Tapping
Dragging
Tapping
Sample screen (Quick Control)
Use your finger to tap (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the screen.
For example, when you tap [ ], the Quick Control screen appears. By tapping [ ],
you can return to the preceding screen.
Note
To have the camera beep for touch operations, set [ : Beep] to [Enable] ( ).
Responsiveness to touch operations can be adjusted in [ : Touch control] ( ).
120
Dragging
Sample screen (Menu screen)
Slide your finger while touching the screen.
121
Fv: Flexible-Priority AE
In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed manually or
automatically and combine these settings with your choice of exposure compensation.
Shooting in [
] mode, with control over each of these parameters, is equivalent to shooting
in [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode.
* [
] stands for Flexible value.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
2.
Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
Turn the < > dial to select an item to set. [ ] appears to the left
of the selected item.
Turn the < > dial to set the option.
To reset the setting to [AUTO], press the < > button.
123
3.
Set the amount of exposure compensation.
Turn the < > dial and select the exposure level indicator. [ ] or
[
] appears to the left of the exposure level indicator.
Turn the < > or < > dial to set the level.
To reset the setting to [±0], press the
<
> button.
Combinations of functions in [
] mode
Shutter Speed Aperture Value ISO Speed
Exposure
Compensation
Shooting Mode
[AUTO] [AUTO]
[AUTO]
Available
Similar to [
]
Manual selection
Manual selection [AUTO]
[AUTO]
Available
Similar to [ ]
Manual selection
[AUTO] Manual selection
[AUTO]
Available
Similar to [
]
Manual selection
Manual selection Manual selection
[AUTO] Available
Similar to [ ]
Manual selection —
Caution
Blinking of the values indicates a risk of underexposure or overexposure. Adjust the
exposure until the value stops blinking.
Slow synchro is not used under low light when you have set up [
] mode to
resemble [
] or [ ] mode, even when [Slow synchro] in [ : External
Speedlite control] is set to [1/250-30sec. auto] (or [1/200-30sec. auto]).
124
Note
Values for shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed that are set to [AUTO] are
underlined.
You can set shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed to [AUTO] and exposure
compensation amount to [±0] in step 2 or 3 by holding down the <
> button.
125
P: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's
brightness.
* [
] stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
2.
Focus on the subject.
Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.
Once the subject is in focus, the AF point turns blue (or with One-Shot
AF, green).
The shutter speed and aperture value are set automatically.
3.
Check the display.
As long as the exposure value is not blinking, standard exposure will be
obtained.
126
4.
Take the picture.
Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.
Caution
If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest aperture value blink, it indicates
underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
If the “1/8000” shutter speed and the highest aperture value blink, it indicates
overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of
light entering the lens.
Note
Program shift
In [ ] mode, you can freely change the combination (program) of shutter speed
and aperture value set automatically by the camera while maintaining the same
exposure. This is called Program shift.
With Program shift, you can press the shutter button halfway, then turn the < >
dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture value is displayed.
Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer ends
(exposure setting display turns off).
Program shift cannot be used with flash.
127
Tv: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture
value to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create
a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.
* [
] stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen motion
(Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)
1.
Set the shooting mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select
[
].
128
2.
Set the desired shutter speed.
Turn the < > dial to set it.
3.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The aperture value is set automatically.
4.
Check the display and shoot.
As long as the aperture value is not blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
Caution
If the lowest aperture value blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the <
> dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture value stops
blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
If the highest aperture value blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <
> dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture value stops
blinking, or set a lower ISO speed.
129
Note
Shutter speed display
For example, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15 sec.
Shutter speeds from “64000” to “4” on the LCD panel indicate the denominator of
the fractional shutter speed.
130
Av: Aperture-Priority AE
Depth-of-Field Preview
In this mode, you set the desired aperture value and the camera sets the shutter speed
automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. A higher f/
number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within
acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less
of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
* [
] stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture value: f/5.6)
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture value: f/32)
1.
Set the shooting mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select
[
].
131
2.
Set the desired aperture value.
Turn the < > dial to set it.
3.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The shutter speed is set automatically.
4.
Check the display and shoot.
As long as the shutter speed is not blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
Caution
If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the <
> dial to decrease the aperture value (open the aperture) until the
shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed.
If the “1/8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <
> dial to increase aperture value (close the aperture) until the
shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed.
132
Note
Aperture value display
The higher the value, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The aperture value
displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera, “F00”
will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field Preview
Press the depth-of-field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture value
setting and check the area in focus (depth of field).
Note
The larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground to
the background.
The depth-of-field effect is readily apparent on images as you change the aperture
value and press the depth-of-field preview button.
Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.
133
M: Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired. To determine
the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a commercially available exposure
meter.
* [
] stands for Manual.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
2.
Set the ISO speed (
).
Turn the < > dial to set it.
With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation ( ).
3.
Set the shutter speed and aperture value.
To set the shutter speed, turn the < > dial, and to set the aperture
value, turn the <
> dial.
134
4.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
Check the exposure level mark [ ] to see how far the current exposure
level is from the standard exposure level.
(1) Standard exposure index
(2) Exposure level mark
5.
Set the exposure and take the picture.
Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter speed
and aperture value.
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can set exposure
compensation (
) as follows:
Tap the exposure level indicator
[ : Expo.comp./AEB]
Quick Control screen
Turn the control ring while pressing the shutter button halfway
Caution
Exposure may not be as expected when ISO Auto is set, because the ISO speed is
adjusted to ensure standard exposure for your specified shutter speed and
aperture value. In this case, set the exposure compensation.
Exposure compensation is not applied in flash photography with ISO Auto, even if
you have set an exposure compensation amount.
135
Note
In [ ] mode with ISO Auto, [ ] (evaluative metering), and [ : AE lock meter.
mode after focus] set to the default setting (
), holding down the shutter button
halfway locks the ISO speed after the camera focuses with One-Shot AF.
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the < > button to lock the ISO speed.
If you press the < > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure
level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when the <
>
button was pressed.
Any existing exposure compensation amount is maintained if you switch to [ ]
mode with ISO Auto after using exposure compensation in [
], [ ], or [ ]
mode ( ).
To coordinate exposure compensation in ½-stop increments with ISO speed set in
⅓-stop increments when [
: Exposure level increments] is set to [1/2-stop] and
used with ISO Auto, exposure compensation is further adjusted by adjusting shutter
speed. However, the shutter speed displayed will not change.
136
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures
Bulb Timer
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely,
and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use bulb exposures for night scenes,
fireworks, astrophotography, and other subjects requiring long exposures.
1.
Set the shooting mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select
[
].
2.
Set the desired aperture value.
Turn the < > dial to set it.
137
3.
Take the picture.
The exposure will continue for as long as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
Elapsed exposure time is displayed on the LCD panel.
Caution
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.
ISO 400 is used when the camera is set to ISO Auto.
When shooting bulb exposures with the self-timer instead of the bulb timer, keep
pressing the shutter button completely (for the self-timer time and bulb exposure
time).
Note
You can reduce the noise generated during long exposures by using [ : Long
exp. noise reduction] ( ).
Using a tripod and the bulb timer is recommended for bulb exposures.
You can also shoot bulb exposures with Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately, ).
You can also shoot bulb exposures with Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold
separately). When you press the remote controller's release (transmit) button, the
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to stop
the bulb exposure.
Bulb Timer
You can set the exposure time for bulb exposures in advance. This feature eliminates the
need to keep holding down the shutter button during bulb exposures, which can reduce
camera shake.
Note that the bulb timer can only be set and will only take effect in [
] (bulb exposure)
mode.
138
1.
Select [
: Bulb timer].
2.
Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press the < > button.
3.
Set the exposure time.
Select an option (hours : minutes : seconds).
Press < > to display [ ].
Set a value, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].)
139
4.
Select [OK].
5.
Take the picture.
After you press the shutter button completely, the bulb exposure
continues for your specified time.
[ ] and the exposure time are displayed on the LCD panel
during bulb timer shooting.
To clear the timer setting, select [Disable] in step 2.
Caution
Bulb exposure stops if you press the shutter button completely and release it during
the timer.
Bulb exposure continues even after your specified exposure time if you keep
pressing the shutter button completely (which overrides automatic stopping when
your specified exposure time elapses).
The bulb timer is cleared (and reverts to [Disable]) when you switch shooting
modes.
140
Still Photo Shooting
To prepare for still photo shooting, set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to
<
>, then press the < > button and choose a shooting mode.
• Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
• Image Quality
• Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio
• Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
• ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos
• HDR PQ Settings
• HDR Mode
• Auto Lighting Optimizer
• Highlight Tone Priority
• Anti-Flicker Shooting
• High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting
• Shooting with Speedlites
• Flash Function Settings
• White Balance
• Custom White Balance
• White Balance Correction
• Color Space
• Picture Style Selection
• Picture Style Customization
• Picture Style Registration
• Clarity
• Lens Aberration Correction
• Long Exposure Noise Reduction
• High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
• Dust Delete Data Acquisition
• Multiple Exposures
142
• Focus Bracketing
• Interval Timer Shooting
• Silent Shutter Function
• Shutter Mode
• Releasing Shutter without Card
• Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
• Customizing Quick Controls
• Shooting with the Touch Shutter
• Image Review
• High-Speed Display
• Metering Timer
• Display Simulation
• Optical Viewfinder Simulation
• Shooting Information Display
• Viewfinder Display Format
• Display Performance
• Metering Mode Selection
• Manual Exposure Compensation
• Exposure Lock (AE Lock)
• General Still Photo Shooting
143
Shooting 3
(1) Anti-flicker shoot.
(2) HF anti-flicker shooting
(3) External Speedlite control
(4) Metering mode
Shooting 4
(1) White balance
(2) Set Custom WB
(3) WB Shift/Bkt.
(4) Color space
(5) Picture Style
• Picture Style Selection
• Picture Style Customization
• Picture Style Registration
(6) Clarity
(7) Lens aberration correction
145
Shooting 7
(1) Drive mode
(2) Interval timer
(3) Bulb timer
(4) Silent shutter function
(5) Shutter mode
(6) Release shutter without card
Shooting 8
(1) IS (Image Stabilizer) mode
(2) Customize Quick Controls
(3) Touch Shutter
(4) Image review
(5) High speed display
(6) Metering timer
Caution
[ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is not displayed when an IS-equipped lens is
attached.
147
Image Quality
Image Size Selection
RAW Images
Guide to Image Quality Settings
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
JPEG/HEIF Quality
Note
“Image quality” in this guide refers to both image size and JPEG/HEIF quality ( ).
Image Size Selection
You can specify
, , , or for JPEG/HEIF images and or for RAW
images.
Note
HEIF can be specified when [ : HDR shooting ] is set to [Enable]. You
can convert these images to JPEG images after shooting ( ).
1.
Select [
: Img type/size].
The screen displayed varies depending on [ Rec options] settings
in [
: Record func+card/folder sel.].
149
2.
Set the image size.
Standard/Auto switch card/Record to multiple
For RAW images, turn the < > dial to select the size, and for
JPEG/HEIF images, turn the <
> dial.
Press < > to set it.
Record separately
When [ Rec options] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to
[Rec. separately], turn the
<
> dial to select [ ] or [ ], then press
<
>. Note that recording separately to and is not
available for RAW images.
Select an image size on the screen displayed, then press < >.
150
Note
is set if you set both RAW and JPEG/HEIF to [ ].
Two versions of each shot are recorded at your specified image quality when you
have selected both RAW and JPEG/HEIF. Both images have the same file number
but each has a different file extension, with .JPG for JPEG, .HIF for HEIF and .CR3
for RAW.
Meanings of image size icons are as follows: : RAW, : Compact RAW,
JPEG: JPEG, HEIF: HEIF,
: Large, : Medium, : Small 1, : Small 2.
151
RAW Images
RAW images are raw data from the image sensor that are recorded to the card digitally as
or , based on your selection. produces RAW images with smaller file
sizes than
.
RAW images can be processed using [
: RAW image processing] ( ) to save them as
JPEG or HEIF images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can process the
RAW image to create any number of JPEG or HEIF images with various processing
conditions.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images. You can
make various adjustments to images depending upon how they will be used and can
generate JPEG, HEIF, or other types of images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.
Note
To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, hereafter DPP) is recommended.
Older versions of DPP Ver. 4.x do not support display, processing, editing, or other
operations with RAW images captured by this camera. If a previous version of DPP
Ver. 4.x is installed on your computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP
from the Canon website to update it ( ), which will overwrite the previous version.
Similarly, DPP Ver. 3.x or earlier does not support display, processing, editing, or
other operations with RAW images captured by this camera.
Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images captured
by this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software manufacturer.
152
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is displayed at the upper left of the shooting screen and
lower right of the viewfinder.
Note
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99 or
more shots continuously. Fewer shots are available for a value of 98 or lower, and
when [BUSY] is displayed on the screen, internal memory is full and shooting will
stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase.
After all captured images have been written to a card, you can once again shoot at
the maximum burst listed in Still photo file size / Number of possible shots /
Maximum burst for continuous shooting.
154
JPEG/HEIF Quality
1.
Select [
: quality].
2.
Select the desired image size.
Select the image size, then press < >.
3.
Set the desired quality (compression).
Select the number, then press < >.
Higher numbers offer higher quality (lower compression).
Quality of 6–10 is indicated by < >, and 1–5, by < >.
155
Note
The higher the quality, the fewer shots will be available. In contrast, the lower the
quality, the more shots will be available.
156
Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio
Normally with RF or EF lenses, images are captured at the sensor size of approx.
36.0×24.0mm in full-frame shooting, but in cropped shooting, you can isolate and magnify
the center of the image approx. 1.6× (APS-C size) as if using a telephoto lens, or you can
set an aspect ratio as needed before shooting. EF-S lenses capture a 3:2 area in the center,
magnified approx. 1.6× (APS-C size).
1.
Select [
: Cropping/aspect ratio].
2.
Select an option.
Select [Full-frame], [1.6x (crop)], [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect
ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)].
With EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set automatically, and no other
option is available.
To proceed without changing shooting area display, press < > and
go to step 4.
157
3.
Select how the shooting area is displayed.
On the screen in step 2, press the < > button.
Select the type of display, then press < >.
Caution
/ / / image quality options are not available
when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.
Shooting with [1.6x (crop)] and image quality set to / /
/ produces / / images, respectively.
Shooting with an EF-S lens when [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3
(aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set automatically clears
the setting and shoots with [1.6x (crop)] at a 3:2 aspect ratio.
158
4.
Take the picture.
Setting examples
When
is set
When is set or an EF-S lens is used
When / is set
When / is set
159
When [1.6x (crop)] is set or an EF-S lens is used, an image magnified
approx. 1.6× is displayed.
When [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)]
is set, the image within the black masked or outlined area is captured.
Caution
Areas outside the cropped area are not recorded in RAW shooting when [1.6x
(crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.
[Shooting area] has no effect on display when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S
lenses.
[ : Add cropping information] is only available when [Full-frame] is set.
When external flash units are used, flash auto zoom (automatic adjustment of flash
coverage) based on the [
: Cropping/aspect ratio] setting is not performed.
Note
For details on pixel counts when cropping or an aspect ratio is set, see Still photo
pixel count.
Nearly 100% field of view coverage is maintained vertically and horizontally when
cropping or an aspect ratio is set.
Aspect ratio information is added to RAW images when an aspect ratio is set,
which are captured at full size. When the RAW images are played back, the image
area used for shooting is indicated by lines. Note that only the shooting image area
is shown in Slide Show.
160
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
In exposure bracketing, three consecutive images are captured at different exposures within
your specified range of up to ±3 stops (in 1/3-stop increments) by automatically adjusting the
shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO speed.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
Setting with camera controls
1.
Press the <
> and < > button at the same time.
2.
Set the AEB range.
Turn the < >, < >, or < > dial to set the AEB range.
The AEB range is displayed on the shooting screen when you return to
that screen.
161
3.
Take the picture.
Standard exposure
Decreased exposure
Increased exposure
Three bracketed shots are taken, according to the specified drive
mode, in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and
increased exposure.
AEB will not be automatically canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to
set the AEB range to “0.”
Setting from the menu
1.
Select [
: Expo.comp./AEB].
162
2.
Set the AEB range.
Turn the < > dial to set the AEB range (1). By turning the < >
dial, you can set the exposure compensation amount.
Press < > to set it.
When you close the menu, the AEB range will be displayed on the
screen.
3.
Take the picture.
Shoot as described in step 3 of Setting with camera controls.
AEB will not be automatically canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to
turn off the AEB range display.
Caution
Exposure compensation in AEB may be less effective with [ : Auto Lighting
Optimizer] ( ) set to an option other than [Disable].
163
Note
[ ] blinks in the lower left of the screen during AEB.
If the drive mode is set to [ ], press the shutter button three times for each shot.
In [
], [ ], or [ ] mode, holding down the shutter button completely captures
three images, one after another, before the camera automatically stops shooting.
When [
] or [ ] is set, three consecutive shots are captured after a delay of 10
or 2 sec.
You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
AEB is not available in flash photography or bulb exposures, or when set to Multi
Shot Noise Reduction, HDR mode, or focus bracketing.
AEB will be canceled automatically if you do any of the following: Setting the power
switch to <
> or when the flash is fully charged.
164
ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos
ISO Speed Range When Set Manually
ISO Speed Range Used with ISO Auto
Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
Set the ISO speed (image sensor's sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level.
For details on ISO speed in movie recording, see ISO Speed in Movie Recording.
1.
Set the ISO speed.
With an image displayed on the screen, set by turning the < > dial.
ISO speed can be set within ISO 100–102400 in 1/3-stop increments.
Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed automatically.
For details on the ISO Auto range, see ISO speed (recommended
exposure index) in still photo shooting.
ISO speed guide
Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of camera/subject shake
or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of field), in some shooting conditions.
High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper depth of field),
and longer flash range but may increase image noise.
165
Note
ISO speed can also be set in the ISO speed item by pressing the < > button
with an image displayed on the screen.
Can also be set on the [ISO speed] screen in [ : ISO speed settings].
To expand the manual ISO speed setting range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H
(equivalent to ISO 204800), adjust [ISO speed range] in [
: ISO speed
settings] ( ).
Caution
Image noise (dots of light or banding) and irregular colors may increase and
apparent resolution may decrease at H (equivalent to ISO 204800), because this is
an expanded ISO speed.
Because L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the dynamic
range will be somewhat narrower compared to the standard setting.
Setting [ : Highlight tone priority] to [Enable] or [Enhanced] ( ) will prevent
you from selecting L (equivalent to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, or H (equivalent to
ISO 204800).
When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure, or multiple
exposure, image noise (graininess, dots of light, banding, etc.), irregular colors, or
color shift may become noticeable.
When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such as a
combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure, images may
not be recorded properly.
If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject, overexposure may
result.
166
ISO Speed Range When Set Manually
You can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum limits). You can
set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to ISO 50) to ISO 102400, and the maximum limit
within ISO 100 to H (equivalent to ISO 204800).
1.
Select [
: ISO speed settings].
2.
Select [ISO speed range].
3.
Set [Minimum].
Select the [Minimum] box, then press < >.
Select the ISO speed, then press < >.
167
4.
Set [Maximum].
Select the [Maximum] box, then press < >.
Select the ISO speed, then press < >.
5.
Select [OK].
168
ISO Speed Range Used with ISO Auto
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100–51200. The
minimum can be set within ISO 100–51200 and the maximum within ISO 200–51200, in 1-
stop increments.
1.
Select [Auto range].
2.
Set [Minimum].
Select the [Minimum] box, then press < >.
Select the ISO speed, then press < >.
169
Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
To prevent shutter speeds from being set too low automatically, you can set the minimum
shutter speed for ISO Auto.
This is effective in [
] or [ ] mode when shooting subjects in motion with a wide-angle
lens, or when using a telephoto lens. It can also reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
1.
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
171
2.
Set the desired minimum shutter speed.
Auto
If you select [Auto], turn the < > dial to set the difference relative
to standard speed (toward Slower or Faster), then press <
>.
Manual
If you select [Manual], turn the < > dial to select the shutter speed,
then press <
>.
Caution
If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set
with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter spd.] will be set
to obtain the standard exposure.
This function will not be applied to flash photography.
Note
When [Auto(Standard)] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of
the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to a
single stop of the shutter speed.
172
HDR PQ Settings
PQ in HDR PQ refers to the gamma curve of the input signal for displaying HDR images.
HDR PQ settings enable the camera to produce HDR images conforming to the PQ
specification defined in ITU-R BT.2100 and SMPTE ST.2084. (Actual display depends on
monitor performance.)
Shots are captured as HEIF or RAW images.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
* PQ stands for Perceptual Quantization.
1.
Select [
: HDR shooting ].
2.
Select [Enable].
On the screen during shooting and playback, converted images are
displayed that resemble how the images would look on an HDR display
device.
[ ] and [ ] icons are shown on the screen.
173
Caution
Expanded ISO speeds (L, H) are not available in HDR shooting.
Some scenes may look different from how they appear on an HDR display device.
Unused signal values are roughly indicated by image areas in gray in the histogram
when [
: HDR shooting ] is set to [Enable].
[ : Disp. performance] is not available when [ : HDR shooting ] is
set to [Enable]. It is set to [Smooth].
For images captured with [ : HDR shooting ] set to [Enable], before
playback on an HDR display device, set [
: HDMI HDR output] to [On] ( ).
Note that regardless of the [
: HDMI HDR output] setting, HDR images are used
for display on HDR display devices.
174
HDR Mode
You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced for a high dynamic
range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and
still-life shots.
HDR shooting enhances gradation in dark image areas by merging three images
deliberately captured at different exposures (standard, underexposed, and
overexposed) to produce an HDR image that compensates for loss of detail in dark
image areas. HDR images are captured as HEIFs or JPEGs.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1.
Select [
: HDR Mode].
2.
Set [Adjust dyn range].
Selecting [Auto] will have the dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image's overall tonal range.
The higher the number, the wider the dynamic range will be.
To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable HDR].
175
3.
Set [Limit max brightness] (only with [
: HDR shooting ] set
to [Enable]).
With [Disable], maximum brightness is not limited. Recommended
when you will review images on a monitor supporting display at
brightnesses exceeding 1000 nits.
With [1000 nits], maximum brightness is limited to approx. 1000 nits.
4.
Set [Continuous HDR].
With [1 shot only], HDR shooting is canceled automatically after you
finish shooting.
With [Every shot], HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 2 is
set to [Disable HDR].
176
5.
Set [Auto Image Align].
For handheld shooting, select [Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable].
6.
Set [HDR ghost correc.].
Shooting moving subjects may leave afterimages of the subject. With
[Enable], images are processed to correct ghosting.
HDR images can be produced faster with [Disable] than with [Enable].
7.
Specify the images to save.
To save the three images captured and the resulting HDR image,
select [All images]. The three images can be combined into an HDR
image in Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
To save only the HDR image, select [HDR img only].
177
8.
Take the picture.
When you press the shutter button completely, three consecutive
images will be captured, and the HDR image will be recorded to the
card.
Caution
Expanded ISO speeds (L, H) are not available in HDR shooting.
The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
AEB is not available.
In HDR shooting, three images are captured with settings such as shutter speed
automatically adjusted. For this reason, even in [
], [ ], and [ ] modes, the
shutter speed and ISO speed will change, relative to your specified shutter speed.
Images may be brighter in HDR shooting than in normal shooting. If so, adjust
exposure compensation or other settings as needed.
To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], AF point
display information ( ) and Dust Delete Data ( ) will not be appended to the
image.
If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be slightly lowered.
Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake, etc., auto
image alignment may not take effect. Note that when shooting with excessively
bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto image alignment may not work properly.
If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Disable],
the three images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect may be reduced.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
Subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered with smooth gradation
and may have noise or irregular exposure or colors.
HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may cause issues such as
irregular exposure or colors in HDR images, due to the flickering light source. It
may help reduce the effects of flickering if you set [Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable]
or [HF anti-flicker shooting] to [On].
With HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the card, so it may
take some time. [BUSY] appears on the screen as images are processed, and
shooting is not possible until processing is finished.
Maximum shutter speed in HDR shooting is 1/8000 sec.
178
Note
The electronic shutter is used in HDR shooting.
Image quality of RAW HDR images is as follows.
• [
: HDR shooting ] set to [Disable]: JPEG quality
• [
: HDR shooting ] set to [Enable]: HEIF quality
HDR image quality in RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF shooting corresponds to your
specified JPEG or HEIF image quality.
179
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or contrast is too
low or high.
1.
Select [
: Auto Lighting Optimizer].
2.
Set a correction option.
Caution
Noise may increase and apparent resolution may change, under some shooting
conditions.
If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your
preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation or flash
exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come out
bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
180
Note
To enable [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] to be set even in [ ] and [ ] modes,
press the <
> button in step 2 to clear the checkmark [ ] for [Disabled in M
or B modes].
181
Highlight Tone Priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1.
Select [
: Highlight tone priority].
2.
Set an option.
[Enable]: Improves gradation in highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes smoother.
[Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed highlights even more than
[Enable], under some shooting conditions.
Caution
Noise may increase slightly.
The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set.
With [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.
182
Note
[ : Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] and cannot be changed when you
set [
: HDR shooting ] to [Enable] after pressing the < > button to
add a checkmark to this setting.
[ : Highlight tone priority] will be set to [Disable] even if you set [ : HDR
shooting
] to [Enable], with [Adjust dyn range] in [ : HDR Mode]
set to an option other than [Disable HDR].
183
Anti-Flicker Shooting
Uneven exposure and color may appear in continuous shooting at fast shutter speeds under
flickering light sources such as fluorescent lights, due to uneven vertical exposure. Anti-
flicker shooting enables you to take pictures when exposure and colors are less affected by
flickering.
1.
Select [
: Anti-flicker shoot.].
2.
Select [Enable].
3.
Take the picture.
184
Caution
When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the shutter-
release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous shooting speed may
become slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular.
Flicker at a frequency other than 50Hz or 60Hz cannot be detected. Also, if the
flickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous shooting, effects
of the flicker cannot be reduced.
In [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode, color tone of captured images may vary if the shutter
speed changes during continuous shooting or if you take multiple shots of the same
scene at different shutter speeds. To avoid inconsistent color tone, shoot in [
],
[
], or [ ] mode at a fixed shutter speed.
Color tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable].
Shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed may change when you start
shooting with AE lock.
If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the image,
flicker may not be properly detected.
Flicker reduction may not be possible under special lighting.
Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected result may not
be obtained even if you use this function.
Exposure in flash photography may vary.
Note
Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
Detect flicker manually if the screen flickers (as when the light source changes) by
pressing the <
> button, selecting [ ], then pressing the < > button.
185
High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting
Images may be affected by banding if you shoot under light sources that flicker at high
frequencies. High-frequency anti-flicker shooting enables you to take pictures at suitable
shutter speeds for high-frequency flickering, which minimizes the effect of this flickering on
images.
Caution
Exposure in still photo shooting may vary.
HDR mode is not available in HF anti-flicker shooting.
Before HF anti-flicker shooting, consider setting [ : Same expo. for new
aperture] to [ISO speed].
1.
Set the shooting mode to [
] or [ ].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select a
shooting mode ( ).
2.
Select [
: HF anti-flicker shooting].
186
3.
Select [HF anti-flicker shooting].
4.
Select [On].
187
Auto detecting
The camera detects 50.0–2011.2 Hz light sources and displays a suitable shutter speed for
shooting under light sources that flicker at high frequencies. You can then switch to the
indicated shutter speed.
1.
Set the desired shutter speed.
Set the shutter speed you would prefer to shoot at. For light sources
that flicker at high frequencies, the camera will determine a suitable
shutter speed near this value.
2.
Select [Auto detecting].
3.
Select [OK].
It may improve HF flicker detection accuracy to magnify, as much as
possible, any areas affected by banding.
189
4.
Switch to the indicated shutter speed.
Select [Yes] to switch to the recommended shutter speed.
Selecting [Yes (move to Tv settings)] will display the [Manual setting]
screen. Go to step 2 in Manual setting.
5.
Take the picture.
Caution
The range of the recommended shutter speed indicated varies by shutter mode.
• Mechanical shutter: 1/50.0 to 1/1024.0 sec.
• Electronic first-curtain: 1/50.0 to 1/512.0 sec.
• Electronic shutter: 1/50.0 to 1/2048.0 sec.
• Movie recording: 1/50.0 to 1/2048.0 sec.
Do the following if [No flicker detected] is displayed, or if switching shutter speeds
does not eliminate banding.
• Perform automatic detection again
• Rotate the camera about 90° or switch to automatic detection in other ways
• Try the manual setting option
HF flicker detection may be less accurate under these conditions.
• Scenes with repetitive patterns (with a lattice or stripes, for example)
• Subjects in constant motion
• Extremely bright or dark scenes
• Scenes with multiple light sources
• Scenes with small flashing light sources
• Light sources flickering at lower frequencies
190
Note
Movie display is not updated if high-frequency flickering is automatically detected
during HDMI output of 4K movies.
Manual setting
Check on the screen for image areas affected by light sources that flicker at high
frequencies, then find a suitable shutter speed.
1.
Select [Manual setting].
2.
Adjust the shutter speed.
Do the following if banding is not eliminated at the shutter speed set
with automatic detection.
• Turn the <
> dial. With the < > dial, you can increase the
shutter speed set with automatic detection (×2, ×3, ×4, and so on)
or decrease it (×½, ×⅓, ×¼, and so on).
• Turn the < > dial to fine-tune the setting.
If this does not eliminate banding, rotate the camera about 90° or
switch to automatic detection in other ways.
191
3.
Take the picture.
Caution
The shutter speed range available for the manual setting mode varies by shutter
mode.
• Mechanical shutter: 1/50.0 to 1/2048.0 sec.
• Electronic first-curtain: 1/50.0 to 1/2048.0 sec.
• Electronic shutter: 1/50.0 to 1/8192.0 sec.
• Movie recording: 1/50.0 to 1/4096.0 sec.
Maximum flash sync speed in flash photography is limited to 1/159.8 sec.
regardless of shutter mode.
Dark lenses may prevent correct display simulation.
Safety shift in [ ] mode adjusts the aperture value as needed in HF anti-flicker
shooting.
Image display on the screen or in the viewfinder may differ from actual shooting
results. Take some test shots in advance.
192
Shooting with Speedlites
EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series
Non-Canon Flash Units
EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras
Features of EL/EX series Speedlites (sold separately) can be used in flash photography with
the camera.
For instructions, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite's Instruction Manual.
Sync speed
Varies depending on the shutter mode.
[
: Shutter mode] Setting
Sync Speed
Mechanical 1/200 sec. or slower
Elec. 1st-curtain 1/250 sec. or slower
Electronic 1/180 sec. or slower
Flash exposure compensation
You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation). With an image displayed on
the screen, press the <
> button, turn the < > dial to select the flash exposure
compensation item, then turn the <
> dial to set the flash exposure compensation
amount. You can set the flash exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
FE lock
This enables you to obtain appropriate flash exposure for a specific part of the subject.
Aim the viewfinder center over the subject, press the camera's <
> button, then
compose the shot and take the picture.
193
Caution
Some Speedlites cannot be attached directly to this camera. For details, see Multi-
Function Shoe.
Setting [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( ) to an option other than [Disable] may
still cause images to look bright even if you set lower flash exposure compensation
for darker images.
Using high-speed sync may cause banding in images. To reduce the banding, it
may help to do the following.
• Separate the Speedlite from the camera
• Lower the shutter speed
• Set [Shutter synchronization] to an option other than [High-speed
synchronization]
• Set [
: Shutter mode] to an option other than [Electronic]
Note
The Speedlite will fire an intermittent AF-assist beam as needed, if autofocusing is
difficult under low light.
You can also set flash exposure compensation on the Quick Control screen ( ) or
in the [Flash function settings] setting of [
: External Speedlite control] ( ).
The camera can turn on certain Speedlites automatically when the camera is
turned on. For details, refer to the instruction manual of Speedlites that support this
feature.
194
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash
can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera's shooting mode to [
] or [ ] and adjust the aperture value before
shooting.
When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual flash mode.
195
Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync speed
Sync speed for non-Canon compact flash units varies by shutter mode.
[
: Shutter mode] Setting
Sync Speed
Mechanical 1/200 sec. or slower
Elec. 1st-curtain 1/250 sec. or slower
Electronic 1/180 sec. or slower
With large studio flash units, the flash duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit
and varies depending on the model. Before shooting, confirm that flash sync is
performed correctly by taking some test shots at a sync speed of approx. 1/60 sec. to
1/30 sec.
Caution
Using the camera with a dedicated flash unit or flash accessory for cameras of
other manufacturers poses a risk of malfunction and even damage.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera's multi-function shoe. It may
not fire.
196
Flash Function Settings
Flash Firing
E-TTL Balance
E-TTL II Flash Metering
Continuous Flash Control
Slow Synchro
Flash Function Settings
Flash Custom Function Settings
Clearing Flash Function Settings/Clearing All Speedlite Custom Functions
Functions of EL/EX Series Speedlites compatible with flash function settings can be set via
a camera menu screen. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before
setting the flash functions.
For details on the Speedlite's functions, refer to the Speedlite's Instruction Manual.
1.
Select [
: External Speedlite control].
197
2.
Select an option.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set to [Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist beam of the
Speedlite, set to [Disable].
198
E-TTL Balance
You can set your preferred appearance (balance) for flash shots. This setting enables you to
adjust the ratio of ambient light to Speedlite light output.
Set the balance to [Ambience priority] to lower the proportion of flash output and uses
ambient light to produce lifelike shots with a natural mood. Especially useful when
shooting dark scenes (indoors, for example). After switching to [
] or [ ] mode,
consider setting [Slow synchro] in [
: External Speedlite control] to [1/180-30sec.
auto] (or [1/250-30sec. auto], or [1/200-30sec. auto]) and using slow-sync shooting.
Set the balance to [Flash priority] to make the flash the main source of light. Useful for
reducing shadows on subjects and in the background from ambient light.
Caution
For some scenes, [Ambience priority] may yield the same results as [Standard].
199
E-TTL II Flash Metering
Set to [Eval (FacePrty)] for flash metering suitable for shots of people.
Set to [Evaluative] for flash metering that emphasizes firing in continuous shooting.
If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire metered scene.
Note
Depending on the scene, flash exposure compensation may be necessary.
Caution
Even when [Eval (FacePrty)] is set, some subjects and shooting conditions may
prevent you from obtaining the expected result.
200
Continuous Flash Control
Set to [E-TTL each shot] to perform flash metering for each shot.
Set to [E-TTL 1st shot] to perform flash metering for only the first shot before
continuous shooting. The flash output level for the first shot is applied to all subsequent
shots. Useful when prioritizing continuous shooting speed without recomposing shots.
Caution
Any subject movement in continuous shooting may cause exposure problems.
[E-TTL 1st shot] is set when [ : Shutter mode] is set to [Elec. 1st-curtain] or
[Mechanical] in [
] drive mode.
201
Slow Synchro
You can set the flash-sync speed for flash photography in [
] or [ ] mode. Note that the
maximum flash synchronization speed varies depending on the [
: Shutter mode] setting.
It is 1/180 sec. when set to [Electronic], 1/250 sec. for [Elec. 1st-curtain], and 1/200 sec.
for [Mechanical].
1/180-30sec. auto ( )
*1*2
The shutter speed is set automatically in the following range to suit the brightness. High-
speed sync is also possible.
[
: Shutter mode] Setting
Shutter Speed
Mechanical 1/200–30 sec.
Elec. 1st-curtain 1/250–30 sec.
Electronic 1/180–30 sec.
1/180-1/60sec. auto ( )
*1*3
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light conditions. It is
effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. Light from the flash provides
standard exposure for subjects, but note that backgrounds may be dark.
1/180 sec. (fixed) ( )
*1*4
The shutter speed is fixed as follows, which is more effective in preventing subject blur
and camera shake than with [1/180-1/60sec. auto]
*1*3
.
[
: Shutter mode] Setting
Shutter Speed
Mechanical 1/200 sec.
Elec. 1st-curtain 1/250 sec.
Electronic 1/180 sec.
Note that under low light, backgrounds will be darker than with [1/180-1/60sec. auto]
*1*3
.
* 1: When set to [Electronic].
* 2: [1/250-30sec. auto] (
) when set to [Elec. 1st-curtain] or [1/200-30sec. auto] ( ) for
[Mechanical].
202
* 3: [1/250-1/60sec. auto] ( ) when set to [Elec. 1st-curtain] or [1/200-1/60sec. auto] ( ) for
[Mechanical].
* 4: [1/250 sec. (fixed)] (
) when set to [Elec. 1st-curtain] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] ( ) for
[Mechanical].
Caution
High-speed sync is not available in [ ] or [ ] mode when set to [1/180 sec.
(fixed)]
*1*4
.
Shutter speed is set to 1/8000 when [ : Shutter mode] is [Electronic] and
[High-speed synchronization] is selected with a shutter speed of 1/8000 sec. or
faster.
203
Flash Function Settings
The information displayed on the screen, position of display, and available options vary
depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings, the flash mode, and other
factors. For details on the Speedlite's functions, refer to the Speedlite's Instruction Manual.
Sample display
(1) Flash mode
(2) Wireless functions / Firing ratio control (RATIO)
(3) Flash zoom (flash coverage)
(4) Shutter synchronization
(5) Flash exposure compensation
(6) Flash exposure bracketing
Caution
Functions are limited when using EX series Speedlites that are not compatible with
flash function settings.
204
Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash photography.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard mode of EL/EX series Speedlites for automatic
flash photography.
[Manual flash] is for setting the Speedlite's [Flash output level] yourself.
[CSP] (Continuous shooting priority mode) is available when using a compatible
Speedlite. This mode automatically reduces flash output by one stop and increases ISO
speed by one stop. Useful in continuous shooting, and helps conserve flash battery
power.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible
with the respective flash mode.
Caution
Adjust exposure compensation ( ) as needed in case of overexposure from flash
photography with [CSP] in [
], [ ], or [ ] mode.
Note
With [CSP], ISO speed is automatically set to [Auto].
205
Wireless functions
You can use radio or optical wireless transmission to shoot with wireless multiple-flash
lighting.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with
wireless flash photography.
Firing ratio control (RATIO)
With a macro flash, you can set the firing ratio control.
For details on firing ratio control, refer to the Instruction Manual of the macro flash.
Flash zoom (flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash head, you can set the flash coverage.
206
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash fires immediately after
the shooting starts.
Set to [Second-curtain synchronization] and use low shutter speeds for natural-looking
shots of subject motion trails, such as car headlights.
Set to [High-speed synchronization] for flash photography at higher shutter speeds than
the maximum flash sync shutter speed. This is effective when shooting with an open
aperture in [
] mode to blur the background behind subjects outdoors in daylight, for
example.
Caution
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. or
slower. If the shutter speed is 1/40 sec. or faster, first-curtain synchronization will
be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is set.
Shutter speed is set to 1/8000 when [ : Shutter mode] is [Electronic] and
[High-speed synchronization] is selected with a shutter speed of 1/8000 sec. or
faster.
Flash exposure compensation
Just as exposure compensation is adjustable, you can also adjust flash output.
207
Note
If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set the flash
exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the camera and
Speedlite, the Speedlite's setting overrides the camera's.
208
Flash exposure bracketing
Speedlites equipped with flash exposure bracketing (FEB) can change the external flash
output automatically as three shots are taken at once.
209
Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the Speedlite's Custom Functions, refer to the Instruction Manual of the
Speedlite.
1.
Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
2.
Set the desired functions.
Select the number.
Select an option.
Caution
EX series Speedlites always fire at full output when the [Flash metering mode]
Custom Function is set to [1:TTL] (autoflash).
The Speedlite's Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled from the
camera's [
: External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly on the Speedlite.
210
Clearing Flash Function Settings/Clearing All Speedlite
Custom Functions
1.
Select [Clear settings].
2.
Select the settings to be cleared.
Select [Clear flash settings] or [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn's].
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen to clear all flash settings or
Custom Function settings.
211
White Balance
White Balance
[ ] Auto White Balance
[ ] Setting a Color Temperature
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the Auto [ ]
(Ambience priority) or [
] (White priority) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If
natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to
match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
1.
Press the <
> button ( ).
With an image displayed on the screen, press the < > button.
2.
Select the white balance item.
Turn the < > dial to select the white balance setting item.
212
3.
Select a white balance setting.
Turn the < > dial to make a selection.
Note
For [ ] and [ ] setting instructions, see [ ] Auto White Balance.
To set your preferred color temperature, select [ ] in [ : White balance], then
turn the <
> dial.
(Approx.)
Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
Auto (Ambience priority)
3000–7000
Auto (White priority)
Daylight 5200
Shade 7000
Cloudy, twilight, sunset 6000
Tungsten light 3200
White fluorescent light 4000
When using Flash Automatically set*
Custom 2000–10000
Color temperature 2500–10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function. Otherwise, it will be
fixed to approx. 6000K.
213
White Balance
The human eye adapts to changes in lighting so that white objects look white under all kinds
of lighting. Digital cameras determine white from the color temperature of lighting and, based
on this, apply image processing to make color tones look natural in your shots.
214
[ ] Auto White Balance
With [
] (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity of the image's warm
color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene.
If you select [
] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image's warm color
cast.
1.
Select [
: White balance].
2.
Select [
].
With [ ] selected, press the < > button.
3.
Select an option.
215
Caution
Precautions when set to [ ] (White priority)
The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of the
picture may not be reduced.
When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [ ] (Ambience priority).
216
[ ] Setting a Color Temperature
A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.
1.
Select [
: White balance].
2.
Set the color temperature.
Select [ ].
Turn the < > dial to set a color temperature, then press < >.
The color temperature can be set from approx. 2500K to 10000K in
100K increments.
Note
When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the white
balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
When setting [ ] to a value measured with a commercially available color
temperature meter, take some test shots in advance and adjust the setting as
needed to compensate for any difference between the color temperature meter and
the camera.
217
Custom White Balance
Registering Custom White Balances
Selecting and Shooting with Custom White Balances
Naming Custom White Balances
With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for the specific light
source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this procedure under the light source
at the actual location of the shoot.
Up to five custom white balances can be registered to the camera. You can also add a name
(caption) to registered custom white balances. Register separate ones for still photos and
movies, as needed.
Registering Custom White Balances
To register custom white balances, you can either register a picture taken during this
process or register an image recorded on a card.
Shooting and registering white balances
Registration from the menu
1.
Select [
: Set Custom WB].
218
2.
Select a custom white balance number to be registered.
Press < >.
Turn the < > dial to select a number from 1 to 5 for [ *], then
press <
>. The custom white balance will be registered to the
selected number.
3.
Select [Record and register WB].
219
4.
Shoot a plain white object.
The selected number blinks in the upper left of the screen and on the
LCD panel.
Aim the outlined area over a plain white object, so that white fills the
area.
Focus manually and shoot with the standard exposure set for the white
object.
You can use any of the white balance settings.
The custom white balance is registered to the camera.
To shoot with the registered custom white balance, see Selecting and
Shooting with Custom White Balances.
Caution
If the exposure obtained in step 4 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a
correct white balance may not be obtained.
220
Registration from the Quick Control screen
1.
Press the <
> button.
Select the white balance setting item.
2.
Select [Custom].
3.
Select a custom white balance number to register the white balance
data to.
Turn the < > dial to select a number from 1 to 5, then press the
<
> button.
221
4.
Shoot a plain white object (
).
The custom white balance is registered to the camera.
To shoot with the registered custom white balance, see Selecting and
Shooting with Custom White Balances.
Note
If [Correct WB may not be obtained with the selected image] is displayed in
step 4, return to step 1 and shoot again.
Your shot in step 4 is not recorded to a card.
More accurate white balance can be obtained by shooting a commercially available
gray card or standard 18% gray reflector instead of a white object.
Selecting an image recorded on a card
1.
Shoot a plain white object.
Shoot a plain white object as described in step 4 in Shooting and
registering white balances ( ).
2.
Select [
: Set Custom WB].
222
3.
Select a custom white balance number to be registered.
Press < >.
Turn the < > dial to select a number from 1 to 5 for [ *], then
press <
>. The custom white balance will be registered to the
selected number.
4.
Select [Select image on card].
Images recorded on the card are displayed.
5.
Select an image to register as the custom white balance.
Turn the < > dial to select the image captured in step 1, then press
<
>.
223
6.
Select [OK].
The custom white balance will be registered to the camera.
Check the message and select [OK] to return to the screen in step 3.
Caution
If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a
correct white balance may not be obtained.
The following images cannot be selected: Images captured with the Picture Style
set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure images, cropped images, and images
shot with another camera.
Note
To shoot with the registered custom white balance, select it before shooting.
224
Selecting and Shooting with Custom White Balances
Setting from the menu
1.
Select the custom white balance number.
(1) Registered image
On the [Set Custom WB] screen, select the number of the registered
custom white balance.
2.
Select [Set as white balance].
The white balance setting changes to [ *].
3.
Take the picture.
The picture is taken with the [ *] setting applied.
225
Setting from the Quick Control screen
1.
Press the <
> button.
Select the white balance setting item.
2.
Select [Custom].
3.
Select the custom white balance number.
Turn the < > dial to select a number from 1 to 5, then press the
<
> button.
4.
Take the picture.
226
Naming Custom White Balances
You can add a name (caption) to the five registered custom white balances (custom white
balance nos. 1–5).
1.
Select the custom white balance number.
On the [Set Custom WB] screen, select the number of the registered
custom white balance to add a name to.
2.
Select [Edit WB name].
227
3.
Enter text.
Use < >, < >, or < > to select a character, then press < >
to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
4.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
The information is saved, and display returns to the screen in step 2.
The entered name is displayed below [ *].
Note
As names, it may be helpful to enter the names of places where you registered the
custom white balances, or the names of the light sources.
228
White Balance Correction
White Balance Correction
White Balance Auto Bracketing
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same effect as
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating
filter.
White Balance Correction
1.
Select [
: WB Shift/Bkt.].
229
2.
Set the white balance correction.
Sample setting: A2, G1
Use < > to move the “■” mark on the screen to your preferred
position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green. White
balance is corrected in the direction you move the mark.
The direction and amount of correction are indicated in the upper right
of the screen.
Pressing the < > button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press < > to exit the setting.
Note
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds of a color
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color temperature used to
indicate values such as the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
230
White Balance Auto Bracketing
White balance bracketing enables you to capture three images at once with different color
tones.
Setting the white balance bracketing amount
In step 2 for White Balance Correction, when you turn the < > dial, the “■” mark on
the screen will change to “■ ■ ■” (3 points).
Turning the dial clockwise sets the B/A bracketing, and turning it counterclockwise sets
the M/G bracketing.
B/A bias ±3 levels
The direction and amount of bracketing are indicated in the upper right of the screen.
Pressing the < > button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press < > to exit the setting.
Caution
During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower.
Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the image to
the card.
231
Note
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white balance,
2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance, 2. Magenta
(M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance
bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing, a total of
nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
The white balance icon blinks to indicate that white balance bracketing has been
set.
You can change the bracketing sequence ( ) and number of shots ( ) for the
white balance bracketing.
Bracket stands for bracketing.
232
Color Space
Adobe RGB
The range of reproducible colors is called the “color space.” For normal shooting, sRGB is
recommended.
1.
Select [
: Color space].
2.
Set a color space option.
Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then press < >.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other professional applications.
Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-compatible monitors or DCF 2.0
(Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.
Note
File names of still photos shot in the Adobe RGB color space begin with “_”.
The ICC profile is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC profile, refer to
the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).
233
Picture Style Characteristics
Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid
for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
Note
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.
Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable for most scenes.
Portrait
For smooth skin tones, with slightly less sharpness. Suited for close-up portraits.
Skin tone can be adjusted by changing [Color tone] as described in Settings and
Effects.
Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for impressive
landscapes.
Fine Detail
For detailed rendering of fine subject contours and subtle textures. The colors will be
slightly vivid.
Neutral
For retouching later on a computer. Makes images subdued, with lower contrast and
natural color tones.
Faithful
For retouching later on a computer. Faithfully reproduces the actual colors of subjects as
measured in daylight with a color temperature of 5200K. Makes images subdued, with
lower contrast.
Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Caution
Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG/HEIF images shot with the
[Monochrome] Picture Style.
235
User Def. 1–3
You can add a new style based on presets such as [Portrait] or [Landscape] or a
Picture Style file, then adjust it as needed ( ). With any User Defined Picture Style that
has not yet been registered, pictures will be taken with the same characteristics settings
as with the default settings of [Standard].
236
Symbols
Icons on the Picture Style selection screen represent [Strength], [Fineness], and
[Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters. The numbers
indicate the values for these settings specified for the respective Picture Style.
Sharpness
Strength
Fineness
Threshold
Contrast
Saturation
Color tone
Filter effect (Monochrome)
Toning effect (Monochrome)
Caution
For movie recording, “*, *” is indicated for the [Fineness] and [Threshold]
parameters of [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] cannot be set for movie
recording.
237
Picture Style Customization
Settings and Effects
Monochrome Adjustment
You can customize any Picture Style by changing it from the default settings. For details on
customizing [Monochrome], see
Monochrome Adjustment.
1.
Select [
: Picture Style].
2.
Select a Picture Style.
Select the Picture Style to adjust, then press the < > button.
238
3.
Select an option.
Select an option, then press < >.
For details on settings and effects, see Settings and Effects.
4.
Set the effect level.
Adjust the effect level, then press < >.
Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to
the Picture Style selection screen.
Any settings you change from default values are displayed in blue.
239
Note
For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be set
(not displayed).
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can restore the parameter settings of the
respective Picture Style to the defaults.
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted Picture Style,
then shoot.
Settings and Effects
Sharpness
Strength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis
Fineness
*1
1: Fine 5: Grainy
Threshold
*2
1: Low 5: High
Contrast –4: Low contrast +4: High contrast
Saturation –4: Low saturation +4: High saturation
Color tone –4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone
* 1: Indicates the edge thinness that enhancement applies to. The smaller the number, the finer the
outlines that can be emphasized.
* 2: Contrast threshold between edges and surrounding image areas, which determines edge
enhancement. The smaller the number, the more the outline will be emphasized when the contrast
difference is low. However, noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
240
Monochrome Adjustment
Filter effect
Even with the same monochrome image, you can make white clouds, green trees, or other
elements stand out more by applying a filter effect.
Filter Sample Effects
N:None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye:Yellow Blue sky will look more natural, and white clouds will look crisper.
Or:Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.
R:Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.
G:Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
Note
Increasing [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
Toning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can create a monochrome image in the selected color.
Effective when you want to create memorable images.
241
Picture Style Registration
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust it as desired,
and register it under [User Def. 1] – [User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture
Styles with different settings.
Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS software,
)
can also be modified here.
1.
Select [
: Picture Style].
2.
Select [User Def.].
Select [User Def. *], then press the < > button.
242
3.
Press <
>.
With [Picture Style] selected, press < >.
4.
Select a base Picture Style.
Select the base Picture Style, then press < >.
Also select styles this way when adjusting styles registered to the
camera with EOS Utility (EOS software).
5.
Select an option.
Select an option, then press < >.
243
6.
Set the effect level.
Adjust the effect level, then press < >.
For details, see Picture Style Customization.
Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to
the Picture Style selection screen.
The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
Blue style names in [User Def. *] have been changed from default
values.
Caution
If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base
Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered User
Defined Picture Style.
You can restore the default [User Def. *] style and settings by selecting [Basic
settings] in [
: Reset camera].
Note
To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *], then
shoot.
For instructions on registering a Picture Style file to the camera, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
244
Clarity
You can adjust image clarity, as determined by the contrast of image edges.
Set toward the negative end to make images look softer or toward the positive end for a
sharper appearance.
1.
Select [
: Clarity].
2.
Set the effect level.
Caution
Setting clarity may darken or lighten the areas around boundaries in high-contrast
images.
The effect of this setting is not shown in images on the screen in still photo
shooting.
245
Lens Aberration Correction
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Distortion Correction
Digital Lens Optimizer
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Diffraction Correction
Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical characteristics.
The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using [Lens aberration correction].
1.
Select [
: Lens aberration correction].
2.
Select an option.
246
3.
Select a setting.
Confirm that the name of the attached lens and [Correction data
available] are displayed.
If [Correction data not available] or [ ] is displayed, see Digital Lens
Optimizer.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.
Caution
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be.
Note
The amount of correction applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
247
Distortion Correction
Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.
Caution
To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the area
seen in viewfinder shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the
apparent resolution.
Applying distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.
The amount of image cropped may vary between still photos and movies.
Note
With RF lenses, distortion correction during movie recording is supported.
248
Digital Lens Optimizer
Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along with diffraction
and low-pass filter-induced loss of resolution.
If [Correction data not available] or [
] is displayed by [Digital Lens Optimizer], you can
use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the camera. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
Caution
Image processing after you shoot takes longer when set to [High] (which causes
the access lamp to be illuminated longer).
Maximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes longer.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture Style
sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed before shooting.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be.
For movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is not
possible.)
The effect of Digital Lens Optimizer cannot be checked on the screen at the time of
shooting.
Note
With [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [Standard] or [High], [Chromatic aberr corr]
and [Diffraction correction] are not displayed, but they are both set to [Enable] for
shooting.
249
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.
Note
[Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to
[Standard] or [High].
250
Diffraction Correction
Diffraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.
Caution
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be.
Note
“Diffraction correction” corrects degraded resolution not only from diffraction but
also from the low-pass filter and other factors. Thus, correction is also effective for
exposures with the aperture wide open.
[Diffraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to
[Standard] or [High].
Caution
General precautions for lens aberration correction
Lens aberration correction cannot be applied to existing JPEG/HEIF images.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
Magnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will not
be recorded.
The amount of correction (except diffraction correction) is less for lenses that do
not provide distance information.
251
Note
General notes for lens aberration correction
Effects of lens aberration correction vary by lens and shooting conditions. Also, the
effect may be difficult to discern depending on the lens used, shooting conditions,
etc.
If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after
shooting is recommended.
Corrections are applied even when an extender or life-size converter is attached.
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the result
will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for diffraction
correction).
If necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.
252
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise such as dots of light or banding that tends to occur in long exposures at shutter
speeds of one sec. or slower can be reduced.
1.
Select [
: Long exp. noise reduction].
2.
Set a reduction option.
Auto
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This setting
is effective enough in most cases.
Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all images exposed for 1 sec. or
longer. The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected
with the [Auto] setting.
253
Caution
With [Auto] or [Enable] set, noise reduction after you shoot may take as long as
exposure for the shot.
Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto]
setting.
[BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not displayed
until processing is finished, when you can shoot again.
254
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
You can reduce the image noise generated. This function is especially effective when
shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker
parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.
1.
Select [
: High ISO speed NR].
2.
Set the level.
Low / Standard / High
The camera applies an amount of noise reduction corresponding to
your specified level.
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High]. For a
single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned and
merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
Note that [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available with image
quality set to RAW or RAW+JPEG.
255
Caution
Precautions on Multi Shot Noise Reduction
If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise
reduction effect may become smaller.
Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots. Using a tripod is recommended.
If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
If the subject's brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken,
irregular exposure in the image may result.
After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after
performing noise reduction and merging the images. “BUSY” is displayed as
images are processed, and shooting is not possible until processing is finished.
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available when any of these features are set:
bulb exposures, AEB or WB bracketing, RAW or RAW+JPEG, long exposure noise
reduction, multiple exposures, HDR mode, HDR PQ, or focus bracketing.
Flash photography is not available. Note that the AF-assist beam of Speedlites may
be fired, depending on the [
: AF-assist beam firing] setting.
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available (not displayed) when recording
movies.
The camera automatically switches to [Standard] when RAW or RAW+JPEG
image quality is set.
The camera automatically switches to [Standard] if you set the power switch to
<
>, replace the card, or switch to [ ] mode or movie recording.
256
Dust Delete Data Acquisition
Preparation
Dust Delete Data Appending
Dust Delete Data used to erase dust spots can be appended to images in case sensor
cleaning leaves dust on the sensor. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots automatically.
Preparation
Use an RF or EF lens.
Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < > and set the focus to infinity (∞). If the lens
has no distance scale, rotate the camera to face toward you and turn the focusing ring
clockwise all the way.
1.
Select [
: Dust Delete Data].
257
2.
Select [OK].
After the automatic self-cleaning of the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a mechanical sound of the shutter
during the cleaning, no picture is taken.
258
3.
Shoot a plain white object.
Shoot with a plain white object (such as a new sheet of white paper)
filling the screen, at a distance of 20–30 cm (0.7–1.0 ft.).
Since the image will not be saved, the data can still be obtained even if
there is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust
Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will
appear.
If the data is not obtained successfully, an error message will appear.
Check the information in Preparation, select [OK], and shoot again.
259
Dust Delete Data Appending
The camera will append the Dust Delete Data obtained to all shots from now on. Acquiring
Dust Delete Data before shooting is recommended.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase dust spots
automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
File size is essentially unaffected by Dust Delete Data appended to images.
Caution
Dust Delete Data is not obtained when EF-S lenses are used, or when [ :
Cropping/aspect ratio] is set to [1.6x (crop)].
Dust Delete Data is not added to images when [Distortion correction] is set to
[Enable].
If the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and affect
the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software).
260
2.
Set [Multiple exposure].
Select an option, then press < >.
To exit shooting multiple exposures, select [Disable].
On:Func/Ctrl
Convenient when shooting multiple exposures gradually as you check
the results. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed
will decrease greatly.
On:ContShtng
Used for continuous multiple exposures of moving subjects.
Continuous shooting is possible, but the following operations are
disabled during shooting: menu screen viewing, image review after
capture, image playback, and undo last image ( ).
Note that the single exposures used for merging are discarded, and
only the multiple-exposure image is saved.
262
3.
Set [Multi-expos ctrl].
Select a merging option, then press < >.
Additive
The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.
Based on [No. of exposures], set negative exposure compensation.
Follow these basic guidelines to set the exposure compensation
amount.
Exposure compensation setting guidelines, by number of
exposures
Two exposures: –1 stop, three exposures: –1.5 stops, four exposures:
–2 stops
Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation is
set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot multiple
exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject's
background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard
exposure.
Bright/Dark
Brightness (or darkness) of the base image and added images is
compared at the same position, and bright (or dark) portions are
retained. Some overlapping colors may be mixed, depending on the
relative brightness (or darkness) of the images.
263
4.
Set [No. of exposures].
Select the number of exposures, then press < >.
5.
Specify the images to save.
To save all single exposures and the multiple-exposure image, select
[All images] and press <
>.
To save only the multiple-exposure image, select [Result only] and
press <
>.
264
6.
Set [Continue Mult-exp].
Select an option, then press < >.
With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
With [Continuously], multiple-exposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].
7.
Shoot the first exposure.
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the captured image will be displayed.
The [ ] icon blinks.
The number of remaining exposures is indicated on the screen (1) for
reference.
Pressing the < > button enables you to view the captured image
( ).
265
8.
Shoot the next exposures.
Images captured so far are displayed merged. For only image display,
press the <
> button repeatedly.
Multiple-exposure shooting will end when the set number of exposures
are taken.
Note
With [On:Func/Ctrl], you can press the < > button to view the multiple-
exposure image so far or delete the previous single exposure ( ).
As shooting information, the multiple-exposure image has information captured for
the last shot.
Caution
Image noise, color shift, or banding may be noticeable in multiple exposures,
depending on subjects and shooting conditions.
With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more noticeable the
noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.
Multiple-exposure shooting is canceled if you set the power switch to < > or
switch batteries or cards.
Multiple-exposure shooting ends if you switch to [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] shooting
modes.
If you connect the camera to a computer, multiple-exposure shooting will not be
possible. If you connect the camera to a computer during shooting, multiple-
exposure shooting will end.
Merging Multiple Exposures with a JPEG Image
Recorded on the Card
You can select a JPEG image recorded on the card as the first single exposure. The
selected JPEG image will remain intact.
266
1.
Select [Select image for multi. expo.].
2.
Select the first image.
Turn the < > dial to select the first image, then press < >.
Select [OK].
The file number of the selected image will be displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
267
3.
Take the picture.
When you select the first image, the number of remaining exposures as
set with [No. of exposures] will decrease by 1.
Images you can select
You can select a JPEG image shot at the same angle of view as the first selected JPEG.
Images captured at a full-frame angle of view
Images shot with an RF or EF lens and [
: Cropping/aspect ratio] set to [Full-
frame]
Images captured at an APS-C angle of view
Images shot with an RF or EF lens and [
: Cropping/aspect ratio] set to [1.6x
(crop)], or images shot with an EF-S lens
Caution
The following images cannot be selected.
• RAW or HEIF images
• JPEG images in
/ / sizes
• Images with [
: Cropping/aspect ratio] set to an option other than [Full-
frame] or [1.6x (crop)]
• Images from other cameras
Images that cannot be merged may be displayed.
Note
You can also select a JPEG image used in multiple-exposure shooting.
Select [Deselect img] to cancel image selection.
The color space set for the first image also applies to subsequent images.
268
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During
Shooting
To view the multiple-exposure image so far, check exposure, and see how the images are
merged, you can press the <
> button before you finish shooting your specified number
of exposures (when [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, but not with [On:ContShtng]).
Pressing the <
> button will display the operations possible during multiple-exposure
shooting.
Option Description
Return to
previous screen
The screen before you pressed the <
> button will reappear.
Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (enabling you to replace it by shooting again).
The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.
Save and exit
With [Save source imgs: All images], saves all single exposures and the
multiple-exposure image created so far and exits multiple-exposure shooting.
With [Save source imgs: Result only], saves only the multiple-exposure
image created so far and exits multiple-exposure shooting.
Exit without saving
Exits the multiple-exposure shooting without saving the image.
Caution
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-exposure
images.
269
FAQ
Are there any restrictions on the image quality?
Multiple exposures are captured as JPEG [
] images. Even when [ : Img type/
size] is set to RAW only, these images are captured as JPEG [
] images.
Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single exposure from the
images recorded on the card ( ). Note that you cannot merge multiple images already
recorded on the card.
How are multiple-exposure files numbered?
With the camera set to save all images, multiple-exposure image files are named with
the next number after the number of the last single exposure used to create them.
Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?
During multiple-exposure shooting, auto power off will not take effect. Note that before
you start multiple-exposure shooting, auto power off automatically takes effect at the
time set in the [Auto power off] option of [
: Power saving], which will cancel multiple-
exposure shooting.
270
Focus Bracketing
Focus bracketing enables continuous shooting with the focal distance changed automatically
after each shot. From these images, you can create a single image in focus over a wide
area by using an application that supports depth compositing, such as Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software).
1.
Select [
: Focus bracketing].
2.
Set [Focus bracketing].
Select [Enable].
271
3.
Set [Number of shots].
Specify the number of images captured per shot.
Can be set in a range of [2]–[999].
4.
Set [Focus increment].
Specify how much to shift the focus. This amount is automatically
adjusted to suit the aperture value at the time of shooting.
Larger aperture values increase the focus shift and make focus
bracketing cover a wider range under the same focus increment and
number of shots.
After completing the settings, press < >.
272
5.
Set [Exposure smoothing].
You can suppress changes in image brightness during focus bracketing
by setting [Exposure smoothing] to [Enable], which compensates for
differences between the displayed and actual aperture value (effective
f/number), which varies by focal position.
6.
Take the picture.
To save your shots in a new folder, tap [ ] and select [OK].
Focus at the nearer end of your preferred focal range, then press the
shutter button completely.
Once shooting begins, release the shutter button.
The camera shoots continuously, shifting the focal position toward
infinity.
Shooting ends after your specified number of images, or at the far end
of the focal range.
273
Caution
Focus bracketing is intended for still photo shooting on a tripod.
Shooting with a wider angle of view is recommended. After depth compositing, you
can crop the image if necessary.
For details on lenses compatible with this feature, visit the Canon website.
Set [Exposure smoothing] to [Disable] with the following lenses, because they
may cause changes in image brightness.
• EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM
• EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
• EF-S60mm f/2.8 Macro USM
Suitable [Focus increment] settings vary by subject. An unsuitable [Focus
increment] setting may cause unevenness in composite images, or shooting may
take more time because more shots are taken. Take some test shots to decide a
suitable [Focus increment] setting.
Combining the images will take longer when you have specified a higher numbers
of shots.
Flash photography is not available.
Shooting under flickering light may cause uneven images. In this case, lowering the
shutter speed may give better results.
Focus bracketing is not available when the lens's focus mode switch is set to
<
>.
Canceling shooting in progress may cause exposure problems in the last image.
Avoid using the last image when combining the images in Digital Photo
Professional.
Maximum shutter speed with focus bracketing is 1/8000 sec.
Note
Using a tripod, remote switch (sold separately, ), or wireless remote control (sold
separately,
) is recommended.
For best results, set the aperture value in a range of f/5.6–11 before shooting.
Details such as shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed are determined by
conditions for the first shot.
To cancel shooting, press the shutter button completely again.
[ : Focus bracketing] reverts to [Disable] when the power switch is set to
<
>.
274
Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and number of shots, so that the
camera takes individual shots repeatedly according to your interval until your specified
number of shots are taken.
1.
Select [
: Interval timer].
2.
Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press the < > button.
275
3.
Set the shooting interval and number of shots.
Select an option to set (hours : minutes : seconds / number of shots).
Press < > to display [ ].
Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].)
Interval
Can be set in a range of [00:00:01]–[99:59:59].
No. of shots
Can be set in a range of [01]–[99]. To keep the interval timer on
indefinitely until you stop it, set [00].
4.
Select [OK].
The interval timer settings will be displayed on the menu screen.
(1) Interval
(2) Number of shots
276
5.
Take the picture.
First shot is taken and shooting continues according to the interval
timer settings.
During interval timer shooting, [ ] will blink.
After the set number of shots are taken, the interval timer shooting will
stop and be automatically canceled.
Note
Using a tripod is recommended.
Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
Even during interval timer shooting, you can still shoot as usual by pressing the
shutter button completely. Note that the camera will prepare for the next interval
timer shot approx. 5 sec. in advance, which will temporarily prevent operations
such as adjusting shooting settings, accessing menus, and playing back images.
If the next scheduled interval timer shot is not possible because the camera is
shooting or processing images, it will be skipped. For this reason, fewer shots than
specified will be taken.
Even during interval timer operation, auto power off is triggered after approx. 8 sec.
of inactivity, as long as [Auto power off] under [
: Power saving] is not set to
[Disable].
Can also be combined with AEB, white balance bracketing, multiple exposures,
and HDR mode.
To stop interval timer shooting, select [Disable] or set the power switch to
<
>.
277
Caution
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
With the lens's focus mode switch set to < >, the camera will shoot even when
autofocusing is not possible. Consider setting the mode to <
> and focusing
manually before shooting.
If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold
separately) is recommended.
Shooting long exposures or using shutter speeds longer than the shooting interval
will prevent shooting at the specified interval. For this reason, fewer shots than
specified will be taken. Using shutter speeds nearly the same as the shooting
interval may also reduce the number of shots.
If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to the
shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be taken
with the set intervals.
When using flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than the flash
charge time. Intervals that are too short may prevent the flash from firing.
Intervals that are too short may prevent shooting or autofocusing.
Interval timer shooting is canceled and reset to [Disable] if you set the power
switch to <
>, activate [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] shooting mode, or
use EOS Utility (EOS software).
During interval timer shooting, you cannot use Remote Control Shooting or remote-
release shooting with a Speedlite.
278
Silent Shutter Function
Disables shutter release sounds, operating sounds, and firing and illumination of the flash
and other light sources.
The following settings are used and cannot be changed.
Shutter mode: [Electronic]
Shutter release sound, focused beep: only headphone output
Touch sounds, self-timer sounds: silent
Shutter at shutdown: open
Long exposure noise reduction: [Disable]
Flash firing: [Disable]
AF-assist beam firing: [Disable]
Self-timer/remote control lamp: not illuminated
When using lenses equipped with focus preset, consider turning off the focus preset beep.
1.
Select [
: Silent shutter function].
2.
Select [On].
279
Shutter Mode
You can choose the method of shutter release.
1.
Select [
: Shutter mode].
2.
Select an option.
Mechanical
Shooting activates the mechanical shutter.
Elec. 1st-curtain
Shooting only activates the second-curtain shutter.
Electronic
Enables reduced sound and vibration from shutter operations,
compared to mechanical shutter or electronic first-curtain.
• A white frame is displayed when you press the shutter button
halfway.
• Shutter operations are accompanied by beeps. You can disable
beeping in [
: Beep].
280
Caution
Defocused image areas may be incomplete when shooting near maximum aperture
at high shutter speeds, depending on shooting conditions. If you dislike the
appearance of defocused image areas, shooting as follows may give better results.
• Shoot with an option other than [Elec. 1st-curtain].
• Lower the shutter speed.
• Increase the aperture value.
Setting [ : Silent shutter function] to [On] sets the shutter mode to [Electronic].
Zooming during continuous shooting may cause changes in exposure even at the
same f/number. For details, refer to the Canon website.
Precautions when set to [Electronic]
The continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the shooting
conditions.
Images of fast-moving subjects may look distorted.
Images may lack suitable exposure if the aperture value changes in [ ] (Program
AE), [
] (Shutter-priority AE), or [ ] (Flexible-priority AE) shooting.
With some lenses and under some shooting conditions, lens focusing and aperture
adjustment may be audible.
Bands of light may be displayed and captured images may be affected by light and
dark banding if you shoot with electronic shutter during flash firing by other
cameras or under fluorescent lighting or other flickering light sources.
Banding may appear in the viewfinder or on the screen if you shoot under flickering
light sources.
Some functions will be restricted, but you can return to shooting with previous
settings by switching to a setting other than [Electronic].
With the following flash units, the continuous shooting speed is approx. 15 shots/
sec. in [
] drive mode. Other flash units have a continuous shooting speed slower
than approx. 15 shots/sec.
• Speedlite EL-1 / EL-100 / 600EX II-RT / 600EX-RT / 600EX / 470EX-AI /
430EX III-RT / 270EX II / 270EX
• Macro Twin Lite MT-26EX-RT
• Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II
281
Releasing Shutter without Card
You can set the camera not to shoot unless there is a card in the camera. The default
setting is [Enable].
1.
Select [
: Release shutter without card].
2.
Select [Disable].
282
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
Focal Length
This menu is displayed for configuration of camera IS mode settings when you are using a
non-IS lens. The menu is not shown when IS-equipped lenses are used. In that case, setting
the lens Image Stabilizer switch to <
> combines stabilization by the lens and camera.
1.
Select [
: IS (Image Stabilizer) mode].
2.
Select [IS mode].
Select [On] to use IS mode on the camera.
283
3.
Select [Still photo IS].
[Always]: Provides constant image stabilization.
[Only for shot]: Image stabilization is active only at the moment of
shooting.
Caution
[ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is not displayed when an IS-equipped lens is
attached.
In some cases, this may not provide sufficient stabilization for certain lenses.
Note
For details on image stabilization for movie recording, see Movie Digital IS.
Focal Length
Image stabilization based on your specified lens focal length is possible by setting the focal
length when using lenses that do not support lens communication.
284
1.
Select [Focal length].
2.
Set the focal length.
Turn the < > dial to select the digit of the focal length.
Press < > to display [ ].
Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].)
3.
Select [OK].
Caution
Set [ : Release shutter w/o lens] to [Enable]. [Disable] prevents image
stabilization.
[Focal length] is not displayed when lenses are attached that support lens
communication.
Note
Focal length can be set in a range of 1–1000 mm (in 1 mm increments).
285
3.
Select items to remove.
Turn the < > dial or use < > to select an item to remove, then
press <
>.
Items shown on the Quick Control screen are labeled with a
checkmark. You can remove the items labeled with a checkmark.
4.
Select items to add.
Turn the < > dial or use < > to select an item to add, then press
<
>.
To change the layout, press the < > button.
287
5.
Change the layout.
Use the < > dial to select an item to move, then press < >.
Use the < > dial to move the item, then press < >.
Press the < > button to exit setup.
6.
Select [Save and exit].
288
7.
Review the screen.
Press the < > button to check the screen with your settings applied.
Resetting the Custom Quick Control Screen or Clearing
All Items
Select [Reset settings] to restore the default Quick Control screen items and layout.
Select [Clear all items] to remove all items from the layout, so that no Quick Control
screen is displayed when the <
> button is pressed.
289
Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping the screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically.
1.
Enable the Touch Shutter.
Tap [ ] in the lower left of the screen.
Each time you tap the icon, it will toggle between [ ] and [ ].
[ ] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you tap, then the picture will be
taken.
[ ] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap a spot to perform focusing on the spot. Press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
290
2.
Tap the screen to shoot.
Tap the face or subject on the screen.
On the point you tap, the camera focuses (Touch AF) using your
specified AF Area.
When [ ] is set, the AF point turns green when focus is achieved,
then the picture is taken automatically.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point turns orange and the picture
cannot be taken. Tap the face or subject on the screen again.
Caution
The camera shoots in single shooting mode regardless of the drive mode setting
([
], [ ], or [ ]).
Tapping the screen focuses with [One-Shot AF], even if [ : AF operation] is set
to [Servo AF].
Tapping the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
When shooting by tapping with [Review duration] in [ : Image review] set to
[Hold], you can take the next shot by pressing the shutter button halfway or tapping
[
].
Note
To shoot with bulb exposure, tap the screen twice. Tap once to start exposure and
again to stop it. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.
291
Note
When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in the [Screen
off] option of [
: Power saving].
293
Viewfinder Display
Set to [Enable] for viewfinder display of your shots immediately after you shoot.
1.
Select [
: Image review].
2.
Select [Viewfinder display].
3.
Select an option.
Note
[Viewfinder display] settings take effect when [Image review] is set to an option
other than [Off].
294
High-Speed Display
High-speed display that switches between each shot and the live image is available when
shooting in [
] (high-speed continuous shooting) drive mode and in a shutter mode other
than electronic shutter.
1.
Select [
: High speed display].
2.
Select an option.
Select [Enable] for display that switches between each shot and the
live image.
295
Caution
Images may waver or flicker during high-speed display. This occurs more often at
high shutter speeds. However, this does not affect shooting results.
High-speed display is not performed for shutter speeds slower than 1/30 sec.,
aperture values higher than f/11, conditions that make autofocusing difficult, flash
photography, or ISO expansion. It may also stop as you are shooting.
High-speed display is not available in the following cases.
• With [
: OVF sim. view assist] set to [On]
• With [
: Display simulation] set to [Disable] or [Exposure only during
DOF]
296
Metering Timer
You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the duration of exposure
value display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action such as pressing the shutter button
halfway.
1.
Select [
: Metering timer].
2.
Set a time option.
297
Display Simulation
With display simulation, display of image brightness and depth of field more closely matches
the actual brightness (exposure) of your shots.
1.
Select [
: Display simulation].
2.
Select an option.
Exposure+DOF ( )
Image brightness and depth of field as displayed closely matches the actual brightness
(exposure) of your shots. If you set exposure compensation, the image brightness will
change accordingly. Similarly, changes to the aperture value will alter the depth of field.
Exposure ( )
Image brightness as displayed closely matches the actual brightness (exposure) of your
shots. If you set exposure compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
Exposure only during DOF ( )
Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see. Only when
you press and hold the depth-of-field preview button will image brightness resemble
actual brightness (exposure) of your shot, and you can check depth of field.
298
Disable ( )
The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see. Even if you set
exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the standard brightness.
Caution
Notes on [Exposure+DOF]
Display may flicker at some shutter speeds.
With EF lenses, this setting may increase the shutter-release time lag.
The depth of field shown is only a guideline. For more precise indication of the
depth of field, press the depth-of-field preview button.
[Exposure+DOF] is not available with some lenses.
[ ] blinks if either exposure or depth of field cannot be simulated, or if neither
can be simulated.
[ ] is dimmed if either exposure or depth of field simulation stops, or if both
simulations stop.
Zooming with certain lenses may change the exposure. For details, refer to the
Canon website.
Depth-of-field previewing is canceled when you press the shutter button halfway.
299
Optical Viewfinder Simulation
Natural-looking viewfinder and screen display, resembling the view from an optical
viewfinder, is available in still photo shooting. Note that images displayed with this feature
set to [On] may differ from actual shooting results.
1.
Select [
: OVF sim. view assist].
2.
Select an option.
Caution
Setting this feature to [On] sets [ : Display simulation] to [Disable].
Optical viewfinder simulation is used for display when this feature is set to [On] in
HDR shooting.
Optical viewfinder simulation is not used during display to external monitors,
including in display to both an external monitor and the camera screen.
Depending on setting screens, optical viewfinder simulation may not be used for
display.
Display may not resemble an optical viewfinder in some cases.
The display appearance may change during continuous shooting, with some
combinations of drive and shutter modes.
300
Note
Not available when the camera is set to shoot multiple exposures.
301
Shooting Information Display
Customizing Information on the Screen
Customizing Information in the Viewfinder
Viewfinder Vertical Display
Grid
Histogram
Lens Information Display
Vertical Exposure Level Indicator
Flicker Detection Display
Clearing Settings
You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the screen or in the
viewfinder when you shoot.
Customizing Information on the Screen
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
302
2.
Select [Screen info. settings].
3.
Select screens.
Turn the < > dial to select screens of information to show on the
camera.
For information you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the
checkmark [
].
To edit the screen, press the < > button.
303
4.
Edit the screen.
Turn the < > dial to select options to show on the screen of
information.
For items you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark
[
].
Select [OK] to register the setting.
304
Customizing Information in the Viewfinder
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
2.
Select [VF info/toggle settings].
3.
Select screens.
Turn the < > dial to select information screens to show in the
viewfinder.
For information you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the
checkmark [
].
To edit the screen, press the < > button.
305
4.
Edit the screen.
Turn the < > dial to select options to show in the viewfinder.
For items you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark
[
].
Select [OK] to register the setting.
306
Viewfinder Vertical Display
You can select how viewfinder information is displayed when you are shooting still photos
vertically.
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
2.
Select [VF vertical display].
307
3.
Select an option.
On
Information is automatically rotated, making it easier to read.
Off
Information is not automatically rotated.
308
Grid
A grid can be displayed on the screen and viewfinder.
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
2.
Select [Grid display].
3.
Select an option.
309
Histogram
You can select the content and display size of the histogram.
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
2.
Select [Histogram disp].
3.
Select an option.
Select the content ([Brightness] or [RGB]) and display size ([Large] or
[Small]).
310
Lens Information Display
You can display information about the lens in use.
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
2.
Select [Lens info display].
311
3.
Select an option.
Focus distance disp
You can display focus distance when using RF lenses. In focus
distance display, you can select the timing and unit of measurement.
Focal length disp
You can display the focal length of the lens in use.
SA variable amount
You can display the amount of correction set when using lenses
featuring spherical aberration control.
* SA: spherical aberration
312
Vertical Exposure Level Indicator
You can show or hide the vertical exposure level indicator displayed on the right side of the
screen.
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
2.
Select [Vertical exp level].
Select [On] when using metered manual flash with an external flash
unit.
The vertical exposure level indicator is shown while the metering timer
is active.
Note
When set to [On], the metering level is shown in real time on the exposure level
indicator in all shooting modes except [
].
Set to [Off] if you prefer not to display the indicator.
313
Flicker Detection Display
You can specify whether to show the [
] icon in shooting information display.
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
2.
Select [Flicker detect disp].
On
The [
] icon is displayed under the following conditions.
• With [
: Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable]:
The [
] icon is illuminated when flicker is detected.
• With [
: Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Disable]:
The [
] icon blinks when flicker is detected.
Off
The [
] icon is not displayed.
314
Clearing Settings
1.
Select [
: Shooting info. disp.].
2.
Select [Reset].
3.
Select [OK].
315
Viewfinder Display Format
You can select how information is presented in the viewfinder.
1.
Select [
: VF display format].
2.
Select an option.
316
Display Performance
You can select the performance parameter to prioritize in shooting screen display for still
photos.
1.
Select [
: Disp. performance].
2.
Select an option.
When set to [Smooth]
By pressing the < > button to add a checkmark, you can include
low-light locations in the scenarios for suppressing lower display frame
rates.
317
Caution
Shooting under low light with [Suppress lower frame rate] set for shooting screen
display may affect performance as follows.
• Faster battery consumption
• Fewer shots available
• Lower image display brightness
• Difficulty in autofocusing
• Lower metering precision
• Lower flicker detection precision
• Lower subject detection precision
318
Metering Mode Selection
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
Setting with the <
> button
1.
Press the <
> button ( ).
2.
Select the metering mode.
Turn the < > dial to make a selection.
319
Setting with the < > button
1.
Press the <
> button ( ).
With an image displayed, press the < > button.
2.
Select the metering mode.
To select an item, turn the < > dial or press < > up or down.
To select the metering mode, turn the < > or < > dial, or press
<
> left or right.
320
Setting via the menu
1.
Select [
: Metering mode].
2.
Select the metering mode.
Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due to backlight, etc.
Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the subject. The spot metering area is indicated on
the screen.
321
Center-weighted average
The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the screen weighted more
heavily.
Note
By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows.
With [
], holding down the shutter button halfway locks the exposure value (AE
lock) after the camera focuses with One-Shot AF. With [
/ / ], the exposure
value is set at the moment the picture is taken (without locking the exposure value
when the shutter button is pressed halfway).
With [ : AE lock meter. mode after focus] ( ), you can set whether or not to
lock the exposure (AE lock) once subjects are in focus with One-Shot AF.
322
Manual Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure)
the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation is available in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes.
For details on exposure compensation when [
] mode and ISO Auto are both set, see M:
Manual Exposure, and see Fv: Flexible-Priority AE for [ ] mode.
1.
Check the exposure.
Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level
indicator.
2.
Set the compensation amount.
Increased exposure, to brighten images
Decreased exposure, to darken images
Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the < > dial.
A [ ] icon is displayed to indicate exposure compensation.
3.
Take the picture.
To cancel exposure compensation, set the exposure level [ ] to the
standard exposure index ([
]).
Caution
If [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( ) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the
image may still look bright even if decreased exposure compensation is set to
darken images.
323
Note
The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the
power switch to <
>.
324
Exposure Lock (AE Lock)
AE Lock Effects
You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure separately or when
you will take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the <
> button to lock the
exposure, then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for
shooting backlit subjects, etc.
1.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
The exposure value will be displayed.
2.
Press the <
> button ( ).
A [ ] icon is displayed in the lower left of the screen to indicate that
exposure is locked (AE lock).
Each time you press the < > button, the current exposure setting is
locked.
325
3.
Recompose and take the picture.
When you are to take more pictures while maintaining the AE lock,
keep holding down the <
> button and press the shutter button to
take another picture.
Note
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
Selection
AF Point Selection
Automatic Selection Manual Selection
Exposure centered on the AF point in
focus is locked.
Exposure centered on the selected AF
point is locked.
Center-weighted exposure is locked.
* When [
] is set with the lens's focus mode switch set to < >, center-weighted exposure is
locked.
326
General Still Photo Shooting
Information Display
General Still Photo Shooting Precautions
Information Display
For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see
Information Display.
Note
White display of the [ ] icon indicates that your shots will be about as bright
as the image displayed.
If the [ ] icon is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a
brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light
conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting.
Note that the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded.
Display simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings. The
[
] icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be displayed
on the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be properly
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
Histogram display is available when [ : Display simulation] is set to [Exposure]
or [Exposure+DOF] ( ).
327
General Still Photo Shooting Precautions
Caution
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
Image quality
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may
become noticeable.
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image.
Frequent shooting over an extended period may cause high internal temperatures
and affect image quality. When you are not shooting, always turn off the camera.
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera's internal temperature is high, image
quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again.
White [
] and red [ ] internal temperature warning icons
White [ ] or red [ ] icons indicate high internal camera temperature, caused by
factors such as extended shooting or use in hot environments.
The white [ ] icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline. Stop
shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
Shooting at low ISO speeds instead of high speeds is recommended when the
white [
] icon is displayed.
The red [ ] icon indicates that shooting will soon be terminated automatically.
Shooting will not be possible again until the camera cools down internally, so stop
shooting temporarily or turn off the camera and let it cool down a while.
Shooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white [ ] or
red [
] icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn off the
camera.
If the camera's internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with a high
ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white [
] icon is
displayed.
Shooting results
In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture value will be displayed in orange.
If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out as
desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured with the
image area of the normal view.
328
Images and display
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect the
brightness of the captured image.
Although noise may be noticeable in images under low light (even at low ISO
speeds), there will be less noise in your shots, due to differences in image quality
between displayed and captured images.
The screen may flicker if the light source (lighting) changes. In this case, stop
shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you will use.
Pointing the camera at different direction may momentarily prevent correct display
of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black
on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show the bright
area.
Under low light, bright [ : Screen brightness] settings may cause noise or
irregular colors in images. However, the noise or irregular colors will not be
recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more pronounced
than in the actual image.
Lens
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer switch
to <
>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press
the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may
decrease the number of available shots depending on the shooting conditions.
When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the Image Stabilizer switch to <
>.
With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using (super)
telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the second half of
2011.
Note
The field of view is approx. 100% (with image quality set to JPEG ).
If the camera is idle over an extended period, the screen will turn off automatically
after the time set in [Screen off] or [Viewfinder off] under [
: Power saving]. The
camera then turns off automatically after the time set in [Auto power off] ( ).
Using a commercially available HDMI cable, you can display images on a television
(
). Note that no sound will be output.
329
Movie Recording
To prepare for movie recording, set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to
<
>, then press the < > button and choose a recording mode.
Caution
When switching from still photo shooting to movie recording, check the camera
settings again before recording movies.
Note
You can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo
shooting.
• Tab Menus: Movie Recording
• Movie Recording
• Movie Recording Size
• High Frame Rate
• Movie Recording Format
• Movie Cropping
• Sound Recording
• HDR Movie Recording
• Canon Log Settings
• Movie Self-Timer
• Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
• Shutter Button Function for Movies
• Zebra Settings
• Time Code
• Other Menu Functions
• General Movie Recording Precautions
330
Autoexposure Recording
Exposure is controlled automatically to suit the brightness.
1.
Set the recording mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
2.
Focus on the subject.
Before recording a movie, focus with AF ( ) or manual focus ( ).
By default, [ : Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] so that the
camera always keeps focusing ( ).
When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera focuses using
your specified AF area.
336
3.
Record the movie.
Press the movie shooting button to start recording a movie. You can
also start recording a movie by tapping [
] on the screen.
While the movie is being recorded, the [ REC] icon (1) will be
displayed in the upper right of the screen.
Sound is recorded by the microphone (2).
To stop recording, press the movie shooting button again. You can also
stop recording a movie by tapping [
] on the screen.
337
Shutter-Priority AE
[
] recording mode enables you to set your preferred shutter speed for movies. ISO
speed and aperture values are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard
exposure.
1.
Set the recording mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select
[
].
2.
Set the shutter speed (1).
Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the < > dial.
Available shutter speeds vary by frame rate ( ).
338
3.
Focus and record the movie.
Same as steps 2 and 3 for Autoexposure Recording.
Caution
Avoid adjusting shutter speed while recording movies, which will record changes in
exposure.
When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the
subject's movement will look.
If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or LED lighting,
image flicker may be recorded.
339
Aperture-Priority AE
[
] recording mode enables you to set your preferred aperture value for movies. ISO
speed and shutter speed are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard
exposure.
1.
Set the recording mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
2.
Set the aperture value (1).
Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the < > dial.
340
3.
Focus and record the movie.
Same as steps 2 and 3 for Autoexposure Recording.
Caution
Avoid adjusting the aperture value while recording movies, which will record
changes in exposure caused by aperture adjustment.
Note
Notes for [
], [ ], and [ ] modes
You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the < > button. After applying
AE lock during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing the <
> button.
(AE lock setting is retained until you press the
<
> button.)
Exposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops by turning the
<
> dial.
In [ ] mode, the ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value are not recorded
in movie Exif information.
The camera is compatible with Speedlite functionality to activate the LED light
automatically under low light when recording movies in [
], [ ], and [ ]
modes. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the EX series Speedlite
equipped with an LED light.
341
Manual Exposure Recording
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed for movie recording.
1.
Set the recording mode to [
].
Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [ ].
343
2.
Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level
indicator.
Turn the < > dial to set the shutter speed (1), the < > dial to set
the aperture value (2), and the <
> dial to set the ISO speed (3).
Available shutter speeds vary by frame rate ( ).
344
3.
Focus and record the movie.
Same as steps 2 and 3 for Autoexposure Recording.
Caution
ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to ISO 50) in movie recording.
During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO
speed, which may record changes in the exposure or create more noise at high
ISO speeds.
When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the
subject's movement will look.
If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or LED lighting,
image flicker may be recorded.
Note
Exposure compensation with ISO Auto can be set in a range of ±3 stops.
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the < > button to lock the ISO speed. After
locking the ISO speed during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing the
<
> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained until you press the < > button.)
If you press the < > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure
level difference on the exposure level indicator (
) compared to when the < >
button was pressed.
345
Shutter Speed
Available shutter speeds in [
] and [ ] mode vary depending on the frame rate of your
specified movie recording quality.
Frame Rate
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Normal Movie Recording
High Frame Rate Movie
Recording
HDR Movie Recording
–
1/4000–1/125
–
1/4000–1/100
1/4000–1/8 –
[ ] 1/4000–1/60
[
] 1/1000–1/60
[ ] 1/4000–1/50
[
] 1/1000–1/50
–
347
Still Photo Shooting
Still photo shooting is not supported in movie recording mode. To shoot still photos,
stop recording and change the [Shooting mode] setting to still photos first.
348
Movie Recording Size
4K Movie Recording
Image Area
Cards That Can Record Movies
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
You can set the recording size, frame rate, and compression method in [ : Movie rec.
size].
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie rec. size] screen switches automatically depending
on the [
: Video system] setting ( ).
Image Size Aspect Ratio
4096×2160 17:9
3840×2160 16:9
1920×1080 16:9
Caution
If you change the [ : Video system] setting, also set [ : Movie rec. size] again.
Other devices may not play movies such as 4K, / , and High Frame
Rate movies normally, because playback is processing-intensive.
Apparent resolution and noise vary slightly depending on movie recording quality,
cropped shooting settings, and the lens used.
350
Note
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended ( ).
Movies cannot be recorded in HD or VGA quality.
4K Movie Recording
Recording 4K movies requires a stable card with a fast writing speed. For details, see
Cards That Can Record Movies.
4K or High Frame Rate movie recording greatly increases the processing load, which
may increase the internal camera temperature faster or higher than for regular movies. If
[
] or a red [ ] icon appears during movie recording, the card may be hot, so
stop recording the movie and let the camera cool down before removing the card.
(Do not remove the card immediately.)
From a 4K movie, you can select any frame to save to the card as a JPEG still image
( ).
351
Image Area
The movie image area varies depending on factors such as movie recording quality and
cropped shooting settings and the lens used.
RF or EF lenses: With [ : Movie cropping] set to [Disable]
(1) (4096×2160)
(2)
(3840×2160) / (1920×1080)
RF or EF lenses: With [ : Movie cropping] set to [Enable]
EF-S lenses
(3) (4096×2160)
(4)
(3840×2160) / (1920×1080)
Caution
Recording with Movie digital IS ( ) further crops the image around the center of
the screen.
352
Frame rate (fps: frames per second)
[ ] 119.9 fps/[ ] 59.94 fps/[ ] 29.97 fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico,
etc.). For [
], see High Frame Rate.
[ ] 100.00 fps/[ ] 50.00 fps/[ ] 25.00 fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.). For
[
], see High Frame Rate.
[ ] 24.00 fps/[ ] 23.98 fps
Mainly for cinematic purposes.
(23.98 fps) is available when [ : Video system] is
set to [For NTSC].
Compression method
[ ] ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Compresses each frame, one at a time, for recording. Although file sizes are larger than
with IPB (Standard), movies are more suitable for editing.
[ ] IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. File sizes are smaller
than with ALL-I (For editing), which enables movie recording over longer periods (with a
card of the same capacity).
[ ] IPB (Light)
Since the movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard), the file size will
be smaller than with IPB (Standard) and the playback compatibility will be higher. This
will make the available recording time longer than with IPB (Standard) (with a card of the
same capacity).
353
Cards That Can Record Movies
For details on CFexpress cards that can record at each level of movie recording quality,
check the Canon website.
See
Card performance requirements for details on SD cards.
Test cards by recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your
specified size ( ).
Caution
Before recording 4K movies, format cards by selecting [Low level format] in [ :
Format card] ( ).
If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be
recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading
speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
When recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed
sufficiently higher than the bit rate.
When movies cannot be recorded properly, format the card and try again. If
formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card manufacturer's
website, etc.
Unsupported movie recording
The following files cannot be recorded to SD cards. Pressing the movie shooting
button will not start recording.
• RAW movies
• 4K 119.9/100.0 fps (High Frame Rate movies)
• 4K 59.94/50.00 fps ALL-I H.264 (YUV420, 8-bit)
Note
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended ( ).
To check the card's writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer's website,
etc.
354
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you record a movie and the file size exceeds 4 GB, a
new movie file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie file individually.
Movie files cannot be played back automatically in consecutive order. After the movie
playback ends, select the next movie and play it back.
Using SDXC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will format it in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds 4 GB during movie
recording, the movie will be saved as a single file (rather than being split into multiple
files).
Caution
When importing movie files exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS Utility
or a card reader ( ). It may not be possible to save movie files exceeding 4 GB if
you attempt this using standard features of the computer's operating system.
355
High Frame Rate
You can record movies at a high frame rate of 119.9 fps or 100.0 fps. This is ideal for
recording movies that will be played back in slow motion. The maximum recording time per
movie is 89 min. 29 sec.
Movies are recorded in or quality.
With [ : Movie rec. size] set to [ ] or [ ], movies are recorded in
/ or in / quality.
Sound is not recorded in High Frame Rate movies.
Time code display during movie recording advances 4 sec. per second.
Because High Frame Rate movies are recorded as 29.97 fps/25.00 fps movie files, they
are played in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
Caution
Precautions when set to [High Frame Rate: Enable]
Time codes are not recorded when [Count up] is set to [Free run] in [ : Time
code] ( ).
Check the [ : Movie rec. size] setting if you return this setting to [Disable].
The screen may flicker if you record High Frame Rate movies under fluorescent or
LED lighting.
For a moment when you start or stop recording High Frame Rate movies, the
movie is not updated, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when
recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
Movie frame rates shown on the screen as you record High Frame Rate movies do
not correspond to the frame rate of the movie recorded.
Headphones cannot be used (no sound is audible).
ISO speed can be set within ISO 100–25600. Note that ISO expansion is not
available.
The frame rate of HDMI video output is 59.94 fps or 50.00 fps.
The camera's internal temperature may rise and less recording time may be
available after extended movie playback or image display.
357
Movie Recording Format
You can specify the format of movie files recorded. For RAW+MP4 recording, select [
, ] in the [ Rec options] setting of [ : Record func+card/folder sel.].
1.
Select [
: Movie rec. format].
2.
Select an option.
358
RAW movies
RAW movies are raw, unprocessed data from the image sensor that are recorded to the
card digitally.
Two format options are available for RAW movies,
(standard) and (light), as
selected in [
: Movie rec. size] ( ). The light option produces RAW movies with smaller
file sizes than the standard option.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW movies. You can
make various adjustments to images depending upon how they will be used and can
generate JPEG, HEIF, or other types of images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.
Caution
RAW movies cannot be processed with [ : RAW image processing].
Note
To display RAW movies on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, hereafter DPP) is recommended.
Older versions of DPP Ver. 4.x do not support display, processing, editing, or other
operations with RAW movies recorded by this camera. If a previous version of DPP
Ver. 4.x is installed on your computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP
from the Canon website to update it ( ), which will overwrite the previous version.
Similarly, DPP Ver. 3.x or earlier does not support display, processing, editing, or
other operations with RAW movies recorded by this camera.
Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW movies recorded
by this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software manufacturer.
To prioritize gradation in highlights, set [Canon Log] in [ : Canon Log settings]
to [On (
)]. This is recommended for Cinema EOS and RAW movies.
359
Movie Cropping
With RF or EF lenses, movies can be cropped around the center of the image, as if using a
telephoto lens.
Recording movies with EF-S lenses has the same effect as this movie cropping feature.
1.
Select [
: Movie cropping].
2.
Select [Enable].
Caution
The center of the screen is further cropped, reducing the recording area, when [
Digital IS] in [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is set to [On] or [Enhanced].
Note
The recording area available with movie cropping is the same as when recording
movies with EF-S lenses.
For details on the recording area, see Image Area.
360
Sound Recording
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
Wind Filter
Attenuator
You can record movies while recording sound with either the built-in microphone or an
external one. You can also freely adjust the sound-recording level.
Use [
: Sound recording] to set sound recording functions.
Caution
Sounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external
microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication function
is not recommended.
Make sure any output plugs of external microphones or any headphone jacks are
fully inserted in the camera.
The camera's built-in microphone may also record mechanical sounds of the lens
or sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera
or lens is operated during movie recording. If so, it may help reduce these sounds if
you use an external microphone equipped with an output plug and position it away
from the camera and lens.
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera's
external microphone IN terminal.
Noise reduction is not applied to the audio played through headphones. Thus, the
audio recorded with the movie will be different.
Do not change the [ : Sound recording] settings when listening with
headphones. This may cause sudden loud output that may hurt your ears.
361
Note
Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI, except
when [Sound recording] is set to [Disable]. In case of feedback from television
audio output, move the camera away from the television or turn down the volume.
The volume balance between L/R (left/right) cannot be adjusted.
Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
Auto
The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control will take effect
automatically in response to the sound level.
Manual
You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed. Select [Rec. level] and turn the
<
> dial while looking at the level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look at
the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up on the
right of the “12” (–12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound will be
distorted.
Disable
Sound will not be recorded.
362
Wind Filter
Set to [Enable] to reduce wind noise when there is wind outdoors. Only activated when the
camera's built-in microphone is used. When the wind filter function takes effect, part of the
low bass sounds will also be reduced.
363
Attenuator
Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if [Sound
recording] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for recording, sound distortion may still result if there
is a very loud sound. In this case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
Microphone
Any connected external microphone is used instead of the built-in microphone. The
following external microphones (sold separately) are recommended.
• Multi-Function Shoe Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1D
Attaches to the camera's multi-function shoe (
).
• Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 / Stereo Microphone DM-E100
The external microphone's 3.5 mm mini-plug connects to the camera's external
microphone IN terminal ( ). The microphone itself attaches to the camera's multi-
function shoe.
Headphone
By connecting commercially available headphones with a 3.5 mm mini-plug to the
headphone terminal (
), you can listen to the sound as movies are recorded and hear
camera operating sounds. To adjust headphone volume, press the <
> button, select
[
], and adjust by turning the < > or < > dial or press < > left or right ( ).
You can also use headphones during movie playback.
Note
Headphone volume can also be adjusted in [ : Headphones].
The volume of sounds for camera operations is adjusted in [ : Volume].
364
HDR Movie Recording
You can record high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of high-contrast
scenes.
Note
Available when the recording size is set to (NTSC) or
(PAL).
1.
Select [
: HDR Movie Recording].
Select [Enable].
2.
Record an HDR movie.
Record the movie in the same way as normal movie recording.
For details on file sizes and the recording time available, see Movie
recording.
365
Caution
HDR movie recording is not available with [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] set to
[
Digital IS], or when set to [ : Highlight tone priority], [ : Canon Log
settings], or [
: HDR shooting ].
Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts of the
movie may look distorted. This is more noticeable in handheld recording affected
by camera shake, so consider using a tripod. Note that even if a tripod is used for
recording, afterimages or noise may become more noticeable, compared to normal
playback, when the HDR movie is played back frame-by-frame or in slow motion.
Image color and brightness may change significantly for a moment if you change
settings for HDR movie recording. Also, the movie will not be updated for a
moment, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when recording
movies to external devices via HDMI.
366
Canon Log Settings
Shooting Settings
Canon Log Image Quality
Canon Log gamma curve takes full advantage of image sensor characteristics to ensure
wide dynamic range for movies that will be processed in postproduction. With minimal loss
of detail in shadows and highlights, movies retain more visual information across the
dynamic range.
To work with Canon Log movies in postproduction, you can apply look-up tables (LUTs).
LUT data can be downloaded from the Canon website.
1.
Select [
: Canon Log settings].
2.
Select [Canon Log].
367
Canon Log
On
Enables 10-bit recording of Canon Log movies to the card. Movies can also be recorded
to an external device that supports 10-bit recording.
Note
YCbCr 4:2:2 (10-bit) color sampling and the BT.709/BT.2020/Cinema Gamut color
space are used in Canon Log recording.
369
View Assist.
When played on the camera, these movies may look darker and have lower contrast than
movies recorded with a Picture Style applied, due to Canon Log image characteristics,
which are intended to ensure a wide dynamic range. For clearer display that makes it easier
to check details, set [View Assist.] to [On].
Setting this feature to [On] does not affect movies recorded to the card, which are
recorded using Canon Log characteristics. Similarly, HDMI video output has Canon Log
characteristics, and View Assist is not used for it.
Note
[ ] is shown on the information display screen during movie recording with View
Assist.
When set to [On], View Assist is also used with magnified display.
370
Characteristics
Adjust as needed. Select an option ([Sharpness: Strength], [Saturation], or [Hue]), adjust
the effect level, then press <
>.
Sharpness: Strength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis
Saturation −4: Low +4: High
Hue*
Reds −4: Toward magenta +4: Toward yellow
Greens -4: Toward yellow +4: Toward cyan
Blues -4: Toward cyan +4: Toward magenta
* Reds, greens, and blues cannot be adjusted separately.
Color space
Choose [BT.709], [BT.2020], or [Cinema Gamut] as the color space for HDMI output or
recording to cards.
371
Shooting Settings
Manually setting the ISO speed to 100–640 will make the dynamic range narrower.
Canon Log offers a dynamic range of approx. 1600% at ISO 800 or higher.
The following are expanded ISO speeds: ISO 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
and 640. [
] is displayed when an ISO speed is set.
372
Canon Log Image Quality
With Canon Log, movies may be affected by horizontal banding, depending on the
subject or shooting conditions. Record a few test movies and check the results in
advance. In particular, noise may become more noticeable if you enhance the contrast
when color-grading your movies.
With Canon Log, skies, white walls, and similar subjects may be affected by noise or
uneven gradation, exposure, or colors.
Horizontal banding is more likely to occur when recording somewhat dark, flat subjects.
This image noise may even occur at relatively low ISO speeds around ISO 800.
If noise is noticeable, try recording under brighter conditions and adjusting brightness in
color grading. Although dynamic range is narrower at ISO speeds lower than ISO 800,
noise can also be reduced by recording this way.
Caution
General Canon Log shooting precautions
Canon Log and Canon Log 2 are not supported.
With Canon Log, autofocusing may be more difficult for subjects under low light, or
for low-contrast subjects. Difficulty in autofocusing can be reduced by shooting
near maximum aperture or using a bright lens.
Noise may appear at image edges if [Peripheral illum corr] in [ : Lens
aberration correction] is set to [Enable] when Canon Log is set.
Histograms with [Canon Log] in [ : Canon Log settings] set to [On ( )] are
not based on conversion for View Assist display. Image areas shown in gray in the
histogram roughly indicate signal values that are not used.
Note
Playing back movies recorded with Canon Log
View Assist is not used during movie playback.
373
Movie Self-Timer
Movie recording can be started by the self-timer.
1.
Select [
: Movie self-timer].
2.
Select an option.
3.
Record the movie.
After you press the movie shooting button or tap [ ], the camera
beeps and displays the number of seconds left before recording.
Note
To cancel the self-timer, either tap the screen or press < >.
374
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
Movie Digital IS
The camera's IS mode and movie digital IS features reduce camera shake as movies are
recorded.
They can provide effective stabilization even when non-IS lenses are used.
The [IS mode] menu item is not shown when IS-equipped lenses are used. In that case,
setting the lens Image Stabilizer switch to <
> combines stabilization by the lens and
camera.
1.
Select [
: IS (Image Stabilizer) mode].
2.
Select [IS mode].
Select [On] to use IS mode on the camera.
Caution
[IS mode] is not displayed when an IS-equipped lens is attached.
375
Movie Digital IS
1.
Select [
: IS (Image Stabilizer) mode].
2.
Select a [
Digital IS] option.
Off ( )
Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
On ( )
Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified.
Enhanced ( )
Compared to when [On] is set, stronger camera shake can be
corrected. The image will be more magnified.
376
Caution
Movie digital IS will not function when the lens's optical Image Stabilizer switch is
set to <
>.
With non-IS lenses, setting [ Digital IS] to [On] or [Enhanced] also sets [IS
mode] to [On].
Although movies can also be recorded with Movie digital IS when using EF-S
lenses or movie cropping, the image area is further reduced.
Stabilization by Movie digital IS may be less effective at some movie recording
sizes.
The wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more effective the image stabilization
will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less effective the image
stabilization will be.
When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Off] is recommended.
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur noticeably
(the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects of the Movie digital
IS.
Consider setting to [Off] when using a TS-E lens or fish-eye lens.
Since Movie digital IS magnifies the image, the image looks more grainy. Noise,
dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
Note
For details on configuring image stabilization for still photo shooting, see Image
Stabilizer (IS Mode).
With some lenses, even more effective stabilization (indicated by “+” next to the IS
icon) is possible when the lens's IS is used in conjunction with [IS mode] and
[Movie digital IS] on the camera. For details on lenses compatible with this feature,
visit the Canon website.
377
Shutter Button Function for Movies
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely
during movie recording.
Caution
In movie recording, the [Shutter btn function for movies] setting overrides any
function assigned to the shutter button in [
: Customize buttons].
1.
Select [
: Shutter btn function for movies].
378
2.
Select an option.
Half-press
Specify the function performed by pressing the shutter button halfway.
Fully-press
Specify the function performed by pressing the shutter button
completely.
With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop movie
recording not only with the movie shooting button but also by pressing the
shutter button completely, or by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately).
379
Zebra Settings
To help you adjust exposure before or during movie recording, you can display a striped
pattern over or around image areas of a specified brightness.
1.
Select [
: Zebra settings].
2.
Select [Zebra].
Select [On].
380
3.
Select [Zebra pattern].
[Zebra 1]: Displays left-slanting stripes around areas of the specified
brightness.
[Zebra 2]: Displays right-slanting stripes over areas that exceed the
specified brightness.
[Zebra 1+2]: Displays both [Zebra 1] and [Zebra 2].
[Zebra 1] display takes precedence where [Zebra 1] and [Zebra 2]
display areas overlap.
4.
Set the level.
Zebra 1 level
Zebra 2 level
Set by turning the < > or < > dial or pressing < > up or down.
381
Note
The maximum brightness value does not reach 100% when HDR-PQ is set. Note
that the maximum brightness value varies depending on [
: Highlight tone
priority] and [
: Picture Style] settings.
The maximum brightness value does not reach 100% when Canon Log or an
expanded ISO speed is set.
Checking the zebra display level in advance is recommended when you will set
[Zebra pattern].
382
Time Code
Count Up
Start Time Setting
Movie Recording Count
Movie Play Count
HDMI
Drop Frame
Time codes record the time automatically as movies are recorded. Time codes always
record elapsed hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. They are mainly used when movies
are edited.
To set up the time code, use [
: Time code].
Caution
Time codes may not be displayed correctly if your movies are played back on
devices other than the camera.
383
Count Up
Rec run
The time code advances only during movie recording. Time codes in each movie file
recorded continue from the last time code in the previous file.
Free run
The time code keeps advancing, even when you are not recording.
Caution
When set to [Free run], time codes are not added to High Frame Rate movies that
you record.
When set to [Free run], time codes will be affected by any changes to settings for
time, zone, or daylight saving time ( ).
384
Start Time Setting
You can set the initial time of the time code.
Manual input setting
Enables you to set any starting hour, minute, second, and frame.
Reset
Resets the time set with [Manual input setting] or [Set to camera time] to “00:00:00.”
or “00:00:00:” (
).
Set to camera time
Matches the hour, minute, and second set as the time on the camera. Sets the frame
value to “00.”
385
Movie Recording Count
You can select how time is displayed on the movie recording screen.
Rec time
During recording standby, displays the available recording time. During recording,
displays the time that has elapsed since movie recording began (1).
Time code
Displays the time code during movie recording (2).
386
Movie Play Count
You can select how time is displayed on the movie playback screen.
Rec time
Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback.
Time code
Displays the time code during movie playback.
Note
Time codes are always recorded to movie files (except when High Frame Rate
movies are set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting.
The [Movie play count] setting in [ : Time code] is linked to the [ : Movie
play count], so that these settings always match.
The “frame” count is not displayed during movie recording or playback.
387
HDMI
Time code
Time codes can be added to movies as you record them to an external device via HDMI.
• Off
No time code is added to HDMI video output.
• On
Time codes are added to HDMI video output. When [On] is set, [Rec Command] is
displayed.
Rec Command
For HDMI video output recorded by an external device, you can synchronize recording
to when you start and stop recording movies on the camera.
• Off
Recording is started and stopped by the external device.
• On
Recording by an external device is synchronized to starting/stopping recording on
the camera.
Caution
Time codes are not added to HDMI video output when you record High Frame Rate
movies with [Count up] in [Time code] set to [Free run].
To determine compatibility of external recording devices with [Time code] and [Rec
Command] functions, check with the device manufacturer.
Even with [Time code] set to [Off], external recording devices may add time codes
to movies, depending on their specifications. For details on device specifications
relevant to adding time code to HDMI input, check with the device manufacturer.
388
Drop Frame
The time code's frame count will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and the time
code if the frame rate is set to
(119.9 fps), (59.94 fps), or (29.97 fps). The
discrepancy is corrected automatically when [Enable] is set.
Enable
Corrects the discrepancy automatically by skipping time code numbers (DF: drop
frame).
Disable
The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: non-drop frame).
Time codes are displayed as follows.
• Enable (DF)
00:00:00. (Playback: 00:00:00.00)
• Disable (NDF)
00:00:00: (Playback: 00:00:00:00)
Note
The [Drop frame] setting item is not displayed when the frame rate is set to
(24.00 fps), (23.98 fps), or when [ : Video system] is set to [For PAL].
389
Other Menu Functions
[ 2]
[ 3]
[ 4]
[ 5]
[ 6]
[ 7]
[ 8]
[ 2]
Exposure comp.
Exposure compensation can be adjusted in a range of ±3 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
For details on exposure compensation, see
Manual Exposure Compensation.
ISO speed settings
• ISO speed
In [
] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also select ISO Auto.
• ISO speed range
You can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum). ISO
expansion can also be configured.
• Max for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in movie recording in [
], [ ], or
[
] mode or in [ ] mode with ISO Auto.
HDR shooting
For details on HDR shooting , see HDR PQ Settings.
390
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. For details on Auto Lighting
Optimizer, see
Auto Lighting Optimizer.
Highlight tone priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you record movies. For details on
Highlight tone priority, see
Highlight Tone Priority.
391
[ 3]
HF anti-flicker shooting
For details on HF anti-flicker shooting, see
High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting.
Av 1/8-stop incr.
You can set aperture values on a finer scale when recording movies with an RF lens.
Select [Enable] to change the aperture increment in [
] or [ ] mode from 1/3 stop
(or 1/2 stop) to 1/8 stop.
Caution
[ Av 1/8-stop incr.] is not available (not displayed) when EF or EF-S lenses are
used.
When set to [Enable], setting options in [ : Exposure level increments] are
disabled and have no effect.
Auto slow shutter
You can choose whether to record movies that are brighter and less affected by image
noise than when set to [Disable] by automatically slowing the shutter speed under low
light.
Available in [
] or [ ] recording mode. Applies when the frame rate of the movie
recording size is
or .
• Disable
Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement, less affected
by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that under low light, movies may
be darker than when set to [Enable].
• Enable
Enables you to record brighter movies than when set to [Disable] by automatically
reducing the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.
392
Note
Setting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under low
light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.
393
[ 4]
White balance
For details on white balance, see
White Balance.
Set Custom WB
For details on registering custom white balances, see
Custom White Balance.
WB correction
For details on white balance correction, see
White Balance Correction.
Picture Style
For details on Picture Styles, see
Picture Style Selection.
Clarity
For details on clarity, see
Clarity.
394
[ 5]
Lens aberration correction
Peripheral illumination, distortion, chromatic aberration, and diffraction can be corrected
as you record movies. For details on lens aberration correction, see
Lens Aberration
Correction.
High ISO speed NR
For details on High ISO speed noise reduction, see
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction.
395
[ 6]
Remote control
By setting to [Enable], you can start or stop movie recording using Wireless Remote
Control BR-E1 (sold separately).
396
[ 7]
Customize Quick Controls
For details on customizing Quick Controls, see
Customizing Quick Controls.
Metering timer
For details on the metering timer, see
Metering Timer.
Shooting info. disp.
For details on configuring shooting information display, see
Shooting Information
Display.
VF display format
For details on the viewfinder display format, see
Viewfinder Display Format.
397
[ 8]
Auto pwr off temp.
Set to [High] to reduce the frequency of the camera automatically turning off due to high
card temperature.
Standby: Low res.
Set to [On] to conserve battery power and control the rise of camera temperature during
standby.
As a result, it may enable you to record movies over a longer period.
Caution
Image quality on the standby screen may differ from image quality on the screen
during movie recording, but this setting does not affect recording quality.
Briefly when you start or stop recording movies, image display may remain on the
current frame instead of being updated.
Cards may become hot when [ : Auto pwr off temp.] is set to [High]. Wait until
the card has cooled down before removing it.
398
HDMI display
You can specify how movies are displayed as they are recorded via HDMI to an external
device. Movie output itself corresponds to the [Movie rec. size] setting.
The default setting is [
+ ].
•
+
Enables movie display both on the camera screen and on the other device, via
HDMI output.
Camera operations such as image playback or menu display are shown on the other
device via HDMI, not on the camera screen.
•
Deactivates the camera screen during output via HDMI, so that the screen is blank.
Shooting information, AF points, and other information is shown on the external
device via HDMI, but you can stop output of this information by pressing the
<
> button.
Before recording movies externally, confirm that no information is being sent by the
camera by making sure no shooting information, AF points, and so on is displayed
on external monitors or other devices.
Settings such as time codes may not be recorded correctly in external movie
recording with [
: Standby: Low res.] set to [On].
For longer HDMI output
To continue HDMI output for longer than 30 min., select [ + ], then set [Auto power
off] in [
: Power saving] to [Disable] ( ). HDMI output will continue after the camera
screen turns off when the time set in [Screen off] elapses.
399
Caution
HDMI output without information prevents display of warnings about the card
space, battery level, or high internal temperature ( ) via HDMI.
During HDMI output, display of the next image may take some time if you switch
between movies of different recording qualities or frame rates.
Avoid operating the camera when recording movies to external devices, which may
cause information to be displayed in the HDMI video output.
Brightness and color of movies recorded with the camera may look different from
that of HDMI video output recorded by external devices, depending on the viewing
environment.
Note
By pressing the < > button, you can change the information displayed.
Time codes can be added to HDMI video output ( ).
Audio is also output via HDMI, except when [Sound recording] is set to [Disable].
400
General Movie Recording Precautions
Caution
Precautions for movie recording
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera's internal components.
If you record something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
If [ ] or [ ] is set and the ISO speed or aperture value changes during
movie recording, the white balance may also change.
If you record a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may
flicker.
If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light, horizontal
banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of noise may occur if
you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an electronic focusing ring.
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming
during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure
changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, inaccurate lens
aberration correction, or loss of focus.
Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
Performing AF during movie recording may cause the following kinds of issues:
significant temporary loss of focus, recording of changes in movie brightness,
temporary stopping of movie recording, or recording of mechanical lens sounds.
Avoid covering the built-in microphones with your fingers or other objects.
Connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable during movie recording will end
recording.
If necessary, also see General Still Photo Shooting Precautions.
The camera may become hot in movie recording while connected via Wi-Fi. Use a
tripod or take other measures to avoid handheld recording.
Image quality may be lower when recording movies under a combination of
conditions such as high ISO speeds, high temperatures, low shutter speeds, and
low light.
Recording movies over an extended period may cause the camera's internal
temperature to rise and affect image quality. Turn off the camera when possible if
you are not recording movies.
401
[ ] and [ ] display
[ ] may be displayed in hot environments or when factors such recording
movies or displaying images on the screen over extended periods increase the
camera's internal temperature. If this condition continues, a red [
] icon will be
displayed. Note that the time until a red [
] appears after the [ ] icon varies
depending on shooting conditions.
The red [ ] icon indicates that movie recording will soon be terminated
automatically. Note that the time until movie recording stops automatically when the
red [
] icon is displayed varies depending on shooting conditions.
Red [ ] icon display indicates that movie recording will soon stop automatically,
so turn the camera off or take other measures, and wait until it cools down.
Moreover, when you are not shooting or recording, always turn off the camera.
After movie recording automatically stops, you will be unable to record movies or
shoot still photos until the camera has cooled down.
Recording and image quality
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer switch
to <
>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the
shutter button halfway. This will consume battery power, and it may reduce the total
movie recording time. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when
using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the Image Stabilizer switch to
<
>.
If the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the movie
may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with manual
exposure.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black
on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on the screen.
Image noise or irregular colors may occur when shooting at high ISO speeds, high
temperatures, slow shutter speeds, or under low light. Movies are recorded almost
exactly as they appear on the screen (except with [
: Canon Log settings] set to
[View Assist.]).
Video and audio quality of recorded movies may be worse on other devices, and
playback may not be possible, even if the devices support MP4 formats.
402
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator may appear on the right
of the screen during movie recording. The indicator shows how much data has
not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory), and it increases more quickly the slower the card is. If the indicator (1)
becomes full, movie recording will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will not appear or the level (if
displayed) will not increase much. First, record a few test movies to see if the card
can write fast enough.
If the indicator shows that the card is full, and movie recording stops automatically,
the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded properly.
If the card's writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator appears,
formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Note
Notes for movie recording
Each time you record a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
Field of view (coverage) is approx. 100%.
Focusing is also possible by pressing the < > button.
To enable starting/stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button
completely, set [Fully-press] for [
: Shutter btn function for movies] to [Start/
stop mov rec] ( ).
The built-in microphone ( ) records in mono.
Any external microphones such as Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately) connected to the camera's external microphone IN terminal are used
instead of the build-in microphones ( ).
Most external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm mini-plug can be used.
Focus preset during movie recording is available when using (super) telephoto
lenses equipped with this function released in and after the second half of 2011.
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the BT.709 color space are used for 4K and
Full HD movies.
403
AF/Drive
This chapter describes autofocus operation and drive modes and introduces menu settings
on the AF [
] tab.
Note
< > stands for autofocus. < > stands for manual focus.
• Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos)
• Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording)
• AF Operation
• Movie Servo AF
• Selecting the AF Area
• Manual Focus
• Servo AF Characteristics
• Customizing AF Functions
• Selecting the Drive Mode
• Using the Self-Timer
• Remote Control Shooting
404
Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording)
AF1
(1) Movie Servo AF
(2) AF area
(3) Subject tracking
(4) Subject to detect
(5) Eye detection
(6) Switching tracked subjects
Note
When lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is
displayed on the [
1] tab.
AF2
(1) Movie Servo AF speed
(2) Movie Servo AF track sens.
409
Note
If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange. With One-Shot AF, shooting
is not possible even by pressing the shutter button completely. Recompose the
shot and try to focus again. Or, see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing
Difficult.
With Servo AF, the camera shoots even when subjects are not in focus.
413
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
This AF operation is suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.
The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you
to recompose the image before taking the picture.
For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see Selecting the
Drive Mode.
Note
If [ : Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved.
See Lens electronic MF when using a lens that supports electronic manual
focusing.
414
Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue. The beeper will not sound even
when focus is achieved.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see Selecting the
Drive Mode.
Caution
Accurate focusing may not be possible at high aperture values or depending on the
lens, the distance to the subject, and how fast the subject is moving.
Zooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first, then
recompose and shoot.
Consider shooting with One-Shot AF if Servo AF operation is unsteady for still
subjects.
415
Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie
recording.
1.
Set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to <
>.
2.
Select [
: Movie Servo AF].
416
3.
Select [Enable].
Enable
• The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
• To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to
record mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop
Movie Servo AF by tapping [
] in the lower left of the screen.
• Movie Servo AF will resume after pausing if you return to movie
recording after operations such as pressing the <
> or
<
> button or changing the AF area.
Disable
While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep
focusing on the subject continuously. Pressing the <
> button
focuses only once.
417
Caution
Precautions when set to [Movie Servo AF: Enable]
Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
• When shooting with a higher aperture value.
• Also see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult.
Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the
possible movie recording time ( ) will be shortened.
The camera's built-in microphone may also record mechanical sounds of the lens
or sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera
or lens is operated during movie recording. In this case, using an external
microphone may reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still distracting with an
external microphone, it may be more effective to remove the external microphone
from the camera and position it away from the camera and lens.
Movie Servo AF pauses during zooming or magnified view.
During movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the camera is
moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded image may momentarily
expand or contract (change in image magnification).
418
Selecting the AF Area
AF Area
Selecting the AF Area
Subject Tracking
Subject to Detect
Eye Detection
Switching Tracked Subjects
Tracking with the < > Button
Manually Setting AF Points or Zone AF Frames
Registering AF Points (Home Position)
Magnified View
AF Shooting Tips
Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult
AF Range
419
AF Area
This section describes AF area operation with [
: Subject tracking] set to [Off].
: Spot AF
The camera focuses in a narrower area than 1-point AF.
: 1-point AF
The camera focuses using a single AF point [ ].
420
: Expand AF area:
Focuses using one AF point [ ] and the AF area outlined here in blue. Effective for moving
subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF.
Focusing on your preferred subject is easier than with Flexible Zone AF.
When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point [
].
: Expand AF area: Around
Focuses using one AF point [ ] and the surrounding AF area outlined here in blue, which
makes it easier to focus on moving subjects than with Expand AF area:
.
When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point [
].
421
: Flexible Zone AF 1 (default)
With Flexible Zone AF 1, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame [ ] ( ).
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area,
which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and effective for moving
subjects.
By default, a square Zone AF frame is set.
Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a
variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion,
and subject distance.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [
] over AF points in focus.
: Flexible Zone AF 2
With Flexible Zone AF 2, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame [ ] ( ).
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area,
which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and effective for moving
subjects.
By default, a vertical rectangular Zone AF frame is set.
Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a
variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion,
and subject distance.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [
] over AF points in focus.
422
: Flexible Zone AF 3
With Flexible Zone AF 3, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame [ ] ( ).
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area,
which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and effective for moving
subjects.
By default, a horizontal rectangular Zone AF frame is set.
Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a
variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion,
and subject distance.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [
] over AF points in focus.
: Whole area AF
Uses auto selection AF in a whole-area AF frame to cover a larger area than Flexible Zone
AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area/Flexible Zone AF
and effective for moving subjects.
Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a
variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion,
and subject distance.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [
] over AF points in focus.
423
Selecting the AF Area
You can select the AF area to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you prefer to focus manually, see
Manual Focus.
1.
Select [
: AF area].
2.
Select the AF area.
The screen above is displayed when [ : Orientation linked AF
point] ( ) is set to [Separate AF pts: Area+pt]. Set separate AF
areas after choosing vertical and horizontal orientations.
424
Subject Tracking
Among the subjects detected, a tracking frame [
] is displayed over the main subject.
If the subject moves, the tracking frame [
] also moves to track it.
You can set [
: Eye detection] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject's eyes in focus ( ).
1.
Select [
: Subject tracking].
2.
Select an option.
Caution
No tracking frame is displayed when [ : Subject tracking] is set to [Off],
regardless of the [
: Subject to detect] setting.
426
Manually selecting a subject for focus
1.
Check the tracking frame.
A tracking frame [ ] appears over detected subjects.
Unless the tracking frame [ ] overlaps an AF point, it is displayed in
gray.
Once the tracked subject is behind or inside an AF point, the tracking
frame turns white (distinguishing it as an active frame), enabling
selection as the main subject.
Tracking frames are also white outside of an AF point as long as part of
a subject is detected in the AF point and part of the subject (such as
eyes, face, or head) lies within the range of Whole area AF.
Gray display of tracking frames [ ] does not apply in movie recording.
427
2.
Focus and shoot/record.
Once you press the shutter button halfway and the subject is in focus,
the AF point turns blue.
An orange AF point indicates that the camera could not focus on
subjects.
Subjects are tracked across the entire screen as you press the shutter
button halfway or completely.
428
Note
Selecting a subject manually after pressing the < > button changes the
tracking frame to [
] and locks on to that subject for tracking across the entire
screen regardless of the specified AF area.
Selecting a subject by touch with [ : AF area] set to [Whole area AF] changes
the tracking frame to [
] and locks on to that subject for tracking across the entire
screen.
To release locked tracking, tap [ ] or press the < > button. After release,
the AF point reverts to the position set before release.
Pressing the shutter button halfway when the AF point does not overlap the
tracking frame [
] will focus in the AF point.
When AF operation is set to Servo AF, pressing the shutter button halfway focuses
using Whole area AF.
For human subjects, the active [ ] may cover only a part of the face, not the whole
face.
The size of tracking frames varies depending on the subject.
No tracking frame is displayed when [ : Subject tracking] is set to [Off],
regardless of the [
: Subject to detect] setting.
Caution
Tapping the screen to focus will focus with [One-Shot AF], regardless of the AF
operation setting.
Faces cannot be detected when subjects are greatly out of focus. Focus manually
( ) to bring the subject's face into position for detection, then continue with AF.
AF may not detect subjects or people's faces at the edges of the screen. Before
shooting, recompose the shot to center or roughly center the subject or AF point.
429
Subject to Detect
You can specify conditions for automatic selection of the main subject to track.
People
Prioritizes the faces or heads of people as the main subjects to track.
When a person's face or head cannot be detected, the camera attempts to detect and
track their torso. If their torso cannot be detected, the camera may track other parts of
their body.
Animals
Detects animals (dogs, cats, or birds) and people and prioritizes detection results for
animals as the main subjects to track.
For animals, the camera attempts to detect faces or bodies, and a tracking frame is
shown over any face detected.
When an animal's face or entire body cannot be detected, the camera may track part of
their body.
Vehicles
Detects two- or four-wheeled motorsports vehicles and people and prioritizes detection
results for vehicles as the main subjects to track.
For vehicles, the camera attempts to detect key details or the entire vehicle, and a
tracking frame is shown over any of these details detected.
If key details or the entire vehicle cannot be detected, the camera may track other parts
of the vehicle.
Press the <
> button to enable or disable Spot detection for key details of vehicles.
None
The camera determines the main subject automatically from how you compose shots,
without detecting subjects.
Tracking frames are not displayed.
430
Caution
The camera may detect areas other than faces or bodies of people or animals or
key details or bodies of vehicles as subjects.
Faces that are very small or large in the picture, too bright or dark, or partly hidden
cannot be detected.
Animal face detection is not possible unless the subject is close enough and facing
the camera steadily. A tracking frame is displayed for the entire body.
Detection is not possible for birds camouflaged in a forest, or similar situations.
Detection may not be possible for ordinary passenger cars or bicycles, or for
motorcyclists performing stunts or kicking up dirt and dust.
No tracking frame is displayed when [ : Subject tracking] is set to [Off],
regardless of the [
: Subject to detect] setting.
Note
You can choose the following subjects by pressing the shutter button halfway or
when
Tracking with the < > Button. In scenes without relevant subjects, the
camera tracks other objects.
• People
People, animals, vehicles
• Animals
People, animals
• Vehicles
People, vehicles
431
Eye Detection
You can shoot with the eyes of people or animals in focus.
1.
Select [
: Eye detection].
2.
Select an option.
432
3.
Aim the camera at the subject.
A tracking frame is displayed around their eye.
To choose an eye to focus on when [ : AF area] is set to [Whole
area AF], press the <
> button to change the tracking frame to
[
], then use < >. As you use < >, the tracking frame changes
again to [
].
You can also tap the screen to choose an eye, when [ : AF area] is
set to [Whole area AF] or during tracking in progress.
If your selected eye is not detected, an eye to focus on is selected
automatically.
4.
Take the picture.
Caution
Subject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and shooting
conditions.
No tracking frame is displayed when [ : Subject tracking] is set to [Off],
regardless of the [
: Subject to detect] setting.
Eyes are not detected when [ : Subject to detect] is set to [None].
433
Switching Tracked Subjects
You can specify how easily the camera switches AF points to track subjects.
Initial priority
Tracks the subject initially determined for AF, to the extent possible.
On subject
Tracks the subject initially determined for AF, to the extent possible. Switches to other
subjects if the camera can no longer determine if the tracked subject is the main subject.
Switch subject
Switches to track other subjects in response to shooting conditions.
Caution
Precautions when set to [Initial priority]
The camera may not be able to continue tracking subjects under some subject
conditions.
• If subjects move vigorously
• If subjects face a different direction or change their posture
• If the tracking frame strays from subjects, or if subjects are hidden behind
obstructions and you can no longer see them
Subjects selected by touch operations are tracked to the extent possible,
regardless of the [
: Subject to detect] setting.
434
Tracking with the < > Button
You can press the <
> button to track subjects with a tracking frame [ ].
1.
Check the AF point.
The AF point (1) will appear.
With Expand AF area: or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF
points are also displayed.
With Flexible Zone AF, the specified Zone AF frame is displayed.
435
2.
Press the <
> button.
The AF point changes to a tracking frame [ ], which locks on to that
subject for tracking and follows the subject within the screen if it moves.
To cancel tracking, press the <
> button again.
The tracking frame changes to [ ] when multiple subjects can be
detected, and you can use <
> to choose a subject to focus on.
Once tracking begins, the subject is tracked across the entire screen,
regardless of the specified AF area.
The position of AF areas and points when tracking stops after you
press the shutter button halfway or completely corresponds to the
position of the tracking frame during tracking. The position of AF areas
and points when tracking stops during shooting standby corresponds to
the position before tracking.
3.
Take the picture.
436
Manually Setting AF Points or Zone AF Frames
You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, Flexible Zone AF 1 screens are
used as an example.
1.
Check the AF point.
The AF point (1) will appear.
With Expand AF area: or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF
points are also displayed.
With Flexible Zone AF, the specified Zone AF frame is displayed.
437
2.
Move the AF point.
Press the < > button, use < > to move the AF point into position
for focusing, then press <
> (but note that with some lenses, it may
not move to the edge of the screen).
To center the AF point while using < >, press < > straight in.
You can also focus by tapping a position on the screen.
To center the AF point or Zone AF frame, tap [ ] or press < >
straight in.
You can resize Zone AF frames used for Flexible Zone AF by pressing
the <
> button. Adjust the horizontal size with the < > dial
and vertical size with the <
> dial, then press < >. To restore the
default Zone AF frame size, press the <
> button.
438
3.
Focus and take the picture.
Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.
When focus is achieved, the AF point turns blue.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.
Caution
The camera will keep moving the AF point [ ] to track subjects when set to
Flexible Zone AF and Servo AF, but under some shooting conditions (such as
when subjects are small), it may not be possible to track the subject.
Focusing may be difficult when using a peripheral AF point. In this case, select an
AF point in the center.
Tapping the screen to focus will focus with [One-Shot AF], regardless of the AF
operation setting.
Note
You can set AF areas and AF points when [ : Orientation linked AF point] is
set to [Separate AF pts: Area+pt] ( ).
439
Registering AF Points (Home Position)
You can register the position of a frequently used AF point. For instant switching from the
current AF point to your registered AF point, you can use a button you assign to recalling the
home position on advanced setting screens for [Direct AF point selection], [Metering and
AF start], [Switch to registered AF point], or [Register/recall shooting func] in [
:
Customize buttons] ( ).
1.
Select your preferred AF area.
Press the < > button to select an AF area.
Move the AF point or Zone AF frame to the position to register.
2.
Register the AF point or Zone AF frame.
Hold down the < > button and press the < > button, or press and
hold the <
> button, so that the camera beeps and registers the AF
point.
The registered AF point blinks in gray.
Registration when the camera is set to Whole area AF will register the
entire AF area as the home position.
440
Note
To clear registered AF points, hold down the < > button and press the < >
button, or press and hold the <
> button.
You can also clear registered AF points by clearing all camera settings.
You can register separate home positions for each camera orientation when the
orientation-linked AF point setting ( ) is set to [Separate AF pts: Area+pt] or
[Separate AF pts: Pt only].
Although it has no effect if you attempt to register a home position while a subject is
being tracked with a tracking frame, you can clear registered positions at this time.
441
Magnified View
To check the focus, you can magnify display by approx. 5× or 10× by pressing the <
>
button (or tapping [
]).
Magnification is centered on the AF point for [Spot AF], [1-point AF], [Expand AF area:
], and [Expand AF area: Around], or on the Zone AF frame for Flexible Zone AF.
Autofocusing is performed in magnified view if you press the shutter button halfway.
When set to Servo AF, pressing the shutter button halfway in magnified view reverts to
the normal view for focusing.
Magnification is centered on the tracking frame when [ : Subject tracking] is set to
[On] and the tracking frame [
] is white (as an active frame), or when you are tracking
with the <
> button ( ).
Caution
If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and perform
AF.
If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view, accurate
focus may not be achieved.
AF speed differs between the normal view and magnified view.
Preview AF and Movie Servo AF are not available in magnified view.
With the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
442
AF Shooting Tips
Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again.
Image brightness may change before and after autofocusing.
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the
continuous shooting speed may decrease.
If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and focusing may be
difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume shooting with AF under the light
source you will use.
If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually ( ).
For subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus, try centering the
subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them into focus, then recompose the
shot before shooting.
With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with autofocus, or accurate
focusing may not be achieved.
443
Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult
Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces or when highlight
or shadow details are clipped.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction.
Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards,
etc.).
Fine lines and subject outlines.
Under light sources with constantly changing brightness, colors, or patterns.
Night scenes or points of light.
The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the screen.
Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly reflective surfaces,
etc.).
Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a cage, etc.).
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to camera shake
or subject blur.
Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
A special effect filter is used.
Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
444
AF Range
The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens, aspect ratio, and image quality
used, and whether you are shooting 4K movies or using features such as Movie cropping or
Movie digital IS.
445
Manual Focus
Setting MF peaking (Outline Emphasis)
Focus Guide
If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and focus manually.
1.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to <
>.
Turn the lens focusing ring to set the approximate focus.
For lenses without a focus mode switch, set [ : Focus mode] to
[
].
2.
Magnify the image.
Each press of the < > button changes the magnification ratio, as
follows.
446
3.
Move the magnified area.
Use < > to move the magnified area into position for focusing.
To center the magnified area, press < > straight in.
4.
Focus manually.
While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to
focus.
After achieving focus, press the < > button to return to the normal
view.
Note
In magnified view, the exposure is locked.
Even when focusing manually, you can use Touch Shutter to shoot.
447
Setting MF peaking (Outline Emphasis)
Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing easier. You can set
the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of edge detection.
1.
Select [
: MF peaking settings].
2.
Select [Peaking].
Select [On].
3.
Set [Level] and [Color].
Set as necessary.
448
Caution
In magnified view, peaking display is not shown.
During HDMI output, peaking display is not shown on equipment connected via
HDMI. Note that peaking display is shown on the camera screen when [
: HDMI
display] is set to [
+ ].
MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO
expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking] to [Off].
Note
Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.
MF peaking may be hard to discern when Canon Log is set. If necessary, set [View
Assist.] to [On].
449
Focus Guide
Setting [
: Focus guide] to [On] provides a guide frame that shows which direction to
adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed to focus on the person. You can also use
eye control to display the focus guide at your preferred position. For details, see Using Eye
Control for AF.
1.
Select [
: Focus guide].
2.
Select [On].
The guide frame is displayed on the face of any person detected as the
main subject.
To display the guide frame near the eyes of any person detected as the
main subject, set [
: Subject tracking] to [On] and [ : Eye
detection] to [Enable].
After pressing the < > button, you can use < > to move the guide
frame in the direction you press.
To center the guide frame while using < >, press < > straight in.
To set the guide frame after moving it with < >, press < >.
You can also move and set the guide frame by tapping the screen.
To center the guide frame, tap [ ] or press < > straight in.
450
The guide frame indicates the current position in focus and adjustment amount as follows.
Toward infinity
Much adjustment needed
Toward infinity
Slight adjustment needed
In focus
Toward close range
Slight adjustment needed
Toward close range
Much adjustment needed
451
Adjustment information
not detected
Caution
Under difficult shooting conditions for AF ( ), the guide frame may not be
displayed correctly.
Higher aperture values are more likely to prevent correct guide frame display.
No AF points are displayed while the guide frame is displayed.
The guide frame is not displayed in these situations.
• When the lens's focus mode switch is set to <
>
• When display is magnified
The guide frame is not displayed correctly during shifting or tilting of TS-E lenses.
Note
The camera's auto power off counter does not count time spent adjusting the focus
with a lens's electronic focusing ring.
452
Servo AF Characteristics
Case Details
Case 1: Versatile Multi-Purpose Setting
Case 2: Continue to Track Subjects, Ignoring Possible Obstacles
Case 3: Instantly Focus on Subjects Suddenly Entering AF Points
Case 4: For Subjects That Accelerate or Decelerate Quickly
Case A: Tracking Automatically Adapts to Subject Movement
Parameters
Adjusting Case Parameters
Shooting with Servo AF can be easily tailored to your subjects or shooting situations by
selecting a Case option. This feature is called the “AF Configuration Tool.”
1.
Select the [
2] tab.
2.
Select a case.
Turn the < > dial to select a case icon, then press < >.
Your selected case is now set. Selected cases are displayed in blue.
453
Case Details
Case 1 to Case A are five combinations of settings for “
Tracking sensitivity” and
“Acceleration/deceleration tracking.” Referring to the following table, select the case for your
subject and shooting situation.
Case Icon Description
Examples of Shooting
Situations
Case 1
/
Versatile multi purpose setting Moving subjects in general
Case 2
Continue to track subjects,
ignoring possible obstacles
Tennis, freestyle skiing
Case 3
Instantly focus on subjects
suddenly entering AF points
Start of a cycling race, downhill
skiing
Case 4
/
For subjects that accel- erate or
decelerate quickly
Soccer, rhythmic gymnastics,
motorsports, basketball
Case A
Tracking automatically adapts to
subject movement
Moving subjects in general,
especially in dynamic shooting
situations
454
Case 1: Versatile Multi-Purpose Setting
Default
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
Standard setting suited to moving subjects in general. Suitable for many kinds of subjects
and scenes.
In the following situations, select [Case 2] to [Case 4] instead: non-subjects moving across
AF points, elusive subjects, or subjects that suddenly appear or change speed.
455
Case 2: Continue to Track Subjects, Ignoring Possible
Obstacles
Default
• Tracking sensitivity: Locked on: –1
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
Setting to continue focusing on the subject even if non-subjects move across AF points, or if
the subject strays from AF points. Effective if you prefer the focus not to switch to non-
subjects or the background.
Note
Try setting [Tracking sensitivity] to [–2] if non-subjects tend to steal the focus or
AF points tend to stray from the subject much of the time, preventing the camera
from tracking the target subject under default settings ( ).
456
Case 3: Instantly Focus on Subjects Suddenly Entering
AF Points
Default
• Tracking sensitivity: Responsive: +1
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
Setting to focus on a series of subjects at different distances in the AF points, one after
another. Focus switches to any new subject that appears in front of the target subject. Also
effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject.
Note
Try setting [Tracking sensitivity] to [+2] if you prefer focusing that immediately
switches to new subjects that appear suddenly ( ).
457
Case 4: For Subjects That Accelerate or Decelerate
Quickly
Default
• Tracking sensitivity: Responsive: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
Setting to keep tracking and focusing on subjects even if they suddenly change speed.
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/deceleration, or
sudden stops.
Note
Try setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] to keep up with subjects that change
speed significantly from moment to moment ( ).
458
Case A: Tracking Automatically Adapts to Subject
Movement
Useful when you prefer to shoot with parameters set automatically, based on how subjects
change.
Tracking sensitivity and acceleration/deceleration tracking are set automatically.
459
Parameters
Tracking sensitivity
Setting for Servo AF subject-tracking sensitivity in response to non-subjects moving across
AF points or subjects straying from AF points.
0
Standard setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
Locked on: –2 / Locked on: –1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if non-subjects move
across AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points. The –2 setting makes the
camera keep tracking the target subject longer than the –1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take slightly longer to switch
and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different distances that are covered
by the AF points. Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject.
The +2 setting is more responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next
subject.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an unintended subject.
460
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
Setting for subject-tracking sensitivity in response to sudden, significant changes in speed,
as when subjects suddenly start or stop moving.
0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed).
–2 / –1
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed).
Effective when a setting of 0 makes focus unstable, due to slight subject movement or
an obstruction in front of the subject.
+2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/deceleration, or
sudden stops. Even if the moving subject's speed suddenly changes significantly, the
camera continues to focus on the target subject. For example, the camera is less likely
to focus behind a subject that suddenly starts approaching you, or in front of an
approaching subject that suddenly stops moving. Setting +2 can track dramatic changes
in the moving subject's speed better than with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of the subject,
focusing may become unstable for short periods.
461
Adjusting Case Parameters
You can manually adjust the parameters ((1) Tracking sensitivity and (2) Acceleration/
deceleration tracking) for Case 1 to Case 4.
1.
Select a case.
Turn the < > dial to select the number of a case to adjust.
2.
Press the <
> button.
The selected parameter is outlined in purple.
3.
Select a parameter to adjust.
462
4.
Make the adjustment.
Default settings are indicated by a light gray [ ] icon.
To confirm the adjustment, press < >.
To return to the screen in step 1, press the < > button.
Note
To restore default parameter settings for (1) and (2) to each case, press the
<
> button in step 2, then press the < > button.
You can also register (1) and (2) parameter settings to My Menu ( ). This enables
you to adjust settings for the selected case.
To shoot with a case you have adjusted, first select the adjusted case, then shoot.
463
Customizing AF Functions
[ 3]
[ 4]
[ 6]
[ 2] (In Movie Recording)
You can configure AF functions in detail to suit your shooting style or subject.
[ 3]
One-Shot AF release priority
You can specify whether to prioritize focus or release timing for One-Shot AF (except when
shooting with Touch Shutter).
[ ] Focus
The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Useful when you want to achieve
focus before capturing the image.
464
[ ] Release
Prioritizes shutter release over focus. Useful when capturing the decisive moment is
most important.
Note that the camera shoots whether or not the subject is in focus.
Preview AF
This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to focus immediately
when you press the shutter button halfway.
1.
Select [
: Preview AF].
2.
Select [Enable].
Caution
Fewer shots are available when set to [Enable], because the lens is driven
continuously and battery power is consumed.
465
Lens operation when AF is not available
You can specify lens operation that applies when autofocusing on a subject is not possible.
[ ] Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search for the precise
focus.
[ ] Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved, the lens drive
will not be performed. This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus due to
the focus search drive.
Caution
[Stop focus search] is recommended for super telephoto lenses or other lenses
that are driven over a large focus area, to avoid significant delay from focus search
drive if the lens becomes greatly out of focus.
AF-assist beam firing
You can enable or disable AF-assist beam firing of the camera or a Speedlite for EOS
cameras.
1.
Select [
: AF-assist beam firing].
466
2.
Select an option.
[ON] Enable
Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed.
[OFF] Disable
Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire the
AF-assist beam.
[LED] LED AF assist beam only
Enables LED AF-assist beam firing by Speedlites equipped with this
feature, when these flash units are attached. If your Speedlite is not
LED-equipped, the camera's AF-assist beam is fired instead.
Caution
Speedlite AF-assist beam firing is disabled when the Speedlite's [ : AF-assist
beam firing] Custom Function is set to [Disable].
467
[ 4]
Limit AF areas
You can limit the AF areas available to the areas that you normally use. Select available AF
areas and press <
> to add a checkmark [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting. For
details on AF areas, see AF Area.
Caution
The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time.
Note
An asterisk to the right of [ : Limit AF areas] indicates that the default setting
has been modified.
468
AF area selection control
You can set how AF area selection methods are switched.
[ ] →M-Fn button
Press the <
> button, then the < > button. Each press switches the AF area.
[ ] →Main Dial
Press the <
> button, then turn the < > dial to switch the AF area.
Note
When [ →Main Dial] is set, use < > to move the AF point horizontally.
Multi-controller sensitivity in AF point selection
You can adjust Multi-controller sensitivity, which applies to AF point positioning.
469
Orientation-linked AF points
You can set separate types of AF areas or positions of AF points for vertical and horizontal
shooting.
[ ] Same for both vert/horiz
The same AF points or Zone AF frames in the same AF areas are used in both vertical
and horizontal shooting.
[ ] Separate AF pts: Area+pt
Separate types of AF areas or separate positions of AF points or Zone AF frames can
be set for each camera orientation ((1) Horizontal, (2) Vertical with the camera grip up,
(3) Vertical with the camera grip down ( )).
Useful when switching to other types of AF areas or positions of AF points or Zone AF
frames automatically based on camera orientation.
AF areas and positions of AF points or Zone AF frames you assign to each of the three
camera orientations are retained.
[ ] Separate AF pts: Pt only
Separate positions of AF points or Zone AF frames can be set for each camera
orientation ((1) Horizontal, (2) Vertical with the camera grip up, (3) Vertical with the
camera grip down). Useful when switching to other positions of AF points or Zone AF
frames automatically based on camera orientation.
Positions of AF points or Zone AF frames you assign to each of the three camera
orientations are retained.
Caution
The default setting of [Same for both vert/horiz] is restored if you select [Basic
settings] in [
: Reset camera] ( ). Settings for orientations (1)–(3) are cleared,
and the camera is set to use the center Zone AF frame in Flexible Zone AF 1.
The setting may be cleared if you switch lenses.
470
[ 6]
Electronic full-time MF
Operation of manual focus adjustment using the electronic focusing ring when certain lenses
are attached is customizable. Check the Canon website for compatible lenses.
Disable
Operation of manual focus adjustment corresponds to the [Lens electronic MF] setting.
Enable
Manual focus adjustment is available whenever the camera is on.
Lens electronic MF
For lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing, you can specify how manual focus
adjustment is used with One-Shot AF.
[ ] Disable after One-Shot
After the AF operation, manual focusing adjustment is disabled.
[ ] One-Shot→enabled
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep holding down the
shutter button halfway.
471
[ ] One-Shot→enabled (magnify)
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep holding down the
shutter button halfway. You can magnify the area in focus and adjust the focus manually
by turning the lens focusing ring.
[ ] Disable in AF mode
Manual focus adjustment is disabled when the lens's focus mode switch is set to
<
>.
Caution
With [One-Shot→enabled (magnify)], display may not be magnified even if you
turn the lens focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway immediately
after shooting. If so, you can magnify display by releasing the shutter button,
waiting for [
] display, then pressing the shutter button halfway as you turn the
lens focusing ring.
Note
For details on your lens's manual focus specifications, refer to the Lens Instruction
Manual.
472
Focusing ring rotation
You can reverse the direction that the focusing ring of RF lens is rotated to adjust settings.
[ ] Normal
[ ] Reverse direction
Focusing ring sensitivity of RF lenses
You can set the sensitivity of the RF lens focusing ring.
[ ] Varies with rotation speed
Focusing ring sensitivity varies depending on rotation speed.
[ ] Linked to rotation degree
The focal position is adjusted based on the amount of rotation, regardless of the rotation
speed.
473
Use as a focusing or control ring
Menu-based switching of lens focus/control ring functionality.
Caution
Available when using lenses that have a combination focusing ring/control ring but
have no switch to switch between these feature.
Use as focus ring
The ring works as a focusing ring.
Use as control ring
The ring works as a control ring.
Note
Switching is also possible from the Quick Control screen, when customized with
[
: Customize Quick Controls] ( ).
474
[ 2] (In Movie Recording)
Movie Servo AF speed
This function is available when [
: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable].
You can set the AF speed and operating conditions for Movie Servo AF. The function is
enabled when using a lens supporting slow focus transition during movie recording.*
When active
You can set [Always on] to have the AF speed take effect at all times for movie
recording (before and during movie recording) or set [During shooting] to have the AF
speed take effect only during movie recording.
AF speed
You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed) from the standard speed (0) to
slow (one of seven levels) or fast (one of two levels) to obtain the desired effect for the
movie creation.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie recording
USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For details, refer to the
Canon website.
Caution
With certain lenses, even if you adjust the AF speed, the speed may not change.
475
Note
Operation when inactive is equivalent to when [AF speed] is set to [Standard (0)].
An asterisk “*” to the right of [ : Movie Servo AF speed] indicates that the
default setting has been modified.
Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity
You can adjust the tracking sensitivity (to one of seven levels), which affects responsiveness
if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo AF, as when interfering objects
move across AF points or when you pan.
This function is available when [
: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable].
Locked on: –3/–2/–1
With this setting, the camera is less likely to track a different subject if the subject strays
from the AF point. The closer the setting is to the minus (–) symbol, the less the camera
is inclined to track a different subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF
points from rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during panning or
when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.
Responsive: +1/+2/+3
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that covers the AF
point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol, the more responsive the camera
is. It is effective when you want to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from
the camera changes or to rapidly focus on another subject.
Note
Operation when inactive is equivalent to when set to [0].
476
Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the
scene or subject.
1.
Press the <
> button ( ).
2.
Select the drive mode.
Turn the < > dial to make a selection.
[ ] Single shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.
[ ] High-speed continuous shooting +
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously as
described below while you keep holding it down, based on the [
: Shutter mode]
setting.
• [Electronic]: max. approx. 30 shots/sec.
• [Elec. 1st-curtain]: max. approx. 12 shots/sec.
• [Mechanical]: max. approx. 12 shots/sec.
477
[ ] High-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously as
described below while you keep holding it down, based on the [
: Shutter mode]
setting.
• [Electronic]: max. approx. 15 shots/sec.
• [Elec. 1st-curtain]: max. approx. 8.0 shots/sec.
• [Mechanical]: max. approx. 6.0 shots/sec.
[ ] Low-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max.
approx. 3.0 shots/sec. while you keep holding it down.
[ ] Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
[ ] Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
For self-timer shooting, see Using the Self-Timer. For remote control shooting, see
Remote Control Shooting.
Caution
Approx. 30 shots/sec. continuous shooting speed with [Electronic] set to [ ] is
available under the following conditions.
• Shutter speed: 1/125 sec. or faster
• Flicker reduction: None
Note that the continuous shooting speed may be less than 30 shots/sec. if any of
the following occurs during continuous shooting.
• Switching to [
] or [ ] shooting mode, or applying settings that cause the
aperture value to change in [
] mode
• Zooming is performed
• Manual focusing is performed
• Servo AF changes the position in focus
Visit the Canon website for details on lenses supporting the maximum continuous
shooting speed.
Continuous shooting speed with Servo AF may be slower depending on subject
conditions or the lens used.
Continuous shooting speed may be lower when shooting under flickering light with
[
: Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable] ( ). Also, the continuous shooting
interval may become irregular and the release time lag may become longer.
When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the continuous
shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be temporarily disabled ( ).
Continuous shooting speed may be slower and image display in the viewfinder or
on the screen may stop under some shooting conditions.
478
Using the Self-Timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph.
1.
Press the <
> button ( ).
2.
Select the self-timer.
Turn the < > dial to make a selection.
: Shoot in 10 sec.
: Shoot in 2 sec.
479
3.
Take the picture.
Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button completely.
To check operation, look at the self-timer lamp, listen for beeps, or
watch the countdown in seconds on the screen.
Self-timer lamp blinking accelerates and the camera beeps quickly
approx. 2 sec. before the picture is taken.
Note
[ ] is used to start shooting without touching the camera (to avoid camera shake)
when it is mounted on a tripod for shots such as still lifes or long exposures, for
example.
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image ( ) to check focus and
exposure is recommended.
When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock ( ) on an object at the
same distance as where you will stand.
To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap the screen or press < >.
Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
480
Remote Control Shooting
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
Remote Switch RS-80N3 / Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3
For remote control shooting, you can use an optional Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(Bluetooth) or an optional Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3
(both wired).
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.
After pairing the camera and BR-E1 (
), set the drive mode to [ ] or [ ] for still photo
shooting (
). For movie recording, set [ : Remote control] to [Enable].
For operating instructions, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual.
Note
Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
BR-E1 can also be used for movie recording.
481
Remote Switch RS-80N3 / Timer Remote Controller
TC-80N3
Once connected to the camera, the switch enables you to shoot remotely over a wired
connection.
For operating instructions, refer to the accessory instruction manual.
1.
Open the terminal cover.
2.
Connect the plug to the remote control terminal.
482
Playback
This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back captured still photos and
movies—and introduces menu settings on the playback [
] tab.
Caution
Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for images
captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that have been edited or
renamed on a computer.
Images that cannot be used with playback functions may be displayed.
Note
You can set [ : Screen brightness] ( ) during playback by pressing the < >
button.
• Tab Menus: Playback
• Image Playback
• Magnified Image Display
• Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
• Voice Memo Recording and Playback
• Movie Playback
• Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes
• 4K Movie Frame Grab
• Playback on a TV Set
• Protecting Images
• Erasing Images
• Rotating Still Photos
• Changing Movie Orientation Information
• Rating Images
• Copying Images
• Print Ordering (DPOF)
• RAW Image Processing
• Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images
• Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images
• Converting HEIF to JPEG
• Slide Show
• Setting Image Search Conditions
• Browsing Images with the Main Dial
483
Image Playback
Single-Image Display
Shooting Information Display
Touch Playback
Single-Image Display
1.
Switch to playback.
Press the < > button.
The last image captured or played back is displayed.
2.
Browse images.
To play back images starting with your most recent shot, turn the
<
> dial counterclockwise. To play back images starting with the first
captured image, turn the dial clockwise.
Each time you press the < > button, the display will change.
488
No information Basic information display
Shooting information display
3.
Exit image playback.
Press the < > button to exit image playback and return to shooting
standby.
Note
Lines indicating the image area are shown on RAW images captured with [ :
Cropping/aspect ratio] set to [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9
(aspect ratio)] ( ).
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), only
the filtered images will be displayed.
When played back, images captured with [ : Add cropping information] set to
an option other than [Disable] ( ) are displayed with lines indicating the image
area.
489
Touch Playback
The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control playback.
Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones and similar devices. First,
press the <
> button to prepare for touch playback.
Browse images
Jump display
Index display
491
Magnified view
Note
You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
492
Magnified Image Display
Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio
Setting the Initial Magnification Position
Magnification for Subsequent Images
You can magnify display of your captured images.
1.
Magnify the image.
Magnification is possible at these times: 1. During image playback
(single-image display), 2. During image review after shooting, and 3.
When the camera is ready to shoot.
Press the < > button.
The magnified view will appear. The position of the magnified area (1)
is displayed in the lower right of the screen, along with [
].
To magnify images, turn the < > dial clockwise.
To reduce magnification, turn the < > dial counterclockwise. Index
display ( ) can be accessed by turning the dial further (at the times of
1. and 3. only).
493
2.
Scroll the image.
Use < > to scroll around the magnified image.
With < >, you can also move the magnified area itself.
Press the < > or < > button to exit magnified view.
Note
To switch to other images while maintaining magnified view, turn the < > dial (at
the times of 1. and 3. only).
Magnification is not available for movies.
494
Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio
You can set the initial magnification ratio.
1.
Select [
: Magnification].
2.
Select [Magnificatn (apx)].
495
3.
Select an option.
2x, 4x, 8x, 10x
Magnified view starts at the selected magnification ratio.
Actual size
The recorded image's pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%.
Same as last
Magnified view resumes from the same ratio as the last time you exited
magnified view with the <
> or < > button.
496
Setting the Initial Magnification Position
You can set the initial magnification position.
1.
Select [
: Magnification].
2.
Select [Magnified position].
497
3.
Select an option.
From center
Magnified view starts from the center of the screen.
From focus pt
Magnified view starts from the AF point in focus. If the photo is taken
with manual focus, the magnified view starts from the center of the
screen.
498
Magnification for Subsequent Images
You can specify whether to maintain the same position for magnified view or use to the
position set in [Magnified position] when displaying subsequent images.
1.
Select [
: Magnification].
2.
Select [Maintain position].
499
3.
Select an option.
Enable
The current magnified position is maintained when displaying
subsequent images in magnified view.
Disable
The position set in [Magnified position] is used when displaying
subsequent images in magnified view.
500
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
1.
Press the <
> button.
During image playback, press the < > button.
[ ] will be displayed in the lower right of the screen.
2.
Switch to the index display.
Turn the < > dial counterclockwise.
The 4-image index display will appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
Turning the < > dial further counterclockwise will switch the display
from 9 to 36 to 100 images. Turning the dial clockwise cycles through
100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image display.
501
502
3.
Browse images.
Use < > or the < > dial to move the orange frame for image
selection.
Press < > in the index display to display the selected image in the
single-image display.
503
Voice Memo Recording and Playback
Recording Voice Memos
Memo Audio Quality
Playing Voice Memos
You can add (record) voice memos to your shots. Voice memos are recorded as WAV audio
files with the same file number as the image. They can be played back by the camera or a
computer.
Recording Voice Memos
1.
Switch to playback.
2.
Select an image to add a voice memo to.
Turn the < > dial to select an image to add a voice memo to.
504
3.
Record a voice memo.
Hold down the < / > button for approx. 2 sec.
Keep holding down the button after [Recording memo...] appears, and
speak into the microphone (1). Each recording can be up to approx. 30
sec.
To end the voice memo, release the button.
A [ ] icon is displayed at the top of the screen.
505
Caution
Voice memos cannot be added to movies or protected images.
Voice memos cannot be recorded with an external microphone.
Voice memos cannot be added to images during transfer to an FTP server.
Note
Audio quality of voice memo recording can be changed in [ : Memo audio
quality].
To record voice memos longer than 30 sec., repeat step 3.
You can record a single voice memo during image review (immediately after
shooting) by following step 3.
506
Memo Audio Quality
You can set the audio quality for recording voice memos.
1.
Select [
: Memo audio quality].
2.
Select an option.
48 kHz: High quality (48 kHz)
Enables voice memo recording at the same level of audio quality as
movies.
8 kHz: Low quality (8 kHz)
Enables smaller voice memo file sizes than with [High quality (48
kHz)].
Caution
Additional voice memo recording for images with existing voice memos is
performed at the same level of audio quality as the first recording, regardless of this
setting.
507
Playing Voice Memos
1.
Select [
: / button function].
2.
Select [
/ ].
3.
Select an image for voice memo playback.
Press the < > button to switch to image playback.
Turn the < > dial to select an image labeled with a [ ] icon at the
top of the screen.
508
4.
Play back the voice memo.
Press the < / > button to play back the voice memo through
the speaker (1).
You can adjust the sound volume by turning the < > dial.
Press the < / > button to stop playback.
Note
Multiple voice memos added to an image are played back consecutively.
Added voice memos cannot be erased by themselves using the camera.
Erasing images ( ) also erases any voice memos added to the images.
509
Movie Playback
1.
Switch to playback.
Press the < > button.
2.
Select a movie.
Turn the < > dial to select a movie to play.
In single-image display, the [ ] icon displayed in the upper left of
the screen indicates a movie.
In index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. Movies cannot be played back from index display, so press
<
> to switch to single-image display.
510
3.
In the single-image display, press <
>.
4.
Press <
> to play back the movie.
The movie will start playing back. Sound is played through the speaker
(1).
You can pause playback and display the movie playback panel by
pressing <
>. Press it again to resume the playback.
Turn the < > dial to adjust the volume (even during playback).
511
Movie playback panel
Item Playback Operations
Playback Pressing < > toggles between playback and stop.
Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the <
> dial. The slow
motion speed is indicated in the upper right of the screen.
Skip backward
Skips backward approx. 1 sec. each time you press <
>. Holding
<
> down will rewind the movie.
Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <
>. Holding
<
> down will rewind the movie.
Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press <
>. Holding
<
> down will fast forward the movie.
Skip forward
Skips forward approx. 1 sec. each time you press <
>. Holding
<
> down will fast forward the movie.
Edit
Displays the editing screen (
).
Frame Grab
Available when you play 4K movies. Enables you to extract the current
frame and save it as a JPEG or HEIF still image (
).
Playback position
hh:mm:ss
Playback time (hours:minutes:seconds, when [Movie play count] is
set to [Rec time])
hh:mm:ss.ff (DF)
hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF)
Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames, when [Movie play count]
is set to [Time code])
Volume
Turn the <
> dial to adjust the volume of the speaker ( ) or
headphones.
Press the < > button to return to single-image display.
Caution
Adjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a
television for movie playback ( ), because volume cannot be adjusted by turning
the <
> dial.
Movie playback may stop if the card's read speed is too slow or movie files have
corrupted frames.
512
Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec. increments.
1.
In single-image display, press <
>.
2.
On the movie playback panel, select [
].
513
3.
Specify the part to be edited out.
Select either [ ] (Cut beginning) or [ ] (Cut end).
Press < > left or right to go back or forward one frame. Keep
pressing the Multi-controller to fast rewind or fast forward frames. Each
turn of the <
> dial goes back or forward one frame.
After deciding which part to edit out, press < >. The portion indicated
by a line at the bottom of the screen will remain.
4.
Check the edited movie.
Select [ ] to play back the edited movie.
To change the edited part, go back to step 3.
To cancel the editing, press the < > button.
514
5.
Save.
Select [ ] (1).
The save screen will appear.
To save it as a new file, select [New file], or to save it and overwrite the
original movie file, select [Overwrite].
Select [
] (2) to save a compressed version of the file. 4K movies are
converted to Full HD movies before compression.
On the confirmation screen, select [OK] to save the edited movie and
return to the movie playback screen.
Caution
Because editing is performed in approx. 1 sec. increments (at the position indicated
by [
] at the bottom of the screen), the actual position where movies are trimmed
may differ from your specified position.
Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
Compress and save is not available for the following movies.
• Movies recorded with [
: HDR shooting ] set to [Enable]
• Movies recorded with [
: Canon Log settings] set to [On ( )]
• Movies recorded in
(NTSC), (PAL),
(NTSC), or sizes
Movies may not be compressed when the remaining batter capacity is low. Use of
a fully charged battery or a household power outlet accessory (sold separately) is
recommended.
For extensive movie editing, consider using an optional household power outlet
accessory.
515
4K Movie Frame Grab
From 4K movies, you can select individual frames to save as JPEG or HEIF still images.
This function is called “Frame Grab.”
1.
Select a 4K movie.
Turn the < > dial to select a 4K quality movie.
On the shooting information screen ( ), 4K movies are labeled with
[
] and [ ] icons.
In index display, press < > to switch to single-image display.
2.
In the single-image display, press <
>.
The movie playback panel will appear.
3.
Select a frame to grab.
Use the movie playback panel to select the frame to grab as a still
image.
For movie playback panel instructions, see Movie playback panel.
516
4.
Select [
].
5.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the current frame as a JPEG still image.
Frame grabs from HDR movie files are saved as HEIF images.
Check the destination folder and image file number.
6.
Select the image to display.
Select [View original movie] or [View extracted still image].
Caution
Frame grabbing is not possible from the following 4K movies.
• RAW movies
• Movies recorded with [ : Canon Log settings] set to [On ( )]
• Movies recorded with other cameras
Frame grabbing is not possible while the camera is connected to a computer.
517
Playback on a TV Set
By connecting the camera to a television with a commercially available HDMI cable, you can
play back the captured still photos and movies on the television.
If the image does not appear on the TV screen, confirm that [
: Video system] is
correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your
television).
1.
Connect the HDMI cable to the camera.
Use the cable protector ( ) and insert the HDMI cable in the camera's
<
> terminal.
2.
Connect the HDMI cable to the television.
Connect the HDMI cable to the television's HDMI IN port.
3.
Turn on the television and switch the television's video input to select
the connected port.
4.
Set the camera's power switch to <
>.
518
5.
Press the <
> button.
Images are now displayed on the television, with nothing displayed on
the camera screen.
The images will automatically be displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
Caution
Adjust movie sound volume with the television. The sound volume cannot be
adjusted with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television,
turn off the camera and television.
Depending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
Do not connect any other device's output to the camera's < >
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
It may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set [ : HDMI
resolution] to [1080p] ( ).
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to a
television.
519
Protecting Images
Protecting Individual Images via the Menu
Specifying the Range of Images to Protect
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.
Caution
If you format the card ( ), the protected images will also be erased.
Note
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera's erase function. To
erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.
If you erase all the images ( ), only the protected images will remain. This is
convenient when you want to erase all unneeded images at once.
Protecting Individual Images via the Menu
1.
Select [
: Protect images].
520
2.
Select [Select images].
3.
Select the image to protect.
Turn the < > dial to select an image to protect.
4.
Protect the image.
Press < > to protect the selected image, after which it will be labeled
with a [
] icon (1) at the top of the screen.
To cancel protection and clear the [ ] icon, press < > again.
To protect another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Note
During playback, you can protect images by pressing the < / > button ( ).
521
Specifying the Range of Images to Protect
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to protect all the specified images at once.
1.
Select [Select range].
Select [Select range] in [ : Protect images].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). The images in the specified
range will be protected and the [
] icon will appear.
To select another image to protect, repeat step 2.
522
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [ : Protect
images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel protection, select [Unprotect all images in folder] or [Unprotect all images
on card].
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all found].
• If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be
protected.
• If you select [Unprotect all found], the protection of all the filtered images will be
canceled.
Note
Protecting or unprotecting images by selecting [All images on card] or [Unprotect
all images on card] applies to the card selected in [
: Record func+card/folder
sel.] (in either [
Record/play]/[ Record/play] or [ Play]/[ Play]).
523
Erasing Images
Erasing Images Individually
Selecting ([ ]) Multiple Images to Erase Together
Specifying the Range of Images to Erase
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can either select and erase unnecessary images individually or erase them in one
batch. Protected images ( ) will not be erased.
Caution
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer
need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being
erased accidentally, protect them.
Erasing Images Individually
1.
Press the <
> button.
2.
Select the image to be erased.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to erase.
3.
Press the <
> button.
524
4.
Erase the images.
JPEG/HEIF/RAW images or movies
Select [Erase].
RAW+JPEG/RAW+HEIF images
Select an option.
Series of images captured in [ ], [ ], or [ ] drive mode are
erased when you select [Erase scene including image] during
playback.
Note
During playback, you can erase images by pressing the < / > button ( ).
525
Selecting ([ ]) Multiple Images to Erase Together
By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those images at once.
1.
Select [
: Erase images].
2.
Select [Select and erase images].
3.
Select an image.
Turn the < > dial to select an image to erase, then press < >.
To select another image to be erased, repeat step 3.
526
4.
Erase the images.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
527
Specifying the Range of Images to Erase
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to erase all the specified images at once.
1.
Select [Select range].
Select [Select range] in [ : Erase images].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select another image to be erased, repeat step 2.
3.
Press the <
> button.
528
4.
Erase the images.
Select [OK].
529
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [ : Erase images],
all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images].
• If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be
erased.
Note
To erase all the images including protected images, format the card ( ).
Erasing images by selecting [All images on card] applies to the card selected in
[
: Record func+card/folder sel.] (in either [ Record/play]/[ Record/play]
or [
Play]/[ Play]).
530
Rotating Still Photos
You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1.
Select [
: Rotate stills].
2.
Select an image to rotate.
Turn the < > dial to select the image.
3.
Rotate the image.
Each time you press < >, the image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90°→270°→0°.
To rotate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3.
531
Changing Movie Orientation Information
You can manually edit movie playback orientation information (which determines which side
is up).
1.
Select [
: Change mov rotate info].
2.
Select a movie.
Turn the < > dial to select a movie with orientation information to
change.
533
3.
Change the orientation information.
As you watch the camera and icon in the upper left of the screen,
press <
> to specify which side is up. Each press of < > edits the
movie rotation information as follows: [
] → [ ] → [ ].
Caution
Movies are played horizontally on the camera and via HDMI video output,
regardless of the [
: Add rotate info] setting ( ).
Movie orientation information of movies recorded with other cameras cannot be
edited with this camera.
534
Rating Images
Rating Individual Images With the < / > Button
Rating Individual Images via the Menu
Rating by Specifying the Range
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 ( / / / / ). This function is called
rating.
* Rating images can help you organize them.
Rating Individual Images With the <
/ > Button
1.
Select the image to be rated.
Press the < > button to switch to image playback.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to be rated.
2.
Rate the image.
Press the < / > button to rate the image.
To rate another image, repeat steps 1 and 2.
535
Rating Individual Images via the Menu
1.
Select [
: Rating].
2.
Select [Select images].
3.
Select the image to be rated.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to be rated.
537
4.
Rate the image.
Press < >, and a blue highlight frame will appear as shown in the
screen shown above.
Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then press < >.
When you append a rating mark to the image, the number beside the
set rating will increase by one.
To rate another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.
538
Rating by Specifying the Range
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for
a range to rate all the specified images at once.
1.
Select [Select range].
Select [Select range] in [ : Rating].
2.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select other images, repeat step 2.
3.
Press the <
> button.
539
4.
Rate the images.
Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then select [OK].
All the images in the specified range will be rated (same rating) at
once.
540
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [ : Rating], when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all
the images in the folder or on the card will be rated.
Turn the < > dial to select a rating, then select [OK].
When you are not rating images or canceling the rating, select [ ].
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), the
display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be
rated as specified.
541
Note
Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have that
rating.
With [ : Set image search conditions] and [ : Image jump w/ ], you can
display only the images given a specific rating.
542
Copying Images
Copying Individual Images
Copying a Range of Images
Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can copy the images on one card to the other card to save duplicates.
All images in a folder or on a card can also be copied at the same time.
Caution
For extensive copying, consider using a household power outlet accessory (sold
separately).
If the target folder or card already has an image with the same file number, [Skip
image and continue], [Replace existing image], and [Cancel copy] are
displayed. Select a copying method, then press <
>.
• [Skip image and continue]: Any images with the same file number are
skipped and not copied.
• [Replace existing image]: Any images with the same file number (including
protected images) are overwritten.
Overwriting images that had print order information ( ) will require you to set the
print order information again.
Print order and image transfer information is not included in copies of images.
Shooting is not possible during the copying process. Select [Cancel] before
shooting.
Note
Images are copied from the card selected in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] (in
either [
Record/play]/[ Record/play] or [ Play]/[ Play]).
Copies of images have the same file name as the original image.
With [Sel.Image], images in multiple folders cannot be copied at the same time.
Select images to copy from one folder at a time.
Any voice memos added to images are also copied.
543
Copying Individual Images
1.
Select [
: Image copy].
2.
Select [Sel.Image].
Check the source and target card numbers and the free space on the
target card.
Select [Sel.Image], then press < >.
544
3.
Select the folder.
(1) Number of images in folder
(2) Lowest file number
(3) Folder name
(4) Highest file number
Select the source folder, then press < >.
When selecting the folder, refer to the images displayed at right of the
screen.
4.
Select an image to copy.
(1) Total images selected
Turn the < > dial to select an image to copy, then press < >.
To select another image to copy, repeat step 4.
545
5.
Press the <
> button.
6.
Select [OK].
Check the target card, then select [OK].
7.
Select the target folder.
Select the folder to copy the image to, then press < >.
To create a new folder, select [Create folder].
546
8.
Select [OK].
Check the information about the source and target card, then select
[OK].
Results are displayed after copying is finished. Select [OK] to return to
the screen in step 2.
547
Copying a Range of Images
You can copy all specified images at once by selecting the first and last images in a range
as you look at images in the index display.
1.
Select [Range].
2.
Select the folder.
Select the source folder, then press < >.
When selecting the folder, refer to the images displayed at right of the
screen.
548
3.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To select another image to copy, repeat step 3.
4.
Press the <
> button.
Images in the specified range are now copied.
549
Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Selecting [Sel.
] or [All images] in [ : Image copy] copies all the images it contains.
550
Print Ordering (DPOF)
Print Options
Selecting Images for Printing
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card
according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You
can print multiple images in one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file number imprinting, etc.
The print settings will be applied to all the images specified for printing. (They cannot be set
individually for each image.)
Print Options
1.
Select [
: Print order].
2.
Select [Set up].
551
3.
Set the options as desired.
Set [Print type], [Date], and [File No.] options.
Print type
Standard Prints one image on one sheet.
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed
on one sheet.
Both
Prints both the standard and index
prints.
Date
On
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured
image.
Off
File No.
On
[On] imprints the file number.
Off
4.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button.
Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to specify the images to be
printed.
552
Caution
If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting
( ), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In this case, resize the
image ( ), then print the index print.
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may not be
imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the same
time.
When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specifications are set.
You cannot print in the specified print order if you extract just the images from the
card for printing.
Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the
images as you specified. When using a printer, refer to the printer's instruction
manual. When requesting service from a photofinisher, ask in advance.
Do not use this camera to configure print settings for images with DPOF settings
set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten inadvertently.
Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the image type.
553
Selecting Images for Printing
Selecting images
Select and specify the images individually.
Press the <
> button to save the print order to the card.
Standard/Both
(1) Quantity
(2) Total images selected
Press <
> to print a copy of the displayed image. By turning the < > dial, you can
set a print quantity of up to 99 copies.
Index
(3) Checkmark
(4) Index icon
Press <
> to add a checkmark [ ] to the box. The image will be included in the index
print.
554
Selecting multiple images
Select range
Select [Select range] in [Multiple]. Selecting the first and last images of the range
marks all the images in the range with a checkmark [
], and one copy of each image
will be specified for printing.
All images in a folder
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the
images in the folder will be specified.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the images
in the folder will be canceled.
All images on a card
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the card will be specified
for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all the images on the
card.
If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ) and you
select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all found images] and [Clear all found
images].
All found images
If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images filtered by the search
conditions will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the filtered images will be
cleared.
Caution
RAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. Note that RAW images or
movies will not be specified for printing even if you specify all images with
[Multiple].
555
RAW Image Processing
Magnified View
Processing Images with Specified Aspect Ratios
RAW Image Processing Options
You can process or images with the camera to create JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW images are not affected, so different conditions can be applied to create JPEG or HEIF
images.
You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images.
Caution
Processing into HEIF is not available for or images captured with
expanded ISO speed (L or H).
1.
Select [
: RAW image processing].
556
2.
Select an option, then select images.
You can select multiple images to process at once.
Select images
Turn the < > dial to select images to process, then press < >.
Press the < > button.
Select range
Select the first image (start point).
Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be
appended to all the images within the range between first and last
images.
To process other images, repeat this step.
Press the < > button.
557
3.
Set the desired processing conditions.
Use shot settings
Images are processed using image settings at the time of capture.
Images captured with [ : HDR shooting ] set to [Enable] are
processed to create HEIFs, and images captured with this function set
to [Disable] are processed to create JPEGs.
Set up processing→JPEG/Set up processing→HEIF
Use < > to select an item.
Turn the < > or < > dial to switch the setting.
Press < > to access the function setting screen.
To return to the image settings at the time of shooting, press the < >
button.
Comparison screen
You can switch between the [After change] and [Shot settings]
screens by pressing the <
> button and turning the < > dial.
Items in orange on the [After change] screen have been modified
since the time of capture.
Press the < > button to return to the processing conditions
screen.
558
4.
Save.
When using [Set up processing→JPEG] or [Set up processing→
HEIF], select [
] (Save).
Read the message and select [OK].
To process other images, select [Yes] and repeat steps 2–4.
5.
Select the image to display.
Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
Your selected image is displayed.
559
Magnified View
You can magnify images displayed for [Set up processing→JPEG] or [Set up processing
→HEIF] by pressing the <
> button. The magnification ratio varies depending on the
[Image quality] setting. With <
>, you can scroll around the magnified image.
To cancel the magnified view, press the <
> button again.
Caution
Results of processing with [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [High] are only applied
in magnified view. Results are not applied in normal display.
560
RAW Image Processing Options
: Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments.
: White balance ( )
You can select the white balance. Selecting [ ] enables you to select [Auto:
Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [
], you can set the color
temperature.
: Picture Style ( )
You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other
parameters.
* [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] are not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.
: Clarity ( )
You can adjust clarity in a range of
–4 to +4.
* Not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.
: Auto Lighting Optimizer ( ) + : Adj face lighting
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. With automatic, optimal adjustment of lighting
on faces, you can effectively correct images captured with oblique lighting or illuminated
by flash.
* Adjustment of face lighting is not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.
Caution
When adjustment of face lighting is set
Suitable adjustment may not be possible in some shooting situations unless faces
can be detected in detail and are not too dark.
Noise may increase.
Adjustment may be less effective at high ISO speeds.
: High ISO speed NR ( )
You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. If the effect is difficult
to discern, magnify the image ( ).
562
: Image quality ( )
You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG or HEIF image.
: Color space ( )
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is not compatible
with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be perceptible when either color
space is set.
* [
] is displayed when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set but is not an option for
selection.
: Lens aberr correction
• : Peripheral illum corr ( )
A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens
characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be
displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (
) and check the
four corners. Less correction is applied than for maximum correction with Digital
Photo Professional (EOS software, ). If the effects of correction are not apparent,
use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction.
• : Distortion correction ( )
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. The image periphery will be trimmed in the
corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the sharpness with the
Picture Style's sharpness parameter setting as necessary.
•
: Digital Lens Optimizer ( )
Correct lens aberration, diffraction, and low-pass filter-induced loss of resolution by
applying optical design values. To check the effect of setting this option to [High] or
[Standard], use magnified view (
). Without magnification, the effect when Digital
Lens Optimizer is set to [High] is not applied. Selecting [High] or [Standard]
corrects both chromatic aberration and diffraction, although these options are not
displayed.
• : Chromatic aberr corr ( )
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject's outline) due to the lens
characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be
displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image ( ).
563
• : Diffraction correction ( )
The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness can be
corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is
difficult to discern, magnify the image (
).
Caution
Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the same results
as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be intensified
with the effects of adjustment.
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction.
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, image edges may be emphasized, under
some shooting conditions. Adjust sharpness of the Picture Style as needed.
Processing with [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [High] may take some time.
Note
Effects of lens aberration correction vary by lens and by shooting conditions. Also,
the effect may be difficult to discern depending on the lens used, shooting
conditions, etc.
RAW movies cannot be processed. Process them with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
564
Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images
You can resize a JPEG or HEIF image to reduce the pixel count and save it as a new image.
Resizing is available for
, , or JPEGs or HEIFs (sizes except ), including those
captured in RAW+JPEG and RAW+HEIF shooting.
images and RAW images or movies
cannot be resized.
1.
Select [
: Resize].
2.
Select an image.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to resize.
565
3.
Select the desired image size.
Press < > to display the image sizes.
Select the desired image size (1).
4.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the resized image.
Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat steps 2 to 4.
566
Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images
You can crop a captured JPEG/HEIF image and save it as a new image. Cropping is
available for JPEG or HEIF images. RAW images and frame-grab images from 4K movies
cannot be cropped.
1.
Select [
: Cropping].
2.
Select an image.
Turn the < > dial to select the image to crop.
Press < > to display the cropping frame.
567
3.
Set the cropping frame.
The image area within the cropping frame will be cropped.
Resizing the cropping frame size
Turn the <
> dial to resize the cropping frame size. The smaller the
cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
Changing the cropping frame aspect ratio and orientation
Turn the <
> dial to change the cropping frame aspect ratio and
orientation.
Moving the cropping frame
Use <
> to move the cropping frame vertically or horizontally.
Correcting tilt
You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Press the <
> button. While
checking tilt relative to the grid, turn the
<
> dial (in 0.1° increments)
or tap the left or right arrow (in 0.5° increments) in the upper left of the
screen to correct tilt. After completing the tilt correction, press <
>.
4.
Check the image area to be cropped.
Press the < > button. The image area to crop is displayed.
568
5.
Save.
Press < > and select [OK] to save the cropped image.
Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].
To crop another image, repeat steps 2 to 5.
Caution
The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the angle
set for tilt correction.
Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
AF point display information ( ) and Dust Delete Data ( ) will not be appended
to the cropped images.
Available aspect ratios vary depending on whether you use [ : Cropping] or
[
: Add cropping information].
569
Converting HEIF to JPEG
You can convert HEIF images captured in HDR shooting and save them as JPEG images.
1.
Select [
: HEIF→JPEG conversion].
2.
Select an image.
Turn the < > dial to select an HEIF image to convert to JPEG.
Press < > to convert to JPEG.
570
3.
Save.
Select [OK] to save the JPEG image.
• Check the destination folder and image file number, then select
[OK].
• To convert another image, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Note
Some scenes may look different after conversion if the original and converted
images are compared.
Conversion is not available for cropped images, or for frame-grab images from 4K
movies.
571
Slide Show
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1.
Specify the images to be played back.
To play back all the images on the card, go to step 2.
If you want to specify the images to be played back in the slide show,
filter the images with [
: Set image search conditions] ( ).
2.
Select [
: Slide show].
572
3.
Set the playback as desired.
Select [Set up].
Set the [Display time] and [Repeat] (repeated playback) settings for
the still photos.
After completing the settings, press the < > button.
Display time
Repeat
573
4.
Start the slide show.
Select [Start].
After [Loading image...] is displayed, the slide show will start.
5.
Exit the slide show.
To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the
<
> button.
Note
To pause the slide show, press < >. During pause, [ ] will be displayed in the
upper left of the screen. Press <
> again to resume the slide show.
During the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the < > button to
switch the display format ( ).
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the < >
dial.
During auto playback or when playback is paused, you can turn the < > dial to
view another image.
During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
The display time may differ depending on the image.
574
Setting Image Search Conditions
Clearing the Search Conditions
You can filter image display according to your search conditions. After setting the image
search conditions, you can play back and display only the found images. You can also
protect, rate, play a slide show, erase, and apply other operations to filtered images.
1.
Select [
: Set image search conditions].
575
2.
Set the search conditions.
Turn the < > dial to select an option.
Turn the < > dial to set the option.
A checkmark [ ] (1) is appended to the left of the option. (Specified as
the search condition.)
If you select the option and press the < > button, the checkmark
[
] will be removed (which cancels the search condition).
Option Description
Rating
Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.
Date
Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
Folder
Displays images in the selected folder.
Protect
Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.
Type of file (1)
Displays images of the selected file type.
Type of file (2)
3.
Apply the search conditions.
Press < > and read the message displayed.
Select [OK].
The search condition is applied.
576
4.
Display the found images.
Press the < > button.
Only the images that match the set conditions (filtered) will be played
back.
When the images are filtered for display, the screen will have an outer
yellow frame (2).
Caution
If no images match the search conditions, < > cannot be pressed in step 3.
Note
Search conditions may be cleared after operations involving camera power or card
changes and editing, adding, or erasing images.
Auto power off time may be extended while the [ : Set image search
conditions] screen is displayed.
Clearing the Search Conditions
Access the screen in step 2, then press the < > button to clear all the search conditions.
577
Browsing Images with the Main Dial
In single-image display, you can turn the <
> dial to jump through the images forward or
backward according to the jump method set.
1.
Select [
: Image jump w/ ].
2.
Select the jump method.
Note
With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the
<
> dial to select the number of images to jump by.
When you select [Display by image rating], turn the < > dial
to specify the rating (
). Selecting will show all rated images
as you browse.
578
3.
Browse by jumping.
(1) Jump method
(2) Playback position
Press the < > button.
In single-image display, turn the < > dial.
You can browse by the jump method set.
579
Browsing Images with the Rate+Quick Control Dial 1
In single-image display, you can turn the <
> dial while holding down the < / >
button to jump through the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1.
Select [
: Image jump w/ + ].
2.
Select the jump method.
Note
You can configure this feature when [ : / button
function] is set to [
/ ] or [ / ] ( ).
With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the
<
> dial to select the number of images to jump by.
When you select [Display by image rating], turn the < > dial
to specify the rating (
). Selecting will show all rated images
as you browse.
580
3.
Browse by jumping.
(1) Jump method
(2) Playback position
Press the < > button.
In single-image display, turn the < > dial while holding down the
<
/ > button.
You can browse by the jump method set.
581
Switching the Main Dial and Quick Control Dial 2
You can switch the functions assigned to these dials, as used on the image playback
screen.
1.
Select [
: Switch / ].
2.
Select an option.
Disable
Image jump
Magnify/Index view
Enable
Magnify/Index view
Image jump
Note
Corresponding icons in menus and on screens such as the Quick Control and
Magnify/Reduce screen are changed accordingly.
582
Rate/Voice Memo Button Function
You can assign image rating/protection/erasure, voice memo recording/playback, or image
browsing in conjunction with the <
> dial to the < / > button.
1.
Select [
: / button function].
2.
Select an option.
/ : Rating / Hold to record voice memo
Assigns rating to the <
/ > button.
You can specify ratings available with the <
/ > button by
pressing the <
> button.
During image playback, you can rate images or clear ratings by
pressing the <
/ > button. You can also hold it down for 2 sec.
to start recording a voice memo.
583
: Record voice memo / Rating disabled
Assigns voice memo recording to the <
/ > button.
During image playback, you can start recording a voice memo by
pressing the <
/ > button.
/ : Play voice memo / Hold to record voice memo
Assigns voice memo playback to the
<
/ > button.
During image playback, you can play a voice memo by pressing the
<
/ > button. You can also hold it down for 2 sec. to start
recording a voice memo.
/ : Protect / Hold to record voice memo
Assigns protection to the <
/ > button.
During playback, you can protect images or clear protection by
pressing the <
/ > button. You can also hold it down for 2 sec.
to start recording a voice memo.
: Erase images
Assigns erasure to the <
/ > button.
During image playback, you can erase images by pressing the
<
/ > button.
/ : Rating / Browse images: Hold down+turn
Assigns rating to the < / > button.
You can specify ratings available with the <
/ > button by
pressing the <
> button.
During image playback, you can browse images by turning the <
>
dial while holding down the <
/ > button. The number of
images to jump is set in [
: Image jump w/ + ].
/ : Protect / Browse images: Hold down+turn
Assigns protection to the < / > button.
During image playback, you can browse images by turning the <
>
dial while holding down the <
/ > button. The number of
images to jump is set in [
: Image jump w/ + ].
584
Customizing Playback Information Display
Histogram
You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during image playback.
1.
Select [
: Playback information display].
2.
Add a checkmark [
] next to the number of screens to display.
Select numbers with the < > dial.
Press < > to clear a checkmark [ ]. Press it again to add a
checkmark [
].
Repeat these steps to add a checkmark [ ] to the number of each
screen to display, then select [OK].
Your selected information can be accessed by pressing the < >
button during playback, or by using <
> when shooting information is
displayed.
585
Histogram
The histograms show signal levels across the tonal range. Brightness display (for checking
the general exposure level and overall gradation) and RGB display (for checking saturation
and gradation of red, green, and blue) are available. You can switch the histogram displayed
by pressing the <
> button when [ ] is displayed in the lower left of the [ :
Playback information display] screen.
586
[Brightness] display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image's brightness level, with
the horizontal axis indicating the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the
right) and the vertical axis indicating the pixel count at each brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image, and the more pixels there are
toward the right, the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on the left, detail in
shadows will be lost, and if there are too many pixels on the right, detail in highlights will
be lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall
gradation.
Sample histograms
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
587
[RGB] display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color's brightness
level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue), with the horizontal axis indicating the
color's brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right) and the vertical axis
indicating the pixel count at each color brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color, and the more pixels there are
toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the
left, the corresponding color information will be lacking, and if there are too many pixels
on the right, the color will be too saturated, without gradation. By checking the image's
RGB histogram, you can see the color's saturation and gradation conditions, as well as
the white balance bias.
588
Displaying the Highlight Alert
You can specify blinking display of overexposed highlights on the playback screen. To
obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where you want the gradation to be
faithfully reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again
for a better result.
1.
Select [
: Highlight alert].
2.
Select [Enable].
589
AF Point Display
You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined in red on the
playback screen.
1.
Select [
: AF point disp.].
2.
Select [Enable].
590
Playback Grid
You can display a grid over still photos shown in single-image display on the playback
screen. This function is convenient for checking the image's vertical or horizontal tilt as well
as composition.
1.
Select [
: Playback grid].
2.
Select an option.
591
Movie Play Count
You can select how time is displayed on the movie playback screen.
1.
Select [
: Movie play count].
592
2.
Select an option.
Rec time
Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback.
Time code
Displays the time code during movie playback.
Note
Time codes are always recorded to movie files (except when High Frame Rate
movies are set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting.
The [Movie play count] setting in [ : Time code] is linked to the [ : Movie
play count], so that these settings always match.
The “frame” count is not displayed during movie recording or playback.
593
HDMI HDR Output
You can view RAW or HEIF images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR TV.
1.
Select [
: HDMI HDR output].
2.
Select [On].
Note
Make sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch inputs
on the TV, refer to the TV manual.
Depending on the TV used, images may not look as expected.
On HDR TVs, some information may not be displayed.
Quick Control RAW processing of displayed images is recommended if you will
process RAW images while viewing HDMI HDR output.
594
Communication Functions
This chapter describes how communication functions are used to connect the camera to a
smartphone or computer over Wi-Fi or a wired LAN and send images, control the camera
remotely, or perform other operations.
Caution
Important
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by erroneous
network settings when using the camera. In addition, Canon cannot be held liable
for any other loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
Take security measures that you deem necessary when using a network, at your
discretion. Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by
unauthorized access or other security breaches.
• Tab Menus: Communication Functions Tab
• Available Communication Functions
• Camera Connect Communication from Smartphones
• Wi-Fi Connections with a Computer Using EOS Utility
• Basic Communication Settings
• Image Transfer to FTP Servers
• Sending Images to a Web Service
• Remote Control (EOS Utility)
• Controlling the Camera with Browser Remote
• Ending Connections or Reconnecting
• Airplane Mode
• Checking and Editing Network Settings
• Syncing Time Between Cameras
• Setting Up GPS Features
• Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
• Reference
• Troubleshooting
• Resetting Communication Settings
595
Tab Menus: Communication Functions Tab
(1) Network settings
(2) Airplane mode
(3) Bluetooth settings
•
Smartphone
• Remote
(4) Nickname
(5) GPS settings
(6) Image transfer
(7) Reset communication settings
Caution
Wi-Fi connections are not possible while the camera is connected to a computer or
other device via an interface cable.
Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by connecting
them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to devices via Wi-Fi.
Network connections are terminated if you switch camera to < > or open the
card slot cover.
Auto power off is not activated while connected to a network.
596
Available Communication Functions
Smartphone ( )
Using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones or tablets (hereafter, collectively
referred to as “smartphones”), you can browse images on the camera, shoot remotely, and
perform other operations. After pairing the camera with a smartphone supporting Bluetooth
low energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”), you only need to use the smartphone to
connect via Wi-Fi.
EOS Utility
Using EOS Utility (EOS software installed on a computer), you can import images from the
camera, shoot remotely, and perform other operations.
See Wi-Fi Connections with a Computer Using EOS Utility for instructions on joining a
Wi-Fi network via an access point compatible with WPS (PBC mode) to connect the
camera to a computer.
See instructions starting with Basic Communication Settings for other ways to connect
the camera to a computer wirelessly or over a wired LAN connection.
FTP transfer (
)
Your shots can be transferred to an FTP server.
Besides automatically transferring images as you shoot, you can manually select and
transfer images later.
Browser Remote (
)
From a computer or smartphone browser, connecting to the camera is like accessing a
webpage, and you can shoot remotely, browse camera images, or configure FTP transfer
settings.
Syncing time between cameras (
)
The time on multiple EOS R3 cameras can be synchronized over a wired LAN connection.
GPS (
)
Built-in GPS features can be used to geotag images, log routes traveled with the camera,
and more.
597
Available communication functions and connection methods (besides GPS)
Available Features
Connection Method
Wired LAN
Wi-Fi
(Built-In)
Camera Connect communication from smartphones ○
Using EOS Utility ○ ○
Image transfer to FTP servers ○ ○
Using Browser Remote ○
Syncing time between cameras ○
598
Camera Connect Communication from Smartphones
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Camera Connect Functions
Canceling the Pairing
Wi-Fi Connection Without Using Bluetooth
Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones
General Precautions on Camera Connect Communication from Smartphones
By using the dedicated Camera Connect app installed on a smartphone or tablet
(collectively referred to hereafter as “smartphones”), you can connect the smartphone and
camera via Wi-Fi.
Features available over a Bluetooth connection
You can establish a Wi-Fi connection using only a smartphone.
You can shoot still photos or record movies by using your smartphone as a remote
control.
Features available over a Wi-Fi connection
You can use a smartphone to browse images on the camera and save them to the
smartphone.
You can control the camera remotely from a smartphone.
You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone.
The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on the
smartphone on which Android or iOS is installed. Camera Connect can be installed from
Google Play or App Store.
Caution
Use the latest version of the smartphone OS.
599
Note
You can also access Google Play or App Store from QR codes displayed when you
pair the smartphone and camera.
For the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the
download site of Camera Connect.
Sample screens and other details in this guide may not match the actual user
interface elements after camera firmware updates or updates to Camera Connect,
Android, or iOS.
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via
Wi-Fi
These instructions describe how to establish a Wi-Fi connection with a Bluetooth enabled
smartphone and use Camera Connect to control the camera.
Caution
Bluetooth pairing with a smartphone is not possible while the camera is connected
to other devices via Wi-Fi or connected to a wireless LAN. End the Wi-Fi or
wireless LAN connection by selecting [Connection settings] in [
: Network
settings], then selecting [Disconnect].
Steps on the smartphone (1)
Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that pairing with the
camera is not possible from the smartphone's Bluetooth settings screen.
Steps on the camera (1)
1.
On the camera, press the <
> button.
600
2.
Select [
: Network settings].
3.
In [Network], select [Enable].
4.
Press the <
> button and select [ : Bluetooth settings].
601
5.
In [Bluetooth], select [Smartphone].
6.
Select [Pairing].
7.
Select an option.
If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display].
If Camera Connect is not installed, select [Android] or [iOS], scan the
displayed QR code with the smartphone to access Google Play or App
Store and install Camera Connect.
602
Steps on the smartphone (2)
8.
Start Camera Connect.
9.
Tap the camera for pairing.
If you are using an Android smartphone, go to step 11.
10.
Tap [Pair] (iOS only).
603
Steps on the camera (2)
11.
Select [OK].
12.
Press the <
> button.
Pairing is now complete, and the camera is connected to the
smartphone via Bluetooth.
A Bluetooth icon appears on the main Camera Connect screen.
Caution
Bluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera's auto power
off is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use the camera.
The camera can be paired with one smartphone. Before pairing with a different
smartphone, clear the information about the currently paired smartphone ( ).
Keeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone will
prevent it from pairing with this camera. Before you try pairing again, remove
pairing records for previously paired cameras from your smartphone's Bluetooth
settings screen.
604
Steps on the smartphone (3)
13.
Tap a Camera Connect function.
In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera
connection.
After the devices are connected via Wi-Fi, a screen for the selected
function is displayed on the smartphone.
The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are now displayed on the main Camera
Connect screen, after you return to that screen.
The camera's < > lamp is lit in green.
Terminating Wi-Fi connections
Disconnect by tapping [ ] on the Camera Connect screen.
Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth connection.
Reconnecting
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, start Camera Connect and tap the function you will use.
606
Camera Connect Functions
Images on camera
Images can be browsed, deleted, or rated.
Images can be saved on a smartphone.
Remote live view shooting
Enables remote shooting as you view a live image on the smartphone.
Auto transfer
Enables camera and app setting adjustment for automatic transfer of your shots ( ).
Bluetooth remote controller
Enables remote control of the camera from a smartphone paired via Bluetooth. (Not
available when connected via Wi-Fi.)
Auto power off is disabled while you are using the Bluetooth remote controller feature.
Location information
Not supported on this camera. For details on geotagging images, see Setting Up GPS
Features.
Camera settings
Camera settings can be changed.
607
Canceling the Pairing
Cancel pairing with a smartphone as follows.
1.
Select [Check/clear connection info].
2.
Press the <
> button.
3.
Select [OK].
4.
Clear the camera information on the smartphone.
In the smartphone's Bluetooth setting menu, clear the camera
information registered on the smartphone.
608
Note
To check the camera's Bluetooth address, select [Bluetooth address].
609
Wi-Fi Connection Without Using Bluetooth
These instructions describe how to establish a direct Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone
and use Camera Connect to control the camera.
Steps on the camera (1)
1.
On the camera, press the <
> button.
2.
Select [
: Network settings].
3.
In [Network], select [Enable].
4.
Select [Connection settings].
610
5.
Select [SET* Unspecified].
6.
Select [Create with wizard].
7.
Select [Configure online].
Select [OK].
611
8.
Select [Smartphone].
Select [OK].
9.
Press the <
> button.
Select [OK].
10.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK].
612
11.
Select [Camera access point mode].
12.
Select [Easy connection].
Select [OK].
13.
Select [OK].
613
14.
Press the <
> button.
15.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK].
16.
Check the SSID (network name) and password.
Check the SSID (1) and password (2) displayed on the camera screen.
614
Steps on the smartphone
17.
Operate the smartphone to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
Activate the smartphone's Wi-Fi function, then tap the SSID (network
name) you checked in step 16.
In the password field, enter the password you checked in step 16, then
tap [Join].
18.
Start Camera Connect and tap the camera to connect to via Wi-Fi.
615
21.
Press <
>.
The main window of Camera Connect will be displayed on the
smartphone.
The camera's < > lamp is lit in green.
The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is now complete.
Operate the camera using Camera Connect ( ).
When connected via Wi-Fi, you can send images to a smartphone from
the Quick Control screen during playback ( ).
Terminating Wi-Fi connections (
)
Reconnecting (
)
617
Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot
Your shots can be automatically sent to a smartphone. Before following these steps, make
sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Connection option settings].
3.
Select [Smartphone settings].
618
4.
Select [Send to smartphone after shot].
5.
Set [Auto send] to [Enable].
If necessary, specify [Size to send].
619
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via Bluetooth (Android
devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi.
If you will send many images, consider using a household power outlet accessory (sold
separately).
1.
Switch to playback.
2.
Press the <
> button.
3.
Select [Send images to smartphone].
If you perform this step while connected via Bluetooth, a message is
displayed, and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi connection.
620
4.
Select sending options and send the images.
Sending images individually
1.
Select an image to send.
Turn the < > dial to select images to send, then press < >.
You can press the < > button and turn the < > dial
counterclockwise to select the image using the index display.
2.
Select [Send img shown].
In [Size to send], you can select the image sending size.
621
Sending multiple selected images
1.
Press <
>.
2.
Select [Send selected].
622
3.
Select images to send.
Turn the < > dial to select images to send, then press < >.
To switch to three-image display for image selection, press the < >
button and turn the <
> dial counterclockwise. To return to the
single-image display, press the <
> button.
After selecting the images to send, press the < > button.
623
4.
Select [Size to send].
On the displayed screen, select an image size.
5.
Select [Send].
624
Sending a specified range of images
1.
Press <
>.
2.
Select [Send range].
3.
Specify the range of images.
Select the first image (start point).
Select the last image (end point).
To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
To change the number of images in index display, press the < >
button, then turn the <
> dial.
625
4.
Confirm the range.
Press the < > button.
5.
Select [Size to send].
On the displayed screen, select an image size.
6.
Select [Send].
626
Sending all images on the card
1.
Press <
>.
2.
Select [Send all card].
3.
Select [Size to send].
On the displayed screen, select an image size.
627
Note
You can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer.
You can select up to 999 files at a time.
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone's power saving
function is recommended.
Selecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that time.
Note that
size still photos are not reduced.
Selecting compression for movies applies to all movies sent at that time. Note that
and movies are not reduced.
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
630
Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones
Images can be specified after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Manual setting].
3.
Select [Function settings].
631
4.
Select [Smartphone].
5.
Select [Change].
6.
Select [Viewable imgs].
632
7.
Select an option.
Select [OK] to access the setting screen.
[All images]
All images stored on the card become viewable.
[Images from past days]
Specify viewable images on the shooting-date basis. Images shot up to
nine days ago can be specified.
When [Images shot in past days] is selected, images shot up to the
specified number of days before the current date become viewable.
Use the [
] [ ] keys to specify the number of days, then press < >
to confirm the selection.
Once you select [OK], the viewable images are set.
Caution
If [Viewable imgs] is set to any setting other than [All images],
remote shooting is not possible.
633
[Select by rating]
Specify viewable images depending on whether a rating is appended (or
not appended) or by the type of rating.
Once you select the type of rating, the viewable images are set.
[File number range] (Select range)
Select the first and last images from images arranged by the file number to
specify the viewable images.
1. Press <
> to display the image selection screen.
Use the <
> dial to select images.
You can press the <
> button and turn the < > dial
counterclockwise to select the image using the index display.
2. Select an image as the starting point (1).
3. Use the <
> dial to select an image as the ending point (2).
4. Select [OK].
634
General Precautions on Camera Connect Communication
from Smartphones
Caution
If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote shooting,
the following will occur.
• If the still photo shooting/movie recording switch is set to <
>, movie
recording will continue.
• If the still photo shooting/movie recording switch is set to <
>, movie
recording will stop.
With a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions are
unavailable.
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release timing
may be delayed.
When saving images to a smartphone, you cannot take a picture even if you press
the camera's shutter button. Also, the camera screen may turn off.
Note
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone's power saving
function is recommended.
635
Wi-Fi Connections with a Computer Using EOS Utility
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Using EOS Utility, you can browse images on the camera and save them to the computer.
Also in EOS Utility, you can shoot by controlling the camera remotely and change camera
settings.
Install EOS Utility on the computer before connecting via Wi-Fi ( ).
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to prepare for camera operations in EOS Utility by connecting
the camera and a computer via Wi-Fi using a WPS (PBC mode) compatible access point.
First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it.
It may take approx. 1 min. to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.
See the instructions starting in Basic Communication Settings for details on connecting
the camera to a wired LAN or using non-WPS (PBC mode) access points.
Steps on the camera (1)
1.
On the camera, press the <
> button.
2.
Select [
: Network settings].
636
3.
In [Network], select [Enable].
4.
Select [Connection settings].
5.
Select [SET* Unspecified].
637
6.
Select [Create with wizard].
7.
Select [Configure online].
Select [OK].
8.
Select [EOS Utility].
Select [OK].
638
9.
Select [Wi-Fi].
Select [OK].
10.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK].
11.
Select [Connect with WPS].
639
12.
Select [WPS (PBC mode)].
Select [OK].
Steps on the access point
13.
Connect to the access point via Wi-Fi.
Press the access point's WPS button.
Steps on the camera (2)
14.
Select [OK].
640
15.
Select [Auto setting].
Select [OK].
16.
Select [Disable].
Select [OK].
17.
Press <
>.
641
Basic Communication Settings
Preparation
Displaying the Connection Wizard
Checking the Type of Access Point
Connecting via WPS (PBC Mode)
Connecting via WPS (PIN Mode)
Connecting Manually to Detected Networks
Connecting Manually by Specifying Networks
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
Connecting in Camera Access Point Mode
Setting the IP Address
Configuring Communication Function Settings
Before using the following camera communication functions, configure camera and
computer settings as described starting in Preparation.
Image transfer to FTP servers
Remote control (EOS Utility)
Controlling the camera with Browser Remote
Caution
Regarding settings for multiple networks, only infrastructure settings are available
when you connect wirelessly. Multiple network settings are not available for wired
LAN or camera access point settings.
643
Preparation
Preparing to use communication functions
EOS Utility
A computer with EOS Utility (EOS software) installed is required.
For EOS Utility installation instructions, visit the Canon website.
FTP transfer
A computer running one of the following OSes is required. The computer must also be
set up in advance to function as an FTP server.
• Windows 10 (ver. 1607 or later)
• Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1 Pro
For instructions on setting up the computer to function as an FTP server, refer to
documentation for your computer.
Browser Remote
Use of [Browser Remote] requires a computer with one of the following browsers
installed.
• iOS 13 or later / Safari 13 or later
• iPadOS 13 or later / Safari 13 or later
• Android 8, 9, 10 or later / Chrome
• Windows 10 / Chrome, Edge (Chromium-based version)
• macOS / Safari 13 or later
* Operation in these browsers is not ensured on all computers.
* Cannot be used unless cookies are enabled in the browser.
* Cannot be used unless JavaScript is enabled in the browser.
* Movie playback is not available unless the browser supports HTML5.
Sync time between cameras
See
Syncing Time Between Cameras.
GPS
See
Setting Up GPS Features.
644
Preparing to connect via Wi-Fi
Connect the computer for the Wi-Fi connection to the access point in advance.
Caution
Transferring movies
Each movie file is large, and transferring large files over Wi-Fi may take some time.
Referring to Communication Function Precautions, arrange your network
environment for stable communication between devices and the access point.
Preparing to connect via wired LAN
Before using the following features over a wired LAN connection, connect a LAN cable to
the camera's Ethernet RJ-45 terminal and the Ethernet terminal of the computer or access
point.
• Image transfer to FTP servers
• Using EOS Utility
• Using Browser Remote
Use a highly shielded Category 5e or higher STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Gigabit Ethernet
cable.
645
Displaying the Connection Wizard
This section describes the process of following the connection wizard instructions to add
connection settings. If an error is displayed, see
Troubleshooting and check the settings.
Be careful not to press the shutter button or other controls (which will close the
connection wizard) until configuration is complete.
[ : Network settings] is only available when [ : Multiple exposure] is set to
[Disable].
1.
On the camera, press the <
> button.
2.
Select [
: Network settings].
3.
In [Network], select [Enable].
646
4.
Select [Connection settings].
5.
Select [SET*].
6.
Select [Create with wizard].
Selecting [Create from list] when multiple communication and function
settings are registered on the camera enables you to combine
registered settings to add new connection settings.
You can also add new connection settings by using connection settings
saved to a card. Configure settings this way by selecting [Load
settings from card] ( ).
647
7.
Select a setting method.
Select an option and then [OK] to go to the next screen.
Select [Configure online] to configure connection settings and then
join the network.
Select [Configure offline] if you only wish to configure [FTP trans.]
and [Browser Remote] connection settings.
8.
Select a communication function.
[Configure online] options
[Configure offline] options
Referring to Preparation, select a communication function.
Select an option and then [OK] to go to the next screen.
648
9.
Select an option.
The options displayed vary depending on the [Select communication
function] setting.
Select [OK].
10.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK].
By selecting [Select from list] when communication settings are
already registered on the camera, you can apply the registered
settings.
649
[Configure online] options
If you selected [Wired] in step 9, configure the setting as follows.
Select an option, then select [OK].
For details on IP address settings, see Setting the IP Address.
Select an option, then select [OK].
For details on IPv6 address settings, see Setting the IP Address.
If you selected [Wi-Fi] in step 9, configure the setting as follows.
• For details on connections with other devices via an access point, see
Checking the Type of Access Point.
• For details on direct connections with other devices, see Connecting in
Camera Access Point Mode.
650
[Configure offline] options
If you selected [Wired] in step 9, configure the setting as follows.
Select an option, then select [OK].
For details on IP address settings, see Setting the IP Address.
Select an option, then select [OK].
For details on IPv6 address settings, see Setting the IP Address.
If you selected [Wi-Fi] in step 9, configure the setting as follows.
• For details on Wi-Fi connections with other devices via an access point,
see Connecting in Infrastructure Mode.
• For details on direct Wi-Fi connections with other devices, see
Connecting in Camera Access Point Mode.
651
Checking the Type of Access Point
When connecting via an access point, check whether the access point supports WPS*,
which simplifies connections between Wi-Fi devices.
If you are unsure about WPS compatibility, refer to the access point user manual or other
documentation.
* Stands for Wi-Fi Protected Setup.
When WPS is supported
Two connection methods are available, as follows. You can connect more easily via
WPS in PBC mode.
• Connecting via WPS (PBC Mode) (
)
• Connecting via WPS (PIN Mode) ( )
When WPS is not supported
• Connecting manually to detected networks (
)
• Connecting manually by specifying networks ( )
Access point encryption
The camera supports the following options for [Authentication] and [Encryption settings].
For this reason, the encryption used by the access point must be set to one of the following
when you will connect to detected networks manually.
[Authentication]: Open system, shared key, WPA/WPA2/WPA3-Personal, or WPA/
WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
[Encryption settings]: WEP, TKIP, or AES
Caution
Connections may not be possible when access point stealth functions are
enabled. Deactivate stealth functions.
Ask any network administrator in charge of networks you will join for setting details.
Note
If MAC address filtering is used on networks you will join, add the camera's MAC
address to the access point. The MAC address can be checked on the [MAC
address] screen ( ).
652
Connecting via WPS (PBC Mode)
Instructions in this section are continued from
Checking the Type of Access Point.
This is a connection method used with access points compatible with WPS. In pushbutton
connection mode (PBC mode), the camera and access point can be connected simply by
pressing the WPS button on the access point.
Connecting may be more difficult if multiple access points are active nearby. If so, try to
connect with [WPS (PIN mode)].
Check the position of the WPS button on the access point in advance.
It may take approx. 1 min. to establish a connection.
1.
Select [Connect with WPS].
2.
Select [WPS (PBC mode)].
Select [OK].
653
3.
Connect to the access point.
Press the access point's WPS button. For details on where the button
is and how long to press it, refer to the access point user manual.
Select [OK] to initiate connection with the access point.
The following screen is displayed once the camera is connected to the
access point.
Go to Setting the IP Address.
654
Connecting via WPS (PIN Mode)
Instructions in this section are continued from
Checking the Type of Access Point.
This is a connection method used with access points compatible with WPS. In PIN code
connection mode (PIN mode), an 8-digit identification number indicated on the camera is
entered on the access point to establish a connection.
Even if multiple access points are active nearby, connecting by using this shared
identification number is relatively reliable.
It may take approx. 1 min. to establish a connection.
1.
Select [Connect with WPS].
2.
Select [WPS (PIN mode)].
Select [OK].
655
3.
Enter the PIN code.
On the access point, enter the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the
camera screen.
For instructions on entering PIN codes on the access point, refer to the
access point's Instruction Manual.
After entering the PIN code, select [OK] on the camera.
4.
Connect to the access point.
Select [OK] to initiate connection with the access point.
The following screen is displayed once the camera is connected to the
access point.
Go to Setting the IP Address.
656
Connecting Manually to Detected Networks
Instructions in this section are continued from
Checking the Type of Access Point.
Connect to an access point by selecting its SSID (or ESS-ID) in a list of active access points
nearby.
Selecting the access point
1.
Select an access point.
(1) SSID
(2) Security icon (only for encrypted access points)
(3) Channel used
Turn the < > dial to select the access point to connect to in the list of
access points.
Note
[Refresh]
To display [Refresh], scroll down the screen in step 1.
Select [Refresh] to search for access points again.
657
Entering the access point encryption key
Enter the encryption key (password) set on the access point. For details on the
encryption key that has been set, refer to the access point's user manual.
The screens displayed in steps 2–3 vary depending on the authentication and
encryption set on the access point.
Go to Setting the IP Address if the [IP address set.] screen is displayed instead of the
screens shown for steps 2–3.
2.
Select a key index.
The [Key index] screen is displayed for WEP-encrypted access points.
Select the key index number set on the access point.
Select [OK].
658
Connecting Manually by Specifying Networks
Instructions in this section are continued from
Checking the Type of Access Point.
Connect to an access point by entering its SSID (or ESS-ID).
Entering the SSID
1.
Select [Manual settings].
2.
Enter the SSID (network name).
Press < > to access the virtual keyboard ( ), then enter the
encryption key.
Select [OK].
660
Setting the access point authentication method
3.
Select the authentication method.
Select an option and then [OK] to go to the next screen.
On the [Encryption settings] screen displayed if [Open system] is
selected, select [Disable] or [WEP].
Entering the access point encryption key
Enter the encryption key (password) set on the access point. For details on the
password that has been set, refer to the access point's user manual.
The screens displayed in steps 4–5 vary depending on the authentication and
encryption set on the access point.
Go to Setting the IP Address if the [IP address set.] screen is displayed instead of the
screens shown for steps 4–5.
4.
Select a key index.
The [Key index] screen is displayed if you have selected [Shared Key]
or [WEP] in step 3.
Select the key index number set on the access point.
Select [OK].
661
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
Instructions in this section are continued from
Displaying the Connection Wizard.
Connect to an access point by entering its SSID (or ESS-ID).
Entering the SSID
1.
Select [Infrastructure].
Select [OK].
2.
Enter the SSID (network name).
Press < > to access the virtual keyboard ( ), then enter the
encryption key.
Select [OK].
663
Setting the access point authentication method
3.
Select the authentication method.
Select an option and then [OK] to go to the next screen.
On the [Encryption settings] screen displayed if [Open system] is
selected, select [Disable] or [WEP].
Entering the access point encryption key
Enter the encryption key (password) set on the access point. For details on the
password that has been set, refer to the access point's user manual.
The screens displayed in steps 4–5 vary depending on the authentication and
encryption set on the access point.
Go to Setting the IP Address if the [IP address set.] screen is displayed instead of the
screens shown for steps 4–5.
4.
Select a key index.
The [Key index] screen is displayed if you have selected [Shared Key]
or [WEP] in step 3.
Select the key index number set on the access point.
Select [OK].
664
Connecting in Camera Access Point Mode
Instructions in this section are continued from
Displaying the Connection Wizard.
Camera access point mode is a connection method for directly connecting the camera and
other devices via Wi-Fi without using an access point. Two connection methods are
available, as follows.
Connecting with Easy connection
Network settings for camera access point mode are configured automatically.
Establishing a connection also requires operations on the other device (computer or
smartphone). For details, refer to the device user manual.
1.
Select [Camera access point mode].
[Configure online] options
[Configure offline] options
Select [OK] on the [Conn. method] to go to the next screen.
666
2.
Select [Easy connection].
Select [OK].
3.
Select [OK].
The next screen is displayed.
4.
Select [OK].
The next screen is displayed.
667
5.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK].
For [Configure online], go to step 6.
For [Configure offline], go to step 2 in Configuring Communication
Function Settings.
By selecting [Select from list] when communication function settings
are already registered on the camera, you can apply the registered
settings.
6.
Use the other device to connect to the camera.
(1) SSID (network name)
(2) Encryption key (password)
668
Computer's screen (sample)
Smartphone's screen (sample)
Activate Wi-Fi on the other device, then select the SSID (network
name) shown on the camera screen.
For the password, enter the encryption key (password) shown on the
camera screen.
Once a connection is established, the settings screen for the
communication function is displayed.
Go to step 2 in Configuring Communication Function Settings.
Note
When you are connecting by selecting [Easy connection], the SSID ends with
“_Canon0A.”
669
Connecting with Manual connection
Network settings for camera access point mode are configured manually. Set [SSID],
[Channel setting], and [Encryption settings] on each screen displayed.
1.
Select [Manual connection].
Select [OK].
2.
Enter the SSID (network name).
Press < > to access the virtual keyboard ( ), then enter the SSID.
After input, press <
>.
Select [OK].
670
3.
Select a channel setting option.
To specify the settings manually, select [Manual setting], then turn the
<
> dial.
Select [OK].
4.
Select an encryption setting option.
For encryption, select [AES].
Select [OK].
When [AES] is selected, the [Password] screen is displayed. Press
<
> to access the virtual keyboard ( ), then enter the encryption
key. After input, press the <
> button.
671
8.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK].
For [Configure online], go to step 9.
For [Configure offline], go to step 2 in Configuring Communication
Function Settings.
By selecting [Select from list] when communication function settings
are already registered on the camera, you can apply the registered
settings.
9.
Use the other device to connect to the camera.
(1) SSID (network name)
(2) Encryption key (password)
673
Computer's screen (sample)
Smartphone's screen (sample)
Activate Wi-Fi on the other device, then select the SSID (network
name) shown on the camera screen.
For the password, enter the encryption key (password) shown on the
camera screen.
Once a connection is established, the settings screen for the
communication function is displayed.
Go to step 2 in Configuring Communication Function Settings.
674
Setting the IP Address
Select a method of setting the IP address, and then set the IP address on the camera. When
IPv6 is used, the camera only connects via IPv6. IPv4 connections are disabled.
Setting the IP address automatically
Set up the IP address settings automatically.
1.
Select [Auto setting].
Select [OK].
If an error is displayed for [Auto setting], set the IP address manually
( ).
2.
Select an IPv6 option.
Select an option and then [OK] to go to the next screen.
When selecting [Enable], configure IPv6 settings after all settings are
complete ( ).
The next screen is displayed after settings are complete.
675
2.
Select an option to configure.
Select an option to access the screen for numerical input.
To use a gateway or DNS address, select [Enable], then select
[Address].
3.
Enter the number.
Turn the < > dial to switch to other input fields at the top of the
screen, and turn the <
> dial to select numbers to enter. Press
<
> to enter the selected number.
To set the entered numbers and return to the screen for step 2, press
the <
> button.
677
4.
Select [OK].
When you have completed setting the necessary items, select [OK].
The next screen is displayed.
If you are unsure what to enter, see Checking Network Settings or ask
the network administrator or other person in charge of the network.
5.
Select an IPv6 option.
Select an option and then [OK] to go to the next screen.
When selecting [Enable], configure IPv6 settings after all settings are
complete ( ).
The next screen is displayed after settings are complete.
678
Configuring Communication Function Settings
The following instructions are for settings that vary depending on the communication
function. Refer to the page that introduces your selected communication function.
1.
Select [New settings].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
By selecting [Select from list] when communication function settings
are already registered on the camera, you can apply the registered
settings.
680
Image Transfer to FTP Servers
Configuring FTP Server Connection Settings
Transferring Images Individually
Transferring Multiple Images at Once
Adding a Caption Before Transfer
Auto Retry If Transfer Fails
Viewing Transferred Images
By connecting to an FTP server, you can send images on the camera to a computer.
With FTP transfer, you can automatically transfer each image to the FTP server as you
shoot or transfer a set of images together.
Configuring FTP Server Connection Settings
These instructions are continued from
Configuring Communication Function Settings.
1.
Select an FTP mode.
[SFTP] is not displayed when the camera will connect via Wi-Fi.
For secure FTP transfer using a root certificate, select [FTPS]. For
details on root certificate settings, see
Importing a root certificate for
FTPS.
For secure FTP transfer over an SSH connection, select [SFTP]. Login
settings are configured in step 5.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
682
2.
Select [Address setting].
The virtual keyboard is displayed if you have specified [Auto setting]
for the IP address or [Manual setting] for the DNS address.
A screen for numerical input is displayed if you have specified
[Disable] for the DNS address.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
3.
Enter the FTP server IP address.
Virtual keyboard
Use the virtual keyboard ( ) to enter the IP address. If DNS is used,
enter the domain name.
To set the entered values and return to the screen for step 2, press the
<
> button.
Numerical input screen
Turn the < > dial to switch to other input fields at the top of the
screen, and turn the <
> dial to select numbers to enter. Press
<
> to enter the selected number.
To set the entered values and return to the screen for step 2, press the
<
> button.
683
4.
Configure the port number.
Normally, set [Port number setting] to 00021 (for FTP/FTPS) or
00022 (for SFTP).
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
Go to step 6 if you selected [FTP] or [FTPS] in step 1. Go to step 5 if
you selected [SFTP].
5.
Configure the SSH login authentication settings.
Select [User name] and [Password] to access the virtual keyboard
( ) and enter the user name and password for SSH password
authentication.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
6.
Configure the passive mode setting.
Not displayed if you selected [SFTP] in step 1.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
If an Error 41 (Cannot connect to FTP server) is displayed in step 9,
setting [Passive mode] to [Enable] may resolve it.
684
7.
Configure proxy server settings.
Not displayed if you selected [FTPS] or [SFTP] in step 1.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
8.
Configure the login method.
Not displayed if you selected [SFTP] in step 1.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
685
9.
Specify a target folder.
Select [Root folder] to have images saved in the root folder, as
specified in FTP server settings ( ).
Select [Select folder] to specify a target folder in the root folder. If the
folder does not exist, it is created automatically.
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
The camera's < > lamp is lit in green.
When the following message appears, select [OK] to trust the target
server.
10.
Select [OK].
Not displayed in offline configuration.
686
11.
Select [OK].
12.
Select [OK].
Display returns to the [Network settings] screen.
Connection settings for FTP transfer are now complete.
During image transfer, the camera's <
> lamp blinks in green.
687
Importing a root certificate for FTPS
If you specified [FTPS] FTP mode when configuring connection settings, the root certificate
used by the FTP server must be imported to the camera.
Only the root certificate with a file name of “ROOT.CER,” “ROOT.CRT,” or “ROOT.PEM”
can be imported to the camera.
Only one root certificate file can be imported to the camera. Insert a card containing the
root certificate file in advance.
The priority card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] in [ : Record func+card/
folder sel.] is used to import a certificate.
It may not be possible to trust servers you try to connect to in FTPS connections with a
self-signed certificate.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Connection option settings].
3.
Select [FTP transfer settings].
688
4.
Select [Set root certif].
5.
Select [Load root certif from card].
6.
Select [OK].
The root certificate is imported.
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen to return to the [Set root certif]
screen.
Note
To delete the root certificate imported to the camera, select [Delete root
certificate] on the screen in step 5. To check who it was issued to and issued by,
the period of validity, and other information, select [View root certificate details].
689
Transferring Images Individually
Automatic transfer after each shot
Transferring the current image
Specifying sizes or types of images to transfer
Automatic transfer after each shot
Each image can be immediately transferred to the FTP server automatically after your shot.
You can continue shooting still photos as usual while images are being transferred.
Before shooting, make sure a card is in the camera. If you shoot without recording
images, they cannot be transferred.
Automatic transfer of movies during recording is not supported. After recording, transfer
movies as described in Transferring Multiple Images at Once or Adding a Caption
Before Transfer.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Connection option settings].
690
3.
Select [FTP transfer settings].
4.
Select [Automatic transfer].
5.
Select [Enable].
6.
Take the picture.
The captured image is transferred to the FTP server.
Caution
Images cannot be erased during image transfer.
No voice memo can be added when [Automatic transfer] is set to [Enable].
691
Note
During continuous shooting, images are transferred to the FTP server in the order
they are captured.
Captured images are also stored on the card.
Any images for which transfer fails or is interrupted will be transferred automatically
when the connection is recovered ( ). These images can also be transferred
together manually at a later time ( ).
Repeated automatic transfer is not attempted if network settings (such as FTP
server settings) are changed before automatic FTP transfer begins.
Transferring the current image
Enables you to transfer the image you are viewing simply by pressing <
>. You can
continue shooting still photos as usual while images are being transferred.
1.
Access the [FTP transfer settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Automatic transfer after each shot.
2.
Select [Transfer with SET].
3.
Select [Enable].
692
4.
Select an image.
On the camera, press the < > button.
Select an image to transfer, then press < > to transfer the image.
You can add a voice memo to the current image before transfer. For
details, see Recording Voice Memos.
Movies cannot be transferred this way. Selecting a movie and pressing
<
> will display the movie playback panel.
Specifying sizes or types of images to transfer
You can specify which images to transfer when recording images of different sizes to both
cards, or when shooting RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images.
1.
Access the [FTP transfer settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Automatic transfer after each shot.
2.
Select [Images to transfer].
693
3.
Select the size of images to transfer.
Select [Separate JPEGs] or [Separate HEIFs], then choose the image
size.
To transfer smaller JPEG/HEIF images when the camera is set to
record larger JPEG/HEIF images to one card and smaller ones to the
other, set [Separate JPEGs] to [SmallerJPEG] or [Separate HEIFs] to
[SmallerHEIF].
694
4.
Select the type of images to transfer.
Shooting RAW+JPEG
• Select [Shooting RAW+JPEG], then select [JPEG only], [RAW
only], or [RAW+JPEG].
Shooting RAW+HEIF
• Select [Shooting RAW+HEIF], then select [HEIF only], [RAW
only], or [RAW+HEIF].
695
Note
When the camera is set to record RAW images to one card and JPEGs or HEIFs to
the other, specify which images to transfer in the [Shooting RAW+JPEG] or
[Shooting RAW+HEIF] setting. Similarly, specify your transfer preference when
RAW+JPEG images or RAW+HEIF images are simultaneously recorded to a single
card.
Captured images are also stored on the card.
When images of the same size are recorded to both cards simultaneously, images
recorded to the card selected for [
Record/play] or [ Play] in [ : Record
func+card/folder sel.] are given priority for transfer.
696
Transferring Multiple Images at Once
Selecting images to transfer
Selecting multiple images
Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images
After shooting, you can select multiple images and transfer them all at once, or you can
transfer unsent images or images that could not be sent previously.
You can continue shooting still photos as usual during transfer.
Caution
Image transfer in progress is paused while the still photo shooting/movie recording
switch is set to <
>. To resume image transfer, set it to < >.
If you will transfer many images, consider using a household power outlet
accessory (sold separately).
Selecting images to transfer
1.
Select [
: Image transfer].
2.
Select [Image sel./transfer].
697
3.
Select [FTP transfer].
4.
Select [Sel.Image].
5.
Select the images to transfer.
Use the < > dial to select an image to transfer, then press < >.
Use the < > dial to add a checkmark [ ] in the upper left of the
screen, then press <
>.
For three-image display, press the < > button and turn the < >
dial to the left. To return to single-image display, turn the
<
> dial
clockwise.
To select other images to transfer, repeat step 5.
After image selection, press the < > button.
698
6.
Select [Transfer].
7.
Select [OK].
The selected images are transferred to the FTP server.
699
Selecting multiple images
Multiple images can be transferred at once after you choose a selection method. You can
continue shooting still photos as usual while images are being transferred.
1.
Access the [Image sel./transfer] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Selecting images to transfer.
2.
Select a selection method.
700
In a folder
Select [Sel. ].
Select your preferred selection method.
• Selecting [Select transfer failed images] selects all images in the selected folder
for which transfer failed.
• Selecting [Select images not transferred] selects all unsent images in the selected
folder.
• Selecting [Sel transfer fail img (
only)] selects all protected images in the
selected folder for which transfer failed.
• Selecting [Sel img not transfer. (
only)] selects all unsent protected images in
the selected folder.
• Selecting [Clear transfer history] clears the transfer history of images in the
selected folder.
• After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Select images not transferred]
and transfer all images in the folder again.
• After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Sel img not transfer. (
only)]
and transfer all protected images in the folder again.
Select a folder.
701
Select [OK] to register the selected images to [Images to transfer].
702
In a card
Select [All images].
Select your preferred selection method.
• Selecting [Select transfer failed images] selects all images on the card for which
transfer failed.
• Selecting [Select images not transferred] selects all unsent images on the card.
• Selecting [Sel transfer fail img (
only)] selects all protected images on the card
for which transfer failed.
• Selecting [Sel img not transfer. (
only)] selects all unsent protected images on
the card.
• Selecting [Clear transfer history] clears the transfer history of images on the card.
• After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Select images not transferred]
and transfer all images recorded on the card again.
• After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Sel img not transfer. (
only)]
and transfer all protected images recorded on the card again.
Select [OK] to register the selected images to [Images to transfer].
703
Select range
Select [Range].
Selecting the first and last images of the range marks all the images in the range with a
checkmark [
], and one copy of each image will be sent.
After image selection, press the < > button.
704
Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images
For RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images, you can specify which image to transfer.
1.
Select [
: Image transfer].
2.
Select the type of images to transfer.
705
RAW+JPEG transfer
• Select [RAW+JPEG transfer], then select [JPEG only], [RAW
only], or [RAW+JPEG].
RAW+HEIF transfer
• Select [RAW+HEIF transfer], then select [HEIF only], [RAW only],
or [RAW+HEIF].
Caution
Some menu items are not available during image transfer.
Note
This setting is linked to [RAW+JPEG transfer] and [RAW+HEIF transfer] settings
on the [Images to transfer] screen ( ).
706
Adding a Caption Before Transfer
You can add a registered caption to each image before transfer. This is convenient if you
want to inform the recipient of the printing quantity, for example. Captions are also added to
images saved to the camera.
You can check captions added to images by examining the Exif information, in the user
comments.
Captions can be created and registered with EOS Utility ( ) or Browser Remote ( ).
1.
Select [
: Image transfer].
2.
Select [Transfer with caption].
The last image viewed is displayed.
707
3.
Specify the caption.
Select [Caption], and on the screen displayed, select the content of the
caption.
4.
Select [Transfer].
The image is transferred with the caption. After transfer, display returns
to the [Image transfer] screen.
Caution
Other images cannot be selected from the [Transfer with caption] screen. To
select another image for transfer with a caption, view that image before following
these steps.
708
Auto Retry If Transfer Fails
If transfer fails, the camera's <
> lamp blinks in red. In this case, the following screen
is displayed after you press the <
> button and select [ : Network settings].
To resolve the error displayed, see Troubleshooting.
Once you have resolved the issue, the images that could not be sent initially will be
transferred automatically. With this option activated, transfer is attempted again
automatically after failure, whether automatic transfer is used or captured images are
transferred manually via FTP. Note that if you cancel transfer or turn the camera off, auto
retry is not attempted.
See Transferring Multiple Images at Once and transfer images as needed.
Note
To automatically log off and disconnect from the LAN after transfer, you can
configure power-saving on the [FTP transfer settings] screen ( ).
If you prefer not to disconnect from the LAN, set [Power saving] on the [FTP
transfer settings] screen ( ) to [Disable].
709
Viewing Transferred Images
Images transferred to the FTP server are stored in the following folder as specified in the
FTP server settings.
Target folder of the FTP server
Under the default settings of the FTP server, images are stored in [C drive] → [Inetpub]
folder → [ftproot] folder, or in a subfolder of this folder.
If the root folder of the transfer destination has been changed in the FTP server settings,
ask the FTP server administrator where images are transferred.
710
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering image.canon and Setting Up Auto Send
This section describes how to send images to image.canon.
Registering image.canon and Setting Up Auto Send
You can register image.canon on the camera and prepare to send your shots automatically.
A computer or smartphone with a browser and internet connection is required.
You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or smartphone.
For instructions on how to use image.canon services and details on countries and
regions where it is available, visit the image.canon site (https://image.canon/).
Separate ISP connection and access point fees may apply.
Steps on the camera (1)
1.
On the camera, press the <
> button.
2.
Select [
: Network settings].
711
3.
In [Network], select [Enable].
4.
Select [Upload to Web service].
5.
Select [I Agree].
712
9.
Enter a four-digit number.
Enter a four-digit number of your choice, then select [OK].
10.
Select [OK].
The [ ] icon changes to [ ].
714
Steps on the computer or smartphone
9.
Set up camera web link.
Access the page in the notification message.
Follow the instructions to complete the settings on the camera web link
settings page.
715
Steps on the camera (2)
10.
Select [Upload to Web service].
11.
Select [OK].
The [ ] icon changes to [ ].
716
12.
Select [Auto send].
Once [Enable] is set, images are automatically sent when you turn the
camera on.
13.
Select [Type to send].
Set to [Stills only] or [Stills+movies].
14.
Restart the camera.
The images are now sent automatically.
To switch networks, select [Switch network] and follow steps 5–8.
To remove the connection, select [Clear camera web link settings] and then [OK].
Note
All image files on cards are sent when [Auto send] is set to [Enable].
When [Auto send] is set to [Enable], auto send starts after the camera starts up
(or recovers from auto power off).
Any images captured during auto sending are also sent.
717
Caution
Auto send does not start during interval timer shooting.
Transfer stops in the following cases.
• [
: Airplane mode] is set to [On]
• Movie recording is started
• A USB connection is started
• Battery capacity is low
• The camera's power switch is set to <
>
718
Remote Control (EOS Utility)
Configuring EOS Utility Connection Settings
Using EOS Utility
Direct Transfer
Creating and Registering Captions
Using EOS Utility, you can browse images on the camera and save them to the computer.
Also in EOS Utility, you can shoot by controlling the camera remotely and change camera
settings.
Install EOS Utility on the computer before setting up a connection ( ).
See Wi-Fi Connections with a Computer Using EOS Utility for instructions on preparing
for camera operations in EOS Utility by connecting the camera to a computer by joining
a Wi-Fi network via an access point compatible with WPS (PBC mode).
719
Configuring EOS Utility Connection Settings
These instructions are continued from
Configuring Communication Function Settings.
Establishing a connection also requires operations on the computer. For details, refer to
the computer documentation.
Steps on the camera (1)
1.
Select [OK].
The following message is displayed.
720
Steps on the computer
2.
Start EOS Utility on the computer.
3.
In EOS Utility, click [Pairing over Wi-Fi/LAN].
If a firewall-related message is displayed, select [Yes].
4.
Click [Connect] on the computer.
Select the camera to connect to, then click [Connect].
If multiple cameras are listed, identify the camera to connect to by MAC
address, as shown on the camera screen.
The camera MAC address can be checked on the [MAC address]
screen ( ).
721
Steps on the camera (2)
5.
Select [OK].
This message is displayed after the camera detects the computer
where you clicked [Connect] in step 4.
Select [OK].
6.
Select [OK].
7.
Select [OK].
Display returns to the [Network settings] screen.
The camera's < > lamp is lit in green.
Setting information is stored on the camera.
Connection settings for EOS Utility are now complete.
Manually pairing the camera and computer after this is no longer necessary, as long as
you do not change the settings after you have paired the devices once.
722
Using EOS Utility
For EOS Utility instructions, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual. Remote shooting is
only one of the many camera operations available.
Caution
Some menu items are not available when the camera is connected to a network.
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release timing
may be delayed.
In Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower compared
to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving subjects cannot be
displayed smoothly.
723
Direct Transfer
With the camera connected to EOS Utility and the main EOS Utility window displayed, you
can use the camera to transfer images to computer.
If you will transfer many images, consider using a household power outlet accessory (sold
separately).
Selecting images to transfer
1.
Select [
: Image transfer].
2.
Select [Image sel./transfer].
3.
Select [Direct transfer].
724
4.
Select [Sel.Image].
5.
Select an image to transfer.
Use the < > dial to select an image to transfer, then press < >.
Use the < > dial to add a checkmark [ ] in the upper left of the
screen, then press <
>.
For three-image display, turn the < > dial counterclockwise. To
return to single-image display, turn the
<
> dial clockwise.
To select other images to transfer, repeat step 5.
After image selection, press the < > button.
6.
Select [Transfer].
725
7.
Select [OK].
The selected images are transferred to the computer.
726
In a folder
Select [Sel. ].
Select your preferred selection method.
• Selecting [Select transfer failed images] selects all images in the selected folder
for which transfer failed.
• Selecting [Select images not transferred] selects all unsent images in the selected
folder.
• Selecting [Sel transfer fail img (
only)] selects all protected images in the
selected folder for which transfer failed.
• Selecting [Sel img not transfer. (
only)] selects all unsent protected images in
the selected folder.
• Selecting [Clear transfer history] clears the transfer history of images in the
selected folder.
• After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Select images not transferred]
and transfer all images in the folder again.
• After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Sel img not transfer. (
only)]
and transfer all protected images in the folder again.
Select a folder.
728
Select [OK] to register to [Images to transfer].
729
In a card
Select [All images].
Select your preferred selection method.
• Selecting [Select transfer failed images] selects all images on the card for which
transfer failed.
• Selecting [Select images not transferred] selects all unsent images on the card.
• Selecting [Sel transfer fail img (
only)] selects all protected images on the card
for which transfer failed.
• Selecting [Sel img not transfer. (
only)] selects all unsent protected images on
the card.
• Selecting [Clear transfer history] clears the transfer history of images on the card.
• After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Select images not transferred]
and transfer all images recorded on the card again.
• After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Sel img not transfer. (
only)]
and transfer all protected images recorded on the card again.
Select [OK] to register the selected images to [Images to transfer].
730
Select range
Select [Range].
Selecting the first and last images of the range marks all the images in the range with a
checkmark [
], and one copy of each image will be sent.
After image selection, press the < > button.
Select [OK] to register the selected images to [Images to transfer].
731
Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images
For RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images, you can specify which image to transfer.
1.
Select [
: Image transfer].
2.
Select the type of images to transfer.
732
RAW+JPEG transfer
• Select [RAW+JPEG transfer], then select [JPEG only], [RAW
only], or [RAW+JPEG].
RAW+HEIF transfer
• Select [RAW+HEIF transfer], then select [HEIF only], [RAW only],
or [RAW+HEIF].
Caution
Some menu items are not available during image transfer.
Note
This setting is linked to [RAW+JPEG transfer] and [RAW+HEIF transfer] settings
on the [Images to transfer] screen ( ).
733
Creating and Registering Captions
You can create captions and register them on the camera to use them as described in
Adding a Caption Before Transfer.
1.
Start EOS Utility and select [Camera settings].
2.
Select [WFT Captions].
3.
Enter the caption or captions.
Enter up to 31 characters (in ASCII format).
To acquire caption data stored on the camera, select [Load settings].
734
4.
Set the captions on the camera.
Select [Apply to camera] to set your new captions on the camera.
735
Controlling the Camera with Browser Remote
Configuring Browser Remote Connection Settings
Displaying Browser Remote
Browsing Images
Shooting Remotely
Registering IPTC Information
Configuring FTP Server Settings
Creating and Registering Captions
Using a browser, you can browse and save camera images, shoot remotely, and perform
other operations on a computer or smartphone.
Caution
The following operations cannot be performed when the camera's still photo
shooting/movie recording switch is set to <
>.
• View image
• Register IPCT information
• FTP server settings
• Create and register caption
Some browser window sizes may prevent normal display.
Do not use the browser's back and forward buttons.
736
Configuring Browser Remote Connection Settings
These instructions are continued from
Configuring Communication Function Settings.
Specify a login name and password for accessing the camera from a computer. The login
name and password you specify here are used when connecting to the camera.
1.
Select [Full control] or [Browser *].
Browser Remote enables camera access by users at up to three
computers at once.
The [Full control] account can use all Browser Remote features. This
account is only available on one computer.
The [Browser *] account is limited to browsing images on the camera
and saving them to the computer. This account is available on up to
two computers.
2.
Configure the [Login name] or [Password].
Select [Login name] and [Password] to access the virtual keyboard
( ) and enter the login name and password.
Select [OK] to return to the screen in step 1. Follow steps 1–2 for each
account to be used.
737
3.
Select [OK].
4.
Select [OK].
5.
Select [OK].
Display returns to the [Network settings] screen.
Setting information is stored on the camera.
Connection settings for Browser Remote are now complete.
Note
You can change account settings on the [Account settings] screen ( ), accessed
by selecting [Browser Remote settings] in [Connection option settings]. The
port number setting can also be changed on the [Browser Remote settings]
screen by selecting [Port no. (HTTP)] or [Port no. (HTTPS)]. Note that there is
normally no need to change the port number (80 for HTTP, 443 for HTTPS).
738
Displaying Browser Remote
From a browser, log in to the Browser Remote page on the camera. Make sure the camera
and computer are already connected via a wired LAN connection.
Checking the camera's IP address
The camera's IP address, as displayed in step 5, must be entered in the browser address
bar to access the camera from a browser.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Connection settings].
3.
Select [SET* Browser Remote].
739
4.
Select [Confirm settings].
Setting details are displayed.
5.
Check the settings.
Turn the < > dial to access other pages.
Write down the IP address.
After checking, press the < > button to close the confirmation
screen.
Logging in to Browser Remote
6.
Start a browser.
Start a browser on the computer.
7.
Enter the URL.
In the address bar, enter the IP address you noted in step 5.
Press the <Enter> key.
740
8.
Enter the information for [Login name] and [Password].
In [Login name] (user name) and [Password], enter the information
you specified in Configuring Browser Remote Connection Settings.
Select [OK] to display the top Browser Remote menu screen.
9.
Configure default settings as needed.
Select [ ] to display the menu.
741
• Language
Enables you to select the display language.
• Display theme
You can set the Browser Remote background color.
• AF for still photo shooting
Displayed if you select [Shooting] in step 9.
Enables you to configure how autofocus is used in still photo
shooting.
742
• Shutter mode
Displayed if you select [Shooting] in step 9.
You can set the shutter method for shooting still images.
• Anti-flicker shoot.
Displayed if you select [Shooting] in step 9.
Enables you to configure anti-flicker shooting.
• HF anti-flicker shooting
Displayed if you select [Shooting] in step 9.
Enables you to configure high-frequency anti-flicker shooting.
743
• HTTPS settings
Enables you to download a root certificate and access an FTP
server, when you will connect to the FTP server via HTTPS.
• Log out
Select to end the Browser Remote connection.
Caution
Browser Remote is not available unless the browser support JavaScript.
Some menu items are not available when connected to the camera via Browser
Remote.
744
Browsing Images
Enables you to browse images on cards in the camera.
1.
Select [Playback].
The image browsing screen is displayed.
745
2.
Select a card and folder.
Select a card in the pull-down list at left.
Select a folder in the pull-down list at right.
3.
Perform image operations as needed.
746
The image taken is automatically displayed by turning on [Auto
update].
With [Select] selected, you can select multiple images.
Selecting individual thumbnails selects each image separately.
Selecting thumbnails again clears the selection.
Selecting [Select all] marks all images on the browsing screen as
selected.
Selecting [Clear all] clears selection of all images.
Selecting [Cancel] returns to the browsing screen.
747
Selecting a thumbnail switches to the playback screen and shows the
image enlarged.
Still photo playback screen
Movie playback screen
748
Audio playback screen
Selecting an image and then [ ] erases the image.
Selecting an image and then the [ ] button downloads the image to
the computer.
Note
Computer performance and the browser used may prevent or delay image display
or prevent image downloading.
749
Shooting Remotely
You can use Browser Remote to shoot remotely.
Shooting still photos
1.
Select [Shooting].
The remote shooting screen is displayed.
750
(1) Still photo shooting button
(2) Movie shooting button
(3) Multi-function lock icon
(4) Shutter button
(5) MF toggle button
(6) AF area
(7) Metering mode
(8) Drive mode
(9) HDR shooting
(10) Image quality
(11) Still photo cropping/Aspect ratio
(12) Battery level/Temperature warning
(13) Browser Remote connection
(14) Available shots
(15) Electronic shutter
(16) Anti-flicker shooting
(17) AF button
(18) Shooting mode
(19) Shutter speed
(20) Aperture value
(21) Exposure compensation
(22) ISO speed
(23) Picture Style
(24) White balance
(25) Color temperature
(26) White balance correction
(27) AF operation
(28) MF button
(29) Live View shooting button
(30) Live View image quality toggle button
751
2.
Select (1) Still photo shooting button.
3.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to <
>.
4.
Display the Live View image.
To show or hide the Live View image, select (29) Live View shooting
button.
For more responsive Live View image display, select (30) Live View
image quality toggle button, which will reduce Live View image quality
to improve responsiveness. Select it again to restore the original image
quality.
752
5.
Set up shooting.
Select setting items (such as image quality) to view the setting details,
which you can configure.
Configure the settings as needed.
753
6.
Focus on the subject.
When using autofocus
To start AF with [AF button] selected in the [AF for still photo
shooting] menu, select the (17) AF button.
If you selected [Shutter button for AF/shooting] on the [AF for still
photo shooting] menu, when you select the (4) Shutter button, AF is
performed and a picture is taken.
When focusing manually
To show/hide (28) MF button display, select (5) MF toggle button.
Select (28) MF button, then focus manually. To adjust focus toward the
foreground, use [
], and to adjust focus toward the background,
use [
].
Three levels of focus adjustment are available.
[
] [ ]: Coarse
[
] [ ]: Intermediate
[
] [ ]: Fine
754
7.
Take the picture.
Select the (4) Shutter button to shoot.
Captured images are saved to the card in the camera.
To browse and download images, see Browsing Images.
Caution
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release timing
may be delayed.
Still photo shooting is not available when the camera's still photo shooting/movie
recording switch is set to <
>.
755
4.
Record the movie.
Movie recording standby
Movie recording in progress
Select (4) Shutter button, and when you release the button, movie
recording begins.
During movie recording, the red [○] on (4) Shutter button changes to a
white [□].
To stop movie recording, select (4) Shutter button again and release
the button.
757
Registering IPTC Information
Enables you to edit and register IPTC* information (comments on images, such as captions,
credits, and shooting locations) on the camera. Images can be tagged with IPTC information
registered on the camera.
*
International Press Telecommunications Council
1.
Select [IPTC info].
A screen for editing IPTC information is displayed.
2.
Select [Load from file].
Selecting [Load from file] enables you to load IPTC information (in
XMP format) that was saved using EOS Utility.
758
3.
Edit and register information as needed.
Selecting [Add to camera] to applies the edited IPTC information to
the camera.
This also sets the camera's Custom Function [ : Add IPTC
information] option to [
].
Selecting [Clear camera info] deletes all IPTC information registered
on the camera.
This also sets the camera's Custom Function [ : Add IPTC
information] option to [
].
Selecting [Clear] clears all IPTC information.
759
2.
Enter the caption or captions.
Enter up to 31 characters (in ASCII format).
To acquire caption data stored on the camera, select [Get from
camera].
3.
Set the captions on the camera.
Select [Add to camera] to set your new captions on the camera.
763
3.
Select [Disconnect].
4.
Select [OK].
The devices are disconnected.
765
Reconnecting
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Connection settings].
3.
Select [SET*].
In the saved settings, select settings to use for the connection.
766
4.
Select [Connect].
5.
Select [OK].
The devices are connected again.
If settings were changed on the target device, restore the previous
settings to enable connections by the camera.
767
Airplane Mode
You can temporarily disable Wi-Fi functions.
1.
Select [
: Airplane mode].
2.
Set to [On].
[ ] is displayed on the screen.
Note
[ ] may not be displayed in still photo shooting, movie recording, or playback,
depending on display settings. If it is not displayed, press the <
> button
repeatedly to access detailed information display.
768
Checking and Editing Network Settings
Checking and Editing Connection Settings
Manually Editing Connection Settings
Specifying Connection Options
Checking the MAC Address
Checking and Editing Connection Settings
You can check, change, or delete connection settings saved on the camera.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Connection settings].
769
3.
Select [SET*].
In the saved settings, select settings to use for the connection.
770
4.
Check or change the settings.
Connect
• Select to re-establish a connection ( ).
Change with wizard/Change from list
• Change connection settings ( ).
Save/load settings on card
• Save connection settings to a card, or load saved connection
settings from a card into the camera ( ).
Delete settings
• Select to delete connection settings.
• Selecting [OK] deletes the settings.
Confirm settings
• Select to check connection settings.
771
Changing connection settings
Settings originally completed using the connection wizard can be changed as follows.
Change with wizard
You can use the connection wizard to change connection settings saved on the camera.
1.
Access the [Connection settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Checking and Editing Connection Settings.
2.
Select [Change with wizard].
3.
Use the connection wizard to change connection settings.
See instructions starting with Displaying the Connection Wizard.
772
Change from list
You can use communication and function settings saved on the camera to change
connection settings saved on the camera. You can also register settings names.
1.
Access the [Connection settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Checking and Editing Connection Settings.
2.
Select [Change from list].
3.
Select an option and change setting details as needed.
Settings name
• Select to name sets of settings. Use the virtual keyboard ( ) to
enter text.
773
NW*/Comm settings*
• Select to change, add, or clear communication settings.
• Selecting [Select from list] lists communication settings saved on
the camera. Select the communication settings to use.
To view communication setting details, select settings and press
the <
> button.
• Selecting [Clear selected] clears communication settings with
registered connection settings. Select [OK] on the confirmation
screen.
MODE*/Function settings*
• Select to change, add, or clear function settings.
• Selecting [Select from list] lists function settings saved on the
camera. Select the function settings to use.
To view function setting details, select settings and press the
<
> button.
• Selecting [Clear selected] clears function settings with registered
connection settings. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Note
You can register two sets of communication and function settings to a single set of
connection settings. Note that depending on setting details, only one set can be
registered in some cases.
Clearing all function settings also clears communication settings, and the
connection settings will be labeled [Unspecified].
774
Saving and loading settings
Connection settings can be saved on a card and applied to other cameras. Connection
settings configured on other cameras can also be applied to the camera you will use.
Note
[ : Save/load cam settings on card] enables you to save all communication
settings on the camera to a card or load all communication settings for another
camera from a card.
Saving settings
1.
Access the [Connection settings] screen.
Follow steps 1–3 in Checking and Editing Connection Settings.
2.
Select [Save/load settings on card].
3.
Select [Save settings to card].
775
4.
Select [OK].
The file name is determined automatically by the camera: WFTNPF,
followed by a number (01 to 40) and the extension NIF. To rename the
file as desired, press the <
> button.
The settings are saved to the card.
The settings file is saved to an area of the card shown when the card is
opened (in the root directory).
Caution
40 settings files can be saved on one card from the camera. To save 41 or more,
use another card.
776
5.
Select [OK].
Information from the settings file is loaded into the selected settings
number.
Caution
Even if a computer or other device is used to save 41 or more settings files on a
card, only 40 are displayed on the camera's screen for loading settings. To load 41
or more settings files, load 40 from one card, then load remaining files from another
card.
Note
[ : Save/load cam settings on card] enables you to save all communication
settings on the camera to a card or load all communication settings for another
camera from a card.
778
Manually Editing Connection Settings
You can add, change, or delete communication and function settings saved on the camera.
You can also configure settings that are not set using the connection wizard, such as a
setting that determines what happens if files with the same name as existing files are sent to
the FTP server.
Editing communication settings
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Manual setting].
3.
Select [Comm settings].
779
4.
Select [NW*].
Select saved settings to edit.
5.
Change, delete, or check the settings as needed.
Change
• Select to change individual settings in sets of communication
settings.
• Selecting [Wireless LAN] enables you to change the target SSID,
for example.
• Selecting [TCP/IPv4] enables you to configure network-related
settings such as the IP address.
• Selecting [TCP/IPv6] enables you to configure settings used for
IPv6 ( ).
• Depending on the communication setting, not all items may be
displayed.
780
Delete settings
• Select to delete communication settings.
• Selecting [OK] deletes the settings.
Confirm settings
• Select to check communication settings.
781
Editing function settings
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Manual setting].
3.
Select [Function settings].
4.
Select [MODE*].
Select saved settings to edit.
782
Directory structure of the target folder
Configured in [FTP server] → [Directory structure].
With [Default], the root folder is used for image storage. If you have created a subfolder in
the root folder by changing the [Target folder] setting, images are saved in that folder.
Selecting [Camera] automatically creates a folder structure matching that of the camera's
(such as A/DCIM/100EOSR3) in the server's root folder for image storage. If you have
created a subfolder in the root folder by changing the [Target folder] setting, a folder
structure such as A/DCIM/100EOSR3 is automatically created in that folder for image
storage.
Overwriting files of the same name
Configured in [FTP server] → [Overwrite same file].
With [Overwrite same file] set to [Disable]
If there is already a file with the same name in the target folder on the FTP server, the new
file is saved with an extension consisting of an underscore and a number, as in
IMG_0003_1.JPG.
When you resend images if initial transfer fails
Even if the camera is configured to overwrite files of the same name, if you resend an image
file that could not be transferred initially, the existing file may not be overwritten in some
cases. If this happens, the new file is saved with an extension consisting of an underscore, a
letter, and a numeral, as in IMG_0003_a1.JPG.
Passive mode
Configured in [FTP server] → [Passive mode].
Enable this setting in network environments protected by a firewall. If an Error 41 occurs
(Cannot connect to FTP server), setting passive mode to [Enable] may enable access to the
FTP server.
Trusting target servers
Configured in [FTP server] → [Trust target server].
Set to [Enable] if you prefer to connect to FTP servers even when trust cannot be
established based on the root certificate used. In this case, take suitable security measures.
786
Specifying Connection Options
You can configure settings used for FTP transfer and Browser Remote. Settings are also
available for authentication information used in LAN environments with 802.1X
authentication.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Connection option settings].
3.
Select an option to configure.
FTP transfer settings
Browser Remote settings
Smartphone settings
802.1X authentication
787
FTP transfer settings
Selecting [FTP transfer settings] enables you to configure settings related to FTP transfer
and power saving.
Automatic transfer / Images to transfer / Transfer with SET / Set root certif
• For details, see Image Transfer to FTP Servers.
Power saving
• When [Enable] is set and no image is transferred for a certain period, the camera
will log off from the FTP server and disconnect from the LAN. The connection is re-
established automatically when the camera is ready for image transfer again. If you
prefer not to disconnect from the LAN, set to [Disable].
788
Browser Remote settings
Selecting [Browser Remote settings] enables you to set the account used for Browser
Remote access and configure HTTP/HTTPS communication settings.
Account settings
• For details, see Configuring Browser Remote Connection Settings.
Port no. (HTTP)/Port no. (HTTPS)
• You can change the port number used for HTTP/HTTPS communication. There is
normally no need to change the port number (80 for HTTP, 443 for HTTPS).
HTTPS
• Selecting [Enable] enables HTTPS communication for Browser Remote access.
789
802.1X authentication
Selecting [802.1X authentication] enables you to set, check, or delete 802.1X
authentication settings, using a setup wizard.
Configure these settings when connecting to networks that require 802.1X authentication.
First, save the certificate for the type of 802.1X authentication used to a card in the camera.
File types and names that can be loaded using this function are as follows.
Type File Name
Root certificate
8021X_R.CER
8021X_R.CRT
8021X_R.PEM
Client certificate
8021X_C.CER
8021X_C.CRT
8021X_C.PEM
Private key 8021X_C.KEY
791
Note that the camera supports following protocols.
Protocol Supported Authentication
EAP-TLS X.509
EAP-TTLS MSCHAPv2
PEAP MSCHAPv2
Setup wizard
• Follow the wizard to configure the authentication settings.
Confirm settings
• Select to check authentication settings.
Delete settings
• Select to delete authentication settings. Selecting [OK] on the screen displayed
deletes the settings.
792
Checking the MAC Address
You can check the camera's MAC address.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [MAC address].
3.
Check the MAC address.
The MAC addresses for [Wi-Fi] and [Wired] are displayed.
793
Syncing Time Between Cameras
Preparing for Time Syncing
Syncing the Time
You can set the sender camera time on up to 10 receiver cameras. Note that even after
synchronization, a slight margin of error applies between sender and receiver camera time
(of ±0.05 seconds, at most).
Caution
Always use cameras of the same model to sync the time. Synchronizing the time
on receiver cameras is not possible with different models of the sender and
receiver cameras.
This feature will not be available after 2038.
794
Preparing for Time Syncing
When using a single receiver camera, connect a LAN cable to the Ethernet RJ-45 terminal
of the sender and receiver cameras.
(A) Sender camera
(B) Receiver camera
(C) LAN cable
795
When using multiple receiver cameras, connect a LAN cable from the Ethernet terminal of
the sender and receiver cameras to a hub. Up to 10 receiver cameras can be connected.
(A) Sender camera
(B) Receiver camera
(C) LAN cable
(D) Hub
Use a highly shielded Category 5e or higher STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Gigabit Ethernet
cable.
796
Syncing the Time
Preparing the sender camera
First, set up the camera to use as a sender.
1.
On the camera, press the <
> button.
2.
Select [
: Network settings].
3.
In [Network], select [Enable].
4.
Select [Sync time between cameras].
If the camera is already connected to another device, [Set
[Connection settings] to [Disconnect]] is displayed. Select [OK] to
end the connection.
797
5.
Select [OK].
6.
Select [OK].
7.
Select [Sender].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
After the screen is displayed, the camera is ready.
798
Preparing receiver cameras
Set up cameras to use as receivers.
1.
Follow steps 1–6 in Preparing the Sender Camera.
2.
Select [Receiver].
Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
3.
Select [OK].
The following screen is displayed.
To set the time on multiple receiver cameras, follow steps 1–2 on each
receiver camera.
The number of receiver cameras detected is displayed on the sender
camera screen.
799
Syncing time between sender and receiver cameras
Sync the time on the sender and receiver cameras as follows.
1.
Follow steps 1–6 in Preparing the sender camera and steps 1–3 in
Preparing receiver cameras.
2.
On the sender camera, select [OK].
Check the number of receiver cameras, then select [OK].
After the time is synchronized, the next screen is displayed.
3.
Select [OK] on all of the cameras.
800
Setting Up GPS Features
GPS Settings
GPS Precautions
GPS features of the camera can be used to geotag images, set the time, and more. The
camera can receive signals from GPS satellites (USA), GLONASS satellites (Russia), and
the Quasi-Zenith Satellite System “Michibiki” (Japan).
Caution
Geotag information may not be recorded or inaccurate information may be
recorded where GPS signal coverage is poor, such as in the following places.
• Indoors, underground, near or between buildings, in tunnels or forests
• Near high-voltage power lines or mobile phones operating on the 1.5 GHz band
• When the camera is carried in a bag or other container
• When traveling long distances
• When traveling through different environments
• Even in conditions other than these, GPS satellite movement over time may
interfere with geotagging and cause missing or inaccurate geotag information.
The information may also indicate that the camera was used along a route
even if it was used at one location.
Elevation is not as accurate as latitude or longitude, due to the nature of GPS.
Internally, the camera's GPS antenna is near the front of the multi-function shoe.
Although GPS signals can also be acquired with a Speedlite attached, acquisition
sensitivity will be slightly lower.
When carrying the camera in a bag or other container, make sure it is face-up with
nothing covering it.
Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible. Also set the correct time
zone and daylight saving time for the shooting location.
Fewer shots are available in locations with poor signal coverage.
Remaining battery capacity may be lower when GPS features are used. Charge the
battery as needed, or consider purchasing a spare battery (sold separately).
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using information in your geotagged
still photos or movies. Be careful when sharing these images with others, as when
posting images online where many people can view them.
801
GPS Settings
1.
Select [
: GPS settings].
2.
Configure GPS details.
802
GPS
Specify the GPS operating mode.
In [Mode 1], the camera continues to acquire GPS signals at regular intervals with the
power switch set to <
> or even < >.
In [Mode 2], the camera acquires GPS signals with the power switch set to < >.
Setting the power switch to <
> also deactivates GPS features. Note that after
auto power off is activated, the camera continues to receive GPS signals at regular
intervals.
When acquiring GPS signals, use the camera outdoors where the sky is unobstructed and
aim it up, keeping your hand and other objects off the top. Signal acquisition under favorable
conditions takes approx. 30–60 sec., and then [
] is lit on the screen or LCD panel.
Shots taken when [
] is lit are geotagged.
Caution
When [Mode 1] is set, the camera continues to acquire GPS signals at regular
intervals even with the power switch set to <
>, which drains the battery
faster and reduces the number of shots available. Set to [Disable] if you will not
use the camera for some time.
If auto power off continues for an extended period in [Mode 2], the battery will be
drained faster and fewer shots will be available. Set the power switch to <
> if
you will not use the camera for some time.
803
Auto time setting
Time information acquired from GPS signals can be set on the camera. The margin of error
is approx. ±0.02 sec. Selecting [Auto update] will update the time when GPS signals are
received while the camera is on.
Caution
The time cannot be automatically updated unless signals from at least five GPS
satellites can be acquired. [Set now] will be grayed-out and unavailable.
Even if [Set now] can be selected, time adjustment may not be possible,
depending on the timing of GPS signal acquisition.
Setting [Auto time setting] to [Auto update] prevents the date or time from being
manually set with [
: Date/Time/Zone] ( ).
If you have performed [Sync time between cameras] and prefer not to have the
time adjusted, set [Auto time setting] to [Disable].
Position update interval
You can set the positioning interval (time) for updating geotag information. Although tagging
is more accurate when the geotag information is updated at shorter intervals, this reduces
the number of shots available because it drains the battery faster.
Caution
Some inconsistency in positioning intervals is inevitable, due to the nature of GPS.
804
GPS information display
Shows acquired GPS information.
The [
] icon indicates signal conditions. When [ ] is displayed, elevation is also
recorded. Note that elevation is not recorded when [
] is displayed.
You can check geotag information by displaying a shot, pressing the < > button to
access playback screens with detailed information, and then pressing <
>.
(1) Latitude
(2) Longitude
(3) Elevation
(4) Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Note
Movies are tagged with the geotag information acquired when you start recording.
Note that signal reception conditions are not recorded.
Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
805
GPS logger
By setting [Log GPS position] to [Enable], you can automatically record geotag information
at specific intervals along the route that the camera travels. Geotag information is recorded
at the interval set in [Position update intvl] as log data saved in the camera's internal
memory by date. You can also view the route traveled on a map displayed on a computer.
Position update intervals and log data capacity (in days) are as follows.
(Approx.)
Update Interval Log Data Update Interval Log Data
Every sec. 4.1 days Every 30 sec. 100 days
Every 5 sec. 20 days Every min. 100 days
Every 10 sec. 41 days Every 2 min. 100 days
Every 15 sec. 61 days Every 5 min. 100 days
* With one day being equivalent to eight hours of log data
Names of daily log files consist of the date and number (such as 19101000). New log file
are created if the camera enters a new time zone (
).
When the camera's internal memory becomes full, old log data is overwritten with new
data.
806
Caution
In [Mode 1], GPS logging continues even with the power switch set to < >.
In [Mode 2], setting the power switch to < > deactivates GPS logging.
However, GPS logging continues during auto power off.
Geotag information added to images may be inaccurate under some traveling
conditions, in some locations, or under some GPS settings.
Transferring log data to a card
You can transfer recorded log data to a card selected in [Transfer log data to card].
Transferring log data to a card erases the data from the camera's internal memory.
Log files transferred to a card are stored in the “GPS” folder within the “MISC” folder.
They are saved with a “.LOG” file extension.
Log files (.LOG) can be converted to KMZ format with GPS Log File Utility ( ).
Deleting log data
To delete log data in internal memory, select [Delete log data], then select [OK]. It may take
approx. 1 min. to delete the data.
807
Position data retention
To continue geotagging images even where satellite coverage is poor (if you go indoors, for
example) by using geotag information in log data, setting [Position data retention] to
[Unlimited] is recommended. The most recently acquired geotag information is added to log
data until new information can be acquired.
When a time such as [10 min.] is set, after geotag information cannot be acquired, the most
recent geotag information is added to log data for the specified period.
808
GPS Precautions
Countries/regions permitting use of GPS functions
Use of GPS features is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal use may be
punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid violating GPS regulations, visit the
Canon website to check where use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from use of GPS functions in
other countries and regions.
Because the use of GPS may be restricted in some countries and regions, follow local
laws and regulations where you will use the camera. Be particularly careful about using
GPS functions outside your home country.
Be careful about using GPS functions where the operation of electronic devices is
restricted.
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged
still images or movies. Be careful when sharing these geotagged still images, movies, or
GPS log files with others, such as when posting them online where many people can
view them.
GPS signal reception may take a longer time in some cases.
809
4.
Pair the devices.
When the [Pairing] screen appears, press and hold the <W> and <T>
buttons on the BR-E1 simultaneously for at least 3 sec.
After a message confirms that the camera is paired with the BR-E1,
press <
>.
5.
Set up the camera for remote shooting.
When shooting still photos, select [ ] or [ ] as the drive mode ( ).
For movie recording, set [ : Remote control] to [Enable].
For instructions after the pairing is complete, refer to the BR-E1's
Instruction Manual.
Caution
Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera's auto power
off is activated.
Note
When you will not use Bluetooth, setting this function to [Disable] in step 2 is
recommended.
811
Canceling the Pairing
Before pairing with a different BR-E1, clear the information about the connected remote
control.
1.
Select [
: Bluetooth settings].
2.
Select [Check/clear connection info].
3.
Press the <
> button.
812
4.
Select [OK].
813
Reference
Changing the Camera Nickname
Virtual Keyboard Operations
Configuring IPv6
Changing the Camera Nickname
You can change the nickname of this camera (displayed on connected devices) as desired.
1.
Select [
: Nickname].
2.
Enter text using the virtual keyboard (
).
When you finish entering characters, press the < > button.
814
3.
Select [OK].
815
Virtual Keyboard Operations
(1) Input area, for entering text
(2) Cursor keys, for moving in the input area
(3) Current no. of characters/no. available
(4) Keyboard
(5) Switch input modes
(6) Space
(7) Delete a character in the input area
(8) Exit input
Use
<
> or the < > or < > dial to move within (2) and (4)–(7).
Press <
> to confirm input or when switching input modes.
816
Configuring IPv6
To use IPv6, configure the settings manually.
Note
If you are unsure what to enter, ask the network administrator or other person in
charge of the network.
1.
Select [
: Network settings].
2.
Select [Manual setting].
3.
Select [Comm settings].
817
4.
Select the communication settings that will use IPv6.
5.
Select [Change].
6.
Select [TCP/IPv6].
818
7.
Select an option to configure.
Use TCP/IPv6
• Select [Enable] or [Disable] for IPv6.
Manual setting
• To set the IP address manually, select [Enable]. [DNS server] is
set to [Manual setting], and you can configure [DNS address],
[Manual address], [Prefix length], and [Gateway].
819
DNS server
• To set the DNS server IP address manually, select [Manual
setting].
• Select [Disable] if you will not use a DNS server.
• If the setting is currently [Auto assign], setting [Manual setting] to
[Enable] changes it to [Manual setting].
DNS address/Manual address/Gateway
• Select an option and enter the IP address.
Prefix length
• To set the prefix length, turn the < > dial to select a value (1–
128).
820
Troubleshooting
Responding to Error Messages
Troubleshooting Guide
Communication Function Precautions
Security
Checking Network Settings
Responding to Error Messages
Resolve any errors displayed on the camera screen by referring to these examples of
corrective actions. When errors occur, the <
> lamp on the camera blinks and the
error number is shown on the LCD panel. You can also check error details by accessing
[
: Network settings] → [Error description].
Click the following error numbers to jump to the corresponding section.
11 12
21 22 23
41 43 44 45 46 48
61 62 64 65
71 72 73
81
91
121 125 127
130 131 132 134 135
821
11: Connection target not found
In the case of [Smartphone], is Camera Connect running?
• Establish a connection using Camera Connect ( ).
In the case of [EOS Utility], is EOS Utility running?
• Start EOS Utility and try to connect again ( ).
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption key for
authentication?
• This error occurs if the encryption keys do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is [Open system].
Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct encryption key for
authentication is set on the camera ( ).
12: Connection target not found
Are the target device and access point turned on?
• Turn on the target device and access point, then wait a while. If a connection still
cannot be established, perform the procedures to establish the connection again.
822
21: No address assigned by DHCP server
What to check on the camera
On the camera, the IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct setting?
• If no DHCP server is used, configure the setting after setting the IP address to
[Manual setting] on the camera ( ).
What to check on the DHCP server
Is the power of the DHCP server on?
• Turn on the DHCP server.
Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server?
• Increase the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
• Remove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from the network to
reduce the number of addresses in use.
Is the DHCP server working correctly?
• Check the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working correctly as a DHCP
server.
• If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
Does your network include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
• If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera ( , ).
• Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.
Note
Responding to error messages 21–23
Also check the following points when responding to errors numbered 21–23.
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
• This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is set to [Open system]. Check upper- and lower-case
letters, and make sure the correct password for authentication is set on the
camera (
).
823
22: No response from DNS server
What to check on the camera
On the camera, the DNS address is set to [Manual setting]. Is this the correct
setting?
• If no DNS server is used, set the camera's DNS address setting to [Disable] ( ).
On the camera, does the DNS server's IP address setting match the server's
actual address?
• Configure the IP address on the camera to match the actual DNS server address
( , ).
What to check on the DNS server
Is the power of the DNS server on?
• Turn on the DNS server.
Are the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the corresponding names
correct?
• On the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the corresponding names are
entered correctly.
Is the DNS server working correctly?
• Check the DNS server settings to make sure it is working correctly as a DNS server.
• If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
Does your network include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
• If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera ( , ).
• Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.
824
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network
Is another device on the camera network using the same IP address as the
camera?
• Change the camera's IP address to avoid using the same address as another
device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address of the device that has a
duplicate address.
• If the camera's IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network environments using
a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto setting] ( ).
41: Cannot connect to FTP server
What to check on the camera
The camera's proxy server setting is [Enable]. Is this the correct setting?
• If no proxy server is used, set the camera's proxy server setting to [Disable] ( ).
Do the camera's [Address setting] and [Port No.] settings match those of the
proxy server?
• Configure the camera's proxy server address and port number to match those of the
proxy server ( ).
Are the camera's proxy server settings correctly set on the DNS server?
• Make sure the proxy server's [Address] is correctly set on the DNS server.
On the camera, does the FTP server's IP address setting match the server's actual
address?
• Configure the IP address on the camera to match the actual FTP server address
( ).
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption key for
authentication?
• This error occurs if the encryption keys do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is [Open system].
Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct encryption key for
authentication is set on the camera ( ).
On the camera, does the [Port number setting] for the FTP server match the actual
port number of the FTP server?
• Configure the same port number (usually 21 for FTP/FTPS or 22 for SFTP) on the
camera and FTP server. Configure the port number on the camera to match the
actual FTP server port number ( ).
Are the camera's FTP server settings correctly set on the DNS server?
• Make sure the FTP server's [Server name] is correctly set on the DNS server. Make
sure the [Server name] for the FTP server is correctly set on the camera ( ).
825
What to check on the FTP server
Is the FTP server working correctly?
• Configure the computer correctly to function as an FTP server.
• If applicable, ask your network administrator for the FTP server address and port
number, then set them on the camera.
Is the FTP server on?
• Turn on the FTP server. The server may have been turned off because of an
energy-saving mode.
On the camera, does the FTP server's IP address setting (in [Address]) match the
server's actual address?
• Configure the IP address on the camera to match the actual FTP server address
( ).
Is the FTP server configured to restrict access to only some IP addresses?
• Check the camera's IP address in [Confirm settings] ( ) and change the FTP
server settings.
Is a firewall or other security software enabled?
• Some security software uses a firewall to restrict access to the FTP server. Change
the firewall settings to allow access to the FTP server.
• You may be able to access the FTP server by setting [Passive mode] to [Enable]
on the camera ( ).
Are you connecting to the FTP server via a broadband router?
• Some broadband routers use a firewall to restrict access to the FTP server. Change
the firewall settings to allow access to the FTP server.
• You may be able to access the FTP server by setting [Passive mode] to [Enable]
on the camera ( ).
What to check on the proxy server
Is the proxy server on?
• Turn on the proxy server.
Is the proxy server working correctly?
• Check the proxy server settings to make sure the server is working correctly as a
proxy server.
• If applicable, ask your network administrator for the proxy server's address setting
and port number, then set them on the camera.
826
What to check on the network as a whole
Does your network include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
• If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera ( , ).
• Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.
827
43: Cannot connect to FTP server. Error code received from server.
What to check on the proxy server
Is the proxy server on?
• Turn on the proxy server.
Is the proxy server working correctly?
• Check the proxy server settings to make sure the server is working correctly as a
proxy server.
• If applicable, ask your network administrator for the proxy server's address setting
and port number, then set them on the camera.
What to check on the network as a whole
Does your network include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
• If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway address and
set it on the camera ( , ).
• Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on all network
devices including the camera.
What to check on the FTP server
Have you exceeded the maximum number of FTP server connections?
• Disconnect some network devices from the FTP server or increase the maximum
number of connections.
44: Cannot disconnect FTP server. Error code received from server.
This error occurs from a failure to disconnect from the FTP server for some
reason.
• Restart the FTP server and camera.
828
45: Cannot login to FTP server. Error code received from server.
What to check on the camera
On the camera, is the [Login name] set correctly?
• Check the login name for accessing the FTP server. Check upper- and lower-case
letters, and make sure the correct login name is set on the camera ( ).
On the camera, is the [Login password] set correctly?
• Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct login password is
set on the camera ( ).
What to check on the FTP server
Do the user rights for the FTP server allow reading, writing, and log access?
• Configure the FTP server's user rights to allow reading, writing, and log access.
Is the folder specified as the transfer destination on the FTP server named with
ASCII characters?
• Use ASCII characters for the folder name.
829
46: For the data session, error code received from FTP server
What to check on the FTP server
The connection was terminated by the FTP server.
• Restart the FTP server.
Do the user rights for the FTP server allow reading, writing, and log access?
• Configure the FTP server's user rights to allow reading, writing, and log access.
Do user rights allow access to the target folder on the FTP server?
• Configure the user rights for access to the target folder on the FTP server to allow
saving images from the camera.
Is the FTP server on?
• Turn on the FTP server. The server may have been turned off because of an
energy-saving mode.
Is the hard disk of the FTP server full?
• Increase available space on the hard disk.
48: Security of the connection to the target server cannot be verified.
If you trust this server and connect, set [Trust target server] to
[Enable].
This error occurs from a failure to confirm security of the target server connection
when connecting via FTPS.
• Confirm that the certificate is set correctly.
• Change [Trust target server] to [Enable] if you prefer to trust target servers
regardless of certificate settings.
830
61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found
Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna
of the access point?
• Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of
view of the camera.
What to check on the camera
Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point?
• Check the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the camera ( ).
What to check at the access point
Is the access point turned on?
• Turn on the power of the access point.
If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use
registered at the access point?
• Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point ( ).
62: No response from wireless LAN terminal
What to check on the camera
Is the camera configured for communication in infrastructure mode?
• Configure the camera for communication in ad hoc mode.
What to check on the other device
Is there a nearby device for ad hoc communication with the camera?
• Set up another device for ad hoc communication near the camera.
64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption method?
• The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP, and AES ( ).
If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use
registered at the access point?
• Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point. The MAC
address can be checked on the [MAC address] screen ( ).
831
65: Wireless LAN connection lost
Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna
of the access point?
• Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of
view of the camera.
The wireless LAN connection was lost, for some reason, and the connection
cannot be restored.
• The following are possible reasons: excessive access to the access point from
another device, a microwave oven or similar appliance in use nearby (interfering
with IEEE 802.11n/g/b (2.4 GHz band)), or influence of rain or high humidity.
71: Cannot connect to receiver camera
Are you following the correct procedure to establish the connection with receiver
cameras?
• Operate receiver cameras by following the correct instructions.
Are the receiver cameras too far from the sender camera?
• Bring the receiver cameras closer to the sender camera.
72: Cannot connect to sender camera
Are you following the correct procedure to establish the connection with the
sender camera?
• Operate the sender camera by following the correct instructions.
Is the sender camera too far from the receiver cameras?
• Bring the sender camera closer to the receiver cameras.
73: Could not synchronize the time
Are you following the correct procedure to establish a connection between the
sender and receiver camera?
• Operate the sender and receiver cameras by following the correct instructions ( ).
Is the sender camera too far from the receiver cameras?
• Bring the sender and receiver cameras closer together.
832
81: Wired LAN connection lost
Is the LAN cable securely connected?
• Reconnect the LAN cable between the camera and server. Because the cable may
be severed, try using another cable to connect the devices.
Is the hub or router on?
• Turn on the hub or router.
Is the server on?
• Turn on the server. The server may have been turned off because of an energy-
saving mode.
91: Other error
A problem other than error code number 11 to 83 occurred.
• Turn the camera's power switch off and on.
121: Not enough free space on server
The target Web server does not have enough free space.
• Delete unnecessary images on the Web server, check the free space on the Web
server, then try sending the data again.
125: Check the network settings
Is the network connected?
• Check the connection status of the network.
833
127: An error has occurred
A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the camera is
connected to the Web service.
• Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to image.canon.
130: The server is currently busy
Please wait a moment and try again
The image.canon site is busy at the moment.
• Try accessing image.canon over Wi-Fi again later.
131: Try again
An error occurred when connecting to image.canon over Wi-Fi.
• Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to image.canon.
132: Error detected on server
Try again later
The image.canon site is currently offline for maintenance.
• Try accessing image.canon over Wi-Fi again later.
134: Set the correct date and time
The date, time, and time zone settings are incorrect.
• Check the [
: Date/Time/Zone] settings.
135: Web service settings have been changed
The settings for image.canon were changed.
• Check the image.canon settings.
834
Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshoot camera issues by checking the camera and connected devices as described in
this section. If troubleshooting does not resolve the problem, contact a Canon Service
Center for product information and advice on product handling.
Cannot transfer images to an FTP server.
Set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to < > if you will transfer images
to an FTP server after shooting.
Image transfer is not possible with the still photo shooting/movie recording switch set to
<
>.
Cannot perform linked shooting.
When performing linked shooting, set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to
<
>.
Linked shooting is not possible with the still photo shooting/movie recording switch set to
<
>.
The camera heats up, and the transmission rate drops.
Continuous wireless operation over an extended period in high temperatures may cause
the camera's internal temperature to rise and slow down transfers.
835
Communication Function Precautions
In case of slower transmission, lost connections, choppy image display, or other problems
when using communication functions, try the following corrective actions.
Access point and antenna installation location
When using the camera indoors, install the access point in the same room where you
are shooting.
Install the device where people or objects do not come between the device and the
camera.
Install the device higher than the camera.
Install the device as close as possible to the camera. In particular, note that during
outdoor use in poor weather, rain may absorb radio waves and disrupt the connection.
Nearby electronic devices
If the wireless LAN transmission rate drops due to interference from the following electronic
devices, stop using them or establish a connection away from them. Otherwise, switching to
a wired LAN can resolve the issue.
In IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless networks, the camera communicates on the 2.4 GHz
band. For this reason, the wireless LAN transmission rate may drop if there are nearby
Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless telephones, microphones, smartphones,
or similar devices operating on the same frequency band.
836
Security
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may occur.
Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor wireless LAN transmissions and attempt
to acquire the data you are sending.
Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are
using to steal, modify, or destroy information. Additionally, you could fall victim to other
types of unauthorized access such as impersonation (where someone assumes an
identity to gain access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to cover their
tracks when infiltrating other systems).
It is recommended to make use of the systems and functions to thoroughly secure your
network, preventing these types of problems from occurring.
837
Checking Network Settings
Windows
Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then enter ipconfig/all and press the <Enter>
key. In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask, gateway,
and DNS server information are also displayed.
macOS
In macOS, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifconfig -a, and press the <Return>
key. The IP address assigned to the computer is indicated in the [en0] item next to
[inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.
For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the macOS help.
To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices on the network
when manually configuring the IP address assigned to the camera ( ), change the
rightmost number.
Example: 192.168.1.10
838
Resetting Communication Settings
All settings of network features can be cleared. This can prevent the information from being
leaked if you lend the camera or transfer ownership.
1.
Select [
: Reset communication settings].
2.
Select [OK].
Caution
If you have paired the camera with a smartphone, on the smartphone's Wi-Fi
settings screen, remove the Wi-Fi connection information of the camera for which
you restored default wireless communication settings.
839
Set-up
This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up [
] tab.
•
Tab Menus: Set-up
• Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback
• Folder Settings
• File Numbering
• File Naming
• Card Formatting
• Auto Rotate
• Adding Orientation Information to Movies
• Date/Time/Zone
• Language
• Video System
• Help
• Beeps
• Volume
• Headphones
• Power Saving
• Screen and Viewfinder Display
• Screen Brightness
• Viewfinder Brightness
• Screen and Viewfinder Color Tone
• Fine-Tuning Viewfinder Color Tone
• UI Magnification
• HDMI Resolution
• Touch Control
• Multi-Function Lock
• Shutter at Shutdown
• Sensor Cleaning
• App Selection for USB Connections
• Resetting the Camera
• Custom Shooting Mode (C1–C3)
• Save/Load Camera Settings on Card
•
Battery Information
• Copyright Information
• System Status Display
• Other Information
840
Tab Menus: Set-up
Set-up 1
(1) Record func+card/folder sel.
• Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback
• Creating a Folder
(2) File numbering
(3) File name
(4) Format card
(5) Auto rotate
(6) Add rotate info
(7) Date/Time/Zone
Set-up 2
(1) Language
(2) Video system
(3) Help text size
(4) Beep
(5) Volume
(6) Headphones
(7) Power saving
841
Set-up 3
(1) Screen/viewfinder display
(2) Screen brightness
(3) Viewfinder brightness
(4) Screen/viewfinder color tone
(5) Fine-tune VF color tone
(6) UI magnification
(7) HDMI resolution
Set-up 4
(1) Eye control
(2) Touch control
(3) Multi function lock
(4) Shutter at shutdown
(5) Sensor cleaning
(6) Choose USB connection app
842
Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
Recording/Playback Selection with Two Cards Inserted
Recording is possible when card 1 ( ) or 2 ( ) is in the camera (except under some
conditions). With only one card inserted, there is no need to follow these steps.
With two cards inserted, you can select the recording method and card to use for recording
and playback as follows.
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
1.
Select [
: Record func+card/folder sel.].
844
2.
Set the recording method.
/ separate
• Select [Enable] for automatic configuration of the recording method
for still photos and movies. Movies are recorded to card
and still
photos to card
.
• Movie recording is not possible if card
is full or not inserted.
• Without card
inserted, still photos can be captured but not
saved. Still photo shooting is not possible if the card is full.
Caution
Specifying [Enable] will make [ Rec options], [ Rec
options], [
Record/play], and [ Record/play] unavailable.
Note
When set to [Enable], card is used for playback if the < >
button is pressed in movie recording mode. Card
is used for
playback if the <
> button is pressed in still photo shooting
mode.
845
Rec options
Set the recording method for still photos.
• Standard
Records still photos to the card selected in [
Record/play].
• Auto switch card
Same as [Standard], but additionally, the camera switches to the
other card when one card becomes full. At this time, a new folder is
created.
• Rec. separately
Enables you to set a specific image size for each card ( ). For
each shot, a still photo is recorded to card
and in your
specified image quality.
Note that recording separately to
and is not available
for RAW images.
• Rec. to multiple
For each shot, a still photo is recorded to card
and in the
same image quality.
Consider using an SD card with fast writing speeds for card
,
such as a UHS-II card.
Caution
Maximum burst for [Rec. separately] is lower if you specify
different image sizes for cards
and ( ).
846
Note
Rec. separately/Rec. to multiple
Images are recorded with the same file number to card and .
The number of shots available as shown in the viewfinder and on
the Quick Control screen is for the card with less free space.
[Card* full] is displayed when one of the cards becomes full, and
shooting is no longer possible. To continue shooting, either
replace the card or set [
Rec options] to [Standard] and select
the card with free space.
See Folder Settings for details on [Folder] in [ : Record func
+card/folder sel.].
847
Rec options
Set the recording method for movies.
• Standard
Records movies to the card selected in [
Record/play].
• Auto switch card
Same as [Standard], but recording ends when the card becomes
full. When you resume recording, the camera switches to the other
card for recording. A new folder is created after switching cards.
•
,
For each recording, a RAW movie is recorded to card and an
MP4 movie to card
, both with the same file number. When one
card becomes full, recording is no longer possible.
• Rec. to multiple
For each recording, the same movie is recorded to card
and .
848
Caution
Rec. to multiple
Record to multiple is not available for the following movies.
• RAW movies
• 4K 59.94/50.00 fps ALL-I
• 4K High Frame Rate movies
Note
Rec. to multiple
Images are recorded with the same file number to card and
.
The number of shots available as shown in the viewfinder and
on the Quick Control screen is for the card with less free
space.
[Card* full] is displayed when one of the cards becomes full,
and shooting is no longer possible. To continue shooting,
either replace the card or set [
Rec options] to [Standard]
and select the card with free space.
See Folder Settings for details on [Folder] in [ : Record func
+card/folder sel.].
849
Recording/Playback Selection with Two Cards Inserted
With [
Rec options]/[ Rec options] set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], select
the card for recording and playback.
With [
Rec options] set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple], or with [ Rec
options] set to [
, ] or [Rec. to multiple], select the card for playback.
Setting via the menu
Standard/Auto switch card
Select [Record/play].
• Select [
Record/play] for still photos or [ Record/play] for movies.
: Use card 1 for recording and playback
: Use card 2 for recording and playback
Rec. separately/Rec. to multiple/ ,
Select [Play].
• Select [ Play] for still photos or [ Play] for movies.
• Pressing the <
> button in still photo shooting mode plays images from the card
selected in [
Play].
• Pressing the < > button in movie recording mode plays images from the card
selected in [
Play].
850
Note
With [Priority: ] set, the camera switches to the priority card when cards are
inserted or removed.
851
3.
Select [Create folder].
4.
Select [OK].
To rename the folder, select [Change folder name].
853
Renaming Folders
1.
Enter letters and numbers of your choice.
You can enter five characters.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press <
> to enter it.
2.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
854
Selecting a Folder
(1) Number of images in folder
(2) Lowest file number
(3) Folder name
(4) Highest file number
Select a folder on the folder selection screen.
Captured images are stored in your selected folder.
Note
Folders
Folders are named as in “100EOSR3,” with a three-digit folder number followed by
five letters or numbers. A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001–
9999). When a folder becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased
by one is created automatically. Also, if manual reset (
) is executed, a new folder
will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.
Creating folders with a computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder with “DCIM” as the name.
Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. “100ABC_D” is the required format for folder names, and
the first three digits must be a folder number in the range 100–999. The last five
characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters from A to Z,
numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also note that two
folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder number (for example,
“100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining five characters in each name
are different.
855
2.
Set the item.
Select [Numbering].
Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].
If you want to reset the file numbering, select [Manual reset] ( ).
Select [OK] to create a new folder, and the file number will start with
0001.
Caution
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even if
the card still has free space. After a message requesting you to replace the card is
displayed, switch to a new card.
857
Continuous
For continuous file numbering regardless of switching cards or
creating folders
File numbering is continuous up to 9999, even if you replace a card, create a folder, or
switch the target card (as in
→ ). This is useful when you want to save images
numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one
folder on a computer.
Note that file numbering may continue from any existing images in cards or folders that you
switch to. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended that you use a
newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing cards or switching target cards
Card A (
)
Card B ( )
(1) Next sequential file number
File numbering after creating a folder
Card A
858
Auto Reset
For restarting file numbering from 0001 after switching cards or
creating folders
File numbering is reset to 0001 if you replace a card, create a folder, or switch the target
card (as in
→ ). This is useful if you want to organize images by cards or folders.
Note that file numbering may continue from any existing images in cards or folders that you
switch to. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001, use a newly
formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing cards or switching target cards
Card A (
)
Card B ( )
(1) File numbering is reset
File numbering after creating a folder
Card A
859
Manual Reset
For resetting file numbering to 0001 or starting from 0001 in new
folders
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically and the
file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the images taken
yesterday and the ones taken today.
860
File Naming
Registering/Changing File Names
File names consist of four alphanumeric characters followed by a four-digit file number ( )
and file extension. You can change the first four alphanumeric characters, which by default
are unique for each camera and set when the camera is shipped.
User setting 1 enables you to register four characters of your choice. User setting 2 adds
three initial, registered characters of your choice to a fourth character representing the
image size that is added automatically after you shoot.
(Example)
Registering/Changing File Names
1.
Select [
: File name].
2.
Select [Change User setting*].
861
3.
Enter letters and numbers of your choice.
Enter four characters for User setting 1 or three for User setting 2.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press <
> to enter it.
4.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
862
5.
Select a registered file name.
Select [File name], then choose a registered file name.
Caution
An underscore (“_”) cannot be used as the first character.
Note
Notes on [User setting2]
Shooting after you have selected “*** + image size” (as registered to User setting 2)
will add a character representing the current image size to your file name as the
fourth character. Meanings of added characters are as follows.
“***L”:
, , , or
“***M”: or
“***S”: or
“***T”:
“***C”:
The automatically added fourth character enables you to determine image sizes
without opening the files after transferring them to a computer. Based on file
extensions, you can also distinguish RAW, JPEG, and HEIF images.
Movies recorded with User setting 2 are named with the fourth character as an
underscore.
863
Card Formatting
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer,
format the card with this camera.
Caution
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased.
Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you
need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a computer, etc.
before formatting the card.
1.
Select [
: Format card].
2.
Select a card.
[ ] represents card 1, and [ ], card 2.
Select the card.
864
3.
Format the card.
Select [OK].
For low-level formatting, press the < > button to add a checkmark
[
] to [Low level format], then select [OK].
865
Conditions requiring card formatting
The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full of images or data.
A card-related error is displayed ( ).
Low-level formatting
Perform low-level formatting if the card's writing or reading speed seems slow or if you
want to totally erase the data on the card.
Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the formatting
will take longer than normal formatting.
During low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in
this case, normal formatting will already be complete and you can use the card as usual.
Card file formats
CFexpress cards are exFAT formatted.
SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be formatted in exFAT.
Individual movies recorded to exFAT-formatted cards are recorded as a single file
(without splitting them into multiple files) even if they exceed 4 GB, so the resulting
movie file will exceed 4 GB.
Caution
It may not be possible to use cards formatted with this camera in other cameras.
Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by some computer
operating systems or card readers.
Formatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data. Be aware
of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of cards, take steps to
protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards.
Note
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the
capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
866
Auto Rotate
You can change the auto rotation setting that straightens images shot in vertical orientation
when they are displayed.
1.
Select [
: Auto rotate].
867
2.
Select an option.
On
Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and
computers.
On
Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.
Off
Images are not automatically rotated.
Caution
Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during playback even
if you later set auto rotation to [On].
Note
If a picture is taken while the camera is aimed up or down, automatic rotation to the
proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
If images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS software.
868
Adding Orientation Information to Movies
For movies recorded with the camera held vertically, orientation information indicating which
side is up can be added automatically to enable playback in the same orientation on
smartphones or other devices.
1.
Select [
: Add rotate info].
2.
Select an option.
Enable
Play movies on smartphones or other devices in the orientation in
which they were recorded.
Disable
Play movies horizontally on smartphones or other devices, regardless
of the recording orientation.
869
Caution
[Add rotate info] is not available for RAW or MP4 files when the movie
recording format is
or + .
Movies are played horizontally on the camera and via HDMI video output,
regardless of this setting.
870
Date/Time/Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, follow
these steps to set the time zone first.
By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed in the future and
the date/time will be updated to match it.
Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and time information, be
sure to set your date/time.
1.
Select [
: Date/Time/Zone].
2.
Set the time zone.
Turn the < > dial to select [Time zone].
Press < >.
871
Turn the < > dial to select the time zone, then press < >.
If your time zone is not listed, press the < > button, then set the
difference from UTC in [Time difference].
Turn the < > dial to select a [Time difference] option (+ / − / hour /
minute), then press <
>.
Set by turning the < > dial, then press < >.
After entering the time zone or time difference, turn the < > dial to
select [OK], then press <
>.
3.
Set the date and time.
Turn the < > dial to select an option, then press < >.
Set by turning the < > dial, then press < >.
872
4.
Set daylight saving time.
Set it as necessary.
Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >.
Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >.
When the daylight saving time is set to [ ], the time set in step 3 will
advance by 1 hour. If [
] is set, the daylight saving time will be
canceled and the time will go back by 1 hour.
5.
Exit the setting.
Turn the < > dial to select [OK].
Caution
The date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when the battery is exhausted, or when it is exposed to freezing
temperatures for an extended period. If this happens, set them once again.
After changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time are set.
873
Note
Auto power off time may be extended while the [ : Date/Time/Zone] screen is
displayed.
874
Language
1.
Select [
: Language ].
2.
Set the desired language.
875
Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting determines the frame
rates available when you record movies.
1.
Select [
: Video system].
2.
Select an option.
For NTSC
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South
Korea, Mexico, etc.).
For PAL
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
876
Example: [ : Multi function lock]
< >
878
Changing the Help Text Size
1.
Select [
: Help text size].
2.
Select an option.
879
Volume
The volume of camera sounds is adjustable.
1.
Select [
: Volume].
2.
Set the option.
Select an option, then turn the < > dial to adjust the volume.
881
Headphones
1.
Select [
: Headphones].
2.
Select [Volume].
3.
Adjust the volume.
Turn the < > dial to adjust the volume, then press < >.
882
Note
You can check sound from the built-in microphone or an external microphone on
headphones when [
: Sound recording] is set to an option other than [Disable]
and [High Frame Rate] is set to [Disable].
883
Power Saving
You can adjust the timing of when the screen dims and then turns off, when the camera
turns off, and when the viewfinder turns off after the camera is left idle (Screen dimmer,
Screen off, Auto power off, and Viewfinder off).
1.
Select [
: Power saving].
2.
Select an option.
Note
[Screen dimmer] and [Screen off] apply while the shooting screen is displayed.
These settings do not apply during menu display or image playback.
The camera turns off during menu display or image playback after the time set in
[Screen dimmer], [Screen off], and [Auto power off] elapses.
[Viewfinder off] also applies while the screen is still on. After this time elapses, the
viewfinder sensor is deactivated.
Only [Viewfinder off] applies during viewfinder display. After this time elapses, the
viewfinder sensor is deactivated and the viewfinder turns off.
Images on the screen are displayed at a lower frame rate after the screen dims
during still photo shooting standby.
884
Screen and Viewfinder Display
You can specify to use the screen or viewfinder for display, to avoid accidentally activating
the viewfinder sensor when the screen is open.
1.
Select [
: Screen/viewfinder display].
2.
Select an option.
AUTO1: Auto 1 ( : only screen)
Always use the screen for display when it is open.
Use the screen for display when it is closed and facing you, and switch
to the viewfinder when you look through it.
AUTO2: Auto 2 ( : auto switching)
Use the screen for display when it is closed and facing you, and switch
to viewfinder display when you look through the viewfinder.
: Viewfinder
Always use the viewfinder for display.
: Screen
Always use the screen for display when it is open.
885
Note
You can also switch between viewfinder and screen display by pressing a button
you have customized by assigning to switching. With this setting set to [AUTO1] or
[AUTO2], the camera responds to the viewfinder sensor accordingly.
With [AUTO1] set, the camera does not respond to the viewfinder sensor when the
screen is open.
886
Viewfinder Brightness
1.
Select [
: Viewfinder brightness].
2.
Turn the <
> dial and select either [Auto] or [Manual].
Auto
Press < >. Check the effect in the viewfinder while shooting.
Manual
Turn the < > dial to adjust viewfinder brightness, then press < >.
Check the effect in the viewfinder.
888
Screen and Viewfinder Color Tone
1.
Select [
: Screen/viewfinder color tone].
2.
Make the adjustment.
Turn the < > dial to select an option, then press < >.
889
Fine-Tuning Viewfinder Color Tone
1.
Select [
: Fine-tune VF color tone].
2.
Make the adjustment.
Referring to the gray image, use < > for adjustment, then press
<
>. Check the effect in the viewfinder.
890
UI Magnification
You can magnify menu screens by double-tapping with two fingers. Double-tap again to
restore the original display size.
1.
Select [
: UI magnification].
2.
Select [Enable].
Caution
Use camera controls when configuring menu functions with the display magnified.
Touch-screen operations are not supported.
891
HDMI Resolution
Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a television or
external recording device with an HDMI cable.
1.
Select [
: HDMI resolution].
2.
Select an option.
Auto
The images will automatically be displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
1080p
Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you prefer to avoid display or
delay issues when the camera switches resolution.
892
Touch Control
1.
Select [
: Touch control].
2.
Select an option.
[Sensitive] makes the touch-screen panel more responsive than
[Standard].
To disable touch operations, select [Disable].
Caution
Precautions for touch-screen panel operations
Do not use sharp objects such as fingernails or ballpoint pens for touch operations.
Do not use wet fingers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or if
your fingers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction may
occur. In this case, turn off the power and wipe off the moisture with a cloth.
Attaching a commercially available protective sheet or a sticker on the screen may
impair responsiveness to touch operations.
The camera may not respond as well if you quickly perform touch operation when
[Sensitive] is set.
893
Multi-Function Lock
Specify camera controls to lock when the Multi-function lock is enabled. This can help
prevent accidentally changing settings.
1.
Select [
: Multi function lock].
2.
Select camera controls to lock.
Press < > to add a checkmark [ ].
Select [OK].
Setting the power/multi-function lock switch to < > locks the
selected [
] camera controls.
Note
An asterisk “*” to the right of [ : Multi function lock] indicates that the default
setting has been modified.
894
Shutter at Shutdown
You can set whether to leave the shutter open or close it when the camera's power switch is
set to <
>.
1.
Select [
: Shutter at shutdown].
2.
Select an option.
: Closed
Closes the shutter. Normally set to closed, to prevent dust from
adhering to the sensor when you switch lenses.
: Open
Leaves the shutter open. This keeps camera quieter when the power
switch is set to <
> or < >. Useful when you want to shoot
quietly.
Note
Regardless of the setting, the shutter remains as it is when auto power off is
activated.
895
2.
Select [Clean now
].
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Note
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Note that
[Clean now
] may not be available immediately after cleaning.
897
Cleaning Automatically
1.
Select [Auto cleaning
].
2.
Select an option.
Turn the < > dial to select an option, then press < >.
Note
When set to [At pwr off] or [Enable], the sensor is cleaned when the screen goes
off, including when it has been turned off automatically.
898
Cleaning Manually
Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed manually with a
commercially available blower or similar tool.
Always use a fully charged battery.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it
done by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
1.
Select [Clean manually].
2.
Select [OK].
3.
Remove the lens and clean the sensor.
899
4.
End the cleaning.
Set the power switch to < >.
Note
Using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately) is recommended.
Caution
While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the power is cut
off, the shutter will close. These may result in damaging the image sensor
and shutter curtains.
• Setting the power switch to <
>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If the power
is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains may get damaged.
Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air may damage
the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and scratch it.
If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper will sound as
a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor
cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
900
App Selection for USB Connections
By connecting the camera to a smartphone or computer with the interface cable, you can
transfer images via FTP or import images to the smartphone or computer.
1.
Select [
: Choose USB connection app].
2.
Select an option.
Photo Import/Remote Control
Select if you will use EOS Utility after connecting to a computer, or if
you will use dedicated Android apps or the iOS version of Photos.
Canon app(s) for iPhone
Select if you will use dedicated iOS apps.
Connecting the camera to a smartphone requires a cable for this
purpose. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the dedicated
apps.
901
Resetting the Camera
The camera's settings for shooting functions and menu functions can be restored to their
defaults.
1.
Select [
: Reset camera].
2.
Select an option.
Reset individual settings
Settings for individual selected options can be reset.
Factory reset
Resets all settings to defaults.
3.
Clear the settings.
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
902
Note
Still photo Custom shooting modes are reset when [Custom shooting mode (C1-
C3)] in [Reset individual settings] is selected in still photo shooting mode, and
movie Custom shooting modes are reset when this option is selected in movie
recording mode.
903
Custom Shooting Mode (C1–C3)
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
Current camera settings such as shooting, menu, and Custom Function settings can be
registered in Custom shooting modes [
] to [ ]. You can register different functions to
use when shooting still photos or movies.
1.
Select [
: Custom shooting mode (C1-C3)].
2.
Select [Register settings].
904
3.
Register the desired items.
Select the Custom shooting mode to register, then select [OK] on the
[Register settings] screen.
The current camera settings are registered to Custom shooting mode
C*.
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
If you change a setting while shooting in Custom shooting mode, the mode can be
automatically updated with the new setting (Auto update). To enable this automatic update,
set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step 2.
905
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of each mode can be restored to default
settings, as they were before registration.
Note
You can also change shooting and menu settings in Custom shooting modes.
906
Save/Load Camera Settings on Card
Saving Camera Settings
Loading Camera Settings
Current camera settings such as shooting, menu, and Custom Function settings can be
saved to a card as a camera settings file. By loading a camera settings file, you can apply
the state of the settings as saved. This enables you to save and apply optimal settings for
specific shooting situations, or load settings files on other EOS R3 cameras to use the
cameras with the same settings.
Saving Camera Settings
1.
Select [
: Save/load cam settings on card].
2.
Select [Save to card].
907
3.
Select [OK].
(1) Target card
The camera settings are saved to the card.
To rename the file to an 8-character name of your choice before saving
it, press the <
> button on the screen in step 3.
For instructions, see File Naming. The steps are the same.
Caution
Camera settings files saved by a camera other than an EOS R3 cannot be loaded
on this camera.
It may not be possible to load camera settings files that were saved by a camera
with a different firmware version.
Note
Up to ten camera settings files can be saved on a card. If a card already has ten
camera settings files, either overwrite existing files or use a different card.
908
Battery Information
You can check the conditions of the battery you are using. By registering multiple batteries
to the camera, you can check their approximate remaining capacity and usage history.
1.
Select [
: Battery info.].
(1) Model of battery or household power source used.
(2) Battery level indicator ( ) with the remaining battery level, in 1%
increments.
(3) The number of shots taken with the current battery. The number is reset
when the battery is charged.
(4) State of battery recharge performance, in three levels.
(Green): Battery recharge performance is good.
(Green): Battery recharge performance is slightly degraded.
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is recommended.
Caution
Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E19 is recommended. If you use batteries
that are not genuine Canon products, the camera's full performance may not be
attained or malfunction may result.
910
Note
The shutter count is the number of still photos taken (not including movie
recording).
If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the instructions in the
message.
911
Copyright Information
Checking the Copyright Information
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as Exif information.
Caution
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely when
you select [Display copyright info.].
Note
You can also set or check copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software, ).
1.
Select [
: Copyright information].
2.
Select an option.
912
3.
Enter text.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press <
> to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
4.
Exit the setting.
Press the < > button, then press [OK].
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright info.] in step 2, you can check the [Author] and
[Copyright] information that you entered.
913
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete the [Author] and
[Copyright] information.
914
System Status Display
Checking the Error Log
Clearing the Camera Status Log
You can check the camera's serial number, firmware version, and shutter-release cycles on
this screen. You can also check the status log for past errors.
Checking camera status with this feature and requesting any required maintenance at a
Canon Service Center can reduce camera problems.
Checking the Error Log
You can check a record of past errors, as well as lens, flash, and battery usage at the time
of occurrence.
1.
Select [
: System status display].
915
2.
Check the details as needed.
Note
The camera status log screen lists as many as five recent error
records. Older records are automatically deleted.
Shutter-release cycles are indicated in units of 1,000.
Electronic shutter release is not included in the number of shutter-
release cycles.
3.
Check the log as needed.
On the screen in step 2, press the < > button.
“Err **” indicates error information ( ).
916
4.
Check the details as needed.
Turn the < > dial to select an item, then press the < > button to
view error details.
Turn the < > dial to check details.
917
Other Information
Manual/software URL
To download instruction manuals, select [ : Manual/software URL] and scan the
displayed QR code with a smartphone. You can also use a computer to access the
website at the URL displayed and download software.
Certification Logo Display
Select [ : Certification Logo Display] to display some of the logos of the camera's
certifications. Other certification logos can be found on the camera body and packaging.
Firmware
Select [ : Firmware] to update the firmware of the camera, lens, or other compatible
accessories in use.
919
Custom Functions/My Menu
You can fine-tune camera functions and change the functionality of buttons and dials to suit
your shooting preferences. You can also add menu items and Custom Functions that you
adjust frequently to My Menu tabs.
•
Tab Menus: Custom Functions
• Custom Function Setting Items
• Tab Menus: My Menu
• Registering My Menu
920
Tab Menus: Custom Functions
Custom Functions 1
(1) Exposure level increments
(2) ISO speed setting increments
(3) Speed from metering/ISO Auto
(4) Bracketing auto cancel
(5) Bracketing sequence
(6) Number of bracketed shots
(7) Safety shift
Custom Functions 2
(1) Same expo. for new aperture
(2) AE lock meter. mode after focus
(3) Restrict shooting modes
(4) Restrict metering modes
(5) Metering used in manual exp
(6) Set shutter speed range
(7) Set aperture range
921
[ 1]
Exposure level increments
You can specify to use 1/2-stop increments as the increments for shutter speed, aperture
value, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, and FEB.
1/3: 1/3-stop
1/2: 1/2-stop
Note
Display when set to [1/2-stop] is as follows.
ISO speed setting increments
You can change the manual ISO speed setting increment to a whole stop.
1/3: 1/3-stop
1/1: 1-stop
Note
Even if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop increments
when ISO Auto is set.
926
Speed from metering/ISO Auto
You can set the ISO speed status after the metering timer ends in cases where, for ISO
Auto operation in [
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] mode, the camera has adjusted the ISO speed
during metering or during the metering timer.
: Restore Auto after metering
: Retain speed after metering
Bracketing auto cancel
You can specify to cancel AEB and white balance bracketing when the power switch is set
to <
>.
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed.
0−+: 0, -, +
−0+: -, 0, +
+0−: +, 0, -
AEB
White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction M/G Direction
0: Standard exposure 0: Standard white balance 0: Standard white balance
−: Underexposure −: Blue bias −: Magenta bias
+: Overexposure +: Amber bias +: Green bias
927
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed.
When [Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, -, +], the bracketed shots will be taken as shown
in the following table.
3: 3 shots
2: 2 shots
5: 5 shots
7: 7 shots
(1-stop/step increments)
1st Shot 2nd Shot 3rd Shot 4th Shot 5th Shot 6th Shot 7th Shot
3: 3 shots Standard (0) –1 +1
2: 2 shots Standard (0) ±1
5: 5 shots Standard (0) –2 –1 +1 +2
7: 7 shots Standard (0) –3 –2 –1 +1 +2 +3
Note
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or − side when setting the AEB range. With
white balance bracketing, the second shot is adjusted toward the negative side for
the B/A or M/G direction.
928
Safety shift
If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the
autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually selected setting to
obtain the standard exposure. [Shutter speed/Aperture] applies to [
] or [ ] mode.
[ISO speed] applies to [
], [ ], or [ ] mode.
OFF: Disable
Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture
ISO: ISO speed
Note
Safety shift overrides any changes to [ISO speed range] or [Min. shutter spd.]
from default settings in [
: ISO speed settings] if standard exposure cannot
be obtained.
The minimum and maximum limits for the safety shift with the ISO speed are
determined by [Auto range] ( ). However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds
the [Auto range], the safety shift will take effect up or down to the manually set
ISO speed.
Safety shift will take effect as necessary even when flash is used.
929
[ 2]
Same expo. for new aperture
The maximum aperture value may decrease (the lowest f/number may increase) in [ ]
mode (manual exposure shooting) with ISO speed set manually (except when set to ISO
Auto) if you (1) Change lenses, (2) Attach an extender, or (3) Use a zoom lens with a
variable maximum aperture value. This function prevents the corresponding underexposure
by adjusting ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv value) automatically to maintain the same
exposure as before (1), (2), or (3).
With [ISO speed/Shutter speed], the ISO speed is automatically adjusted within the ISO
speed range. If exposure cannot be maintained by adjusting ISO speed, shutter speed (Tv
value) is automatically adjusted.
OFF: Disable
ISO: ISO speed
ISO/Tv: ISO speed/Shutter speed
Tv: Shutter speed
Caution
Does not respond to changes in effective aperture value from changes in
magnification when macro lenses are used.
Cannot provide the same exposure as before (1), (2), or (3) if [ISO speed] is set
and the exposure cannot be maintained at speeds set in [ISO speed range].
Cannot provide the same exposure as before (1), (2), or (3) if [Shutter speed] is
set and the exposure cannot be maintained at speeds set in [
: Set shutter
speed range].
Shutter speed is limited to 1/8000 when [ : Shutter mode] is [Electronic] and
[Same expo. for new aperture] is set to [Shutter speed] or [ISO speed/Shutter
speed].
Note
Also responds to changes in the highest f/number (minimum aperture).
The original exposure setting is restored if you perform (1), (2), or (3) with [ISO
speed], [ISO speed/Shutter speed], or [Shutter speed] set and do not adjust ISO
speed, shutter speed, or aperture value before returning the camera to the original
state, before (1), (2), or (3).
Shutter speed may change to maintain exposure if the ISO speed increases to an
expanded ISO speed when [ISO speed] is set.
930
AE lock meter. mode after focus
For each metering mode, you can specify whether to lock the exposure (AE lock) once
subjects are in focus with One-Shot AF. The exposure will be locked while you keep
pressing the shutter button halfway. Select metering modes for AE lock and add a
checkmark [
]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Restrict shooting modes
You can restrict the shooting modes available with the < > button.
Select available shooting modes [
/ / / / / / / / ], then press
<
> to add a checkmark [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Caution
Restricted shooting mode settings are not registered to [ ], [ ], or [ ].
The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all nine modes at the same time.
931
Restrict metering modes
You can restrict the metering modes available with the < > button.
Select available metering modes [
/ / / ], then press < > to add a checkmark
[
]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Caution
The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all four modes at the same time.
Metering used in manual exp
You can set the metering mode used in [
] shooting mode.
: Specified metering mode
The current metering mode is used.
: Evaluative metering
: Partial metering
: Spot metering
: Center-weighted average
Caution
Setting [ / / / ] will prevent you from selecting the metering mode by
pressing the <
> button in manual exposure shooting.
932
Set shutter speed range
You can set the shutter speed range for each [ : Shutter mode] option. In [ ], [ ], or
[
] mode, you can set the shutter speed manually within your specified range. In [ ] and
[
] mode, or in [ ] mode with shutter speed set to [AUTO], the shutter speed is set
automatically within your specified range (except for movie recording). Select [OK] to
register the setting.
Mech shutter/elec 1st-curtain
• Lowest speed: Can be set in a range of 30 sec.–1/4000 sec.
• Highest speed: Can be set in a range of 1/8000 sec.–15 sec.
Electronic
• Lowest speed: Can be set in a range of 30 sec.–1/32000 sec.
• Highest speed: Can be set in a range of 1/64000 sec.–15 sec.
Caution
Setting [Highest speed] for [Electronic] to 1/64000 will not limit highest speeds
faster than 1/8000 in [
] or [ ] mode.
This setting does not apply to HF anti-flicker shooting.
Set aperture range
You can set the aperture value range. In [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode, you can set the
aperture value manually within your specified range. In [
] and [ ] mode, or in [ ] mode
with the aperture value set to [AUTO], the aperture value is set automatically within your
specified range. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Max. aperture
Can be set in a range of f/1.0–f/64.
Min. aperture
Can be set in a range of f/91–f/1.4.
Note
The available aperture value range varies depending on the lens's minimum and
maximum aperture value.
933
[ 3]
AE Microadjustment
Caution
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment only if
necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent you from
obtaining suitable exposure.
You can fine-tune the standard exposure level. Effective if images in autoexposure shooting
without exposure compensation usually seem underexposed or overexposed.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
To access the adjustment screen, select [Enable], then press the <
> button.
Standard exposure can be adjusted in a range of ±1 stop, in 1/8-stop increments. Set on
the positive side if shots tend to be underexposed and on the negative side if they tend
to be overexposed.
Caution
The effective exposure compensation range available in movie recording remains
unchanged if you adjust standard exposure with AE Microadjustment, and only the
standard exposure level is changed. An exposure compensation amount equivalent
to the AE Microadjustment amount is not applied to resulting images if the effective
exposure compensation range in movie recording is exceeded (for example, an
exposure compensation amount of +1 stop is not applied if AE Microadjustment is
set to +1 stop and exposure compensation to +3 stops).
Note
Exposure compensation can be set up to ±3 stops from the adjusted standard
exposure when shooting.
934
FE Microadjustment
Caution
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment only if
necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent you from
obtaining suitable flash exposure.
You can fine-tune the standard flash exposure level. Effective if main subjects in autoflash
shooting without flash exposure compensation usually seem underexposed or overexposed.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
To access the adjustment screen, select [Enable], then press the <
> button.
Standard flash exposure can be adjusted in a range of ±1 stop, in 1/8-stop increments.
Set on the positive side if main subjects tend to be underexposed and on the negative
side if they tend to be overexposed.
Limit continuous shot count
You can limit the maximum burst for continuous shooting, so that while you keep holding
down the shutter button with continuous shooting set, the camera automatically stops
shooting after the specified number of continuous shots.
You can set it from 99 to 2 exposures. Pressing the <
> button returns the setting to
[Disable].
When [Disable] is set, continuous shooting can continue up to the maximum burst shown at
right in the viewfinder.
Restrict drive modes
You can restrict the drive modes available with the < > button.
Select available drive modes [
/ / / / / ], then press < > to add a
checkmark [
]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Caution
The [ ] mark cannot be cleared from all modes at the same time.
935
[ 4]
direction to set Tv/Av
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture value can be reversed.
Reverses the turning direction of the <
>, < >, and < > dial in [ ] shooting
mode and only the <
> dial in other shooting modes. The direction of the < > and
<
> dial in [ ] mode matches the direction to set exposure compensation with the
<
> and < > dials in [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes.
: Normal
: Reverse direction
direction to set Tv/Av
RF lens and mount adapter control ring turning direction when setting the shutter speed and
aperture value can be reversed.
: Normal
: Reverse direction
936
Customize buttons
You can assign frequently used functions to camera buttons that are easy for you to use.
Different functions, for use when shooting still photos or movies, can be assigned to the
same button.
1.
Select [
: Customize buttons].
2.
Select a camera control.
3.
Select a function to assign.
Press < > to set it.
You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[
] in the lower left of the screen by pressing the < > button.
937
Note
[ : Customize buttons] settings are not cleared even if you select [ : Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)]. To clear the settings, select [
: Clear customized
settings].
938
Functions available for customization
AF
●: Default ○: Available for customization
Function
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○
Start/stop
tracking
○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Metering
and AF start
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○
AF stop
○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
AF point
selection
○ ●
Direct AF
point
selection
○
Direct AF pt
sel (during
meter)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
●
*3
Set AF point
to center
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Switch to
registered
AF point
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Switch to
registered
AF func.
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direct AF
area
selection
*1
939
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
One-Shot
AF
Servo AF
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Move AF
point by eye
control
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Moving AF
point, start
AF by eye
ctrl
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
●
*4
Eye
control
*1
●
Moving AF
pt, meter.,
AF by eye
ctrl
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Eye
Detection
AF
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Eye
detection
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Focus mode
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Peaking
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Focus guide
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Drive
mode
*1
* 1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
*
3: Default in movie recording.
* 4: Default in still photo shooting.
940
Exposure Compensation
●: Default ○: Available for customization
Function
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
AE lock, AF
stop
○ ○
Metering
start
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
AE lock
○ ○ ○
●
*3
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
AE lock
(hold)
○
AE lock
(while
button
pressed)
*1
○ ○ ○
●
*4
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
AE lock/FE
lock
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Release AE
Lock
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Expo comp
(hold btn,
turn
)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ISO speed
941
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Set ISO
speed(hold
btn,turn
)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Flash firing
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FE lock
*1
* 1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
* 3: Default in movie recording.
* 4: Default in still photo shooting.
942
Image
●: Default ○: Available for customization
Function
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Image size
selection
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
One-touch
image
quality
setting
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
One-touch
image
quality
(hold)
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Cropping/
aspect
ratio
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Auto
Lighting
Optimizer
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
White
balance
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Picture
Style
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Protect
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Rating
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Record func
+card/folder
sel.
* 1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
943
Movies
●: Default ○: Available for customization
Function
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Zebra
*2
● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Movie
recording
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pause
Movie Servo
AF
*2
* 2: Cannot be assigned as a function available in still photo shooting.
944
Operation
945
●: Default ○: Available for customization
Function
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Flash
function
settings
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○
Dial function
settings
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Cycle
between the
set
functions
○
Short press:
LCD
illumination
Long press:
LCD info
switching
●
Short press:
LCD info
switching
Long press:
LCD
illumination
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LCD panel
illumination
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LCD panel
info
switching
○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Shooting
mode
settings
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Manual HF
anti-flicker
shoot(Tv)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Silent
shutter
function
*1
946
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Switch
focus/
control ring
○
Switch to
Custom
shooting
mode
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
●
*4
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Depth-of-
field
preview
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reset
selected
item in Fv
mode
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reset
Tv/Av/
/ISO in
Fv mode
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Quick
Control
screen
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Magnify/
Reduce
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Image
replay
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Magnify
images
during
playback
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Register/
recall
shooting
func
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Menu
display
947
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Touch
Shutter
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Create
folder
*1
○
OVF sim.
view assist
*1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Maximize
screen
brightness
(temp)
○ ○
Power off
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Screen off
○ ○ ○
Unlock
while button
pressed
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Switch
between
VF/screen
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Network
settings
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Magnify/
Reduce
button
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Playback
button
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Info button
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Erase
button
948
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Rating
button
○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○
●
*3
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
No function
(disabled)
* 1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
* 3: Default in movie recording.
* 4: Default in still photo shooting.
Note
[ ]: “AF Stop” or “Lens Function” button on super telephoto lenses with Image
Stabilizer.
949
Customize dials
Frequently used functions can be assigned to the < >/< >/< >/< > dials.
1.
Select [
: Customize dials].
2.
Select a camera control.
3.
Select a function to assign.
Press < > to set it.
You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[
] in the lower left of the screen by pressing the < > button.
950
Note
[ : Customize dials] settings are not cleared even if you select [ : Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)]. To clear the settings, select [
: Clear customized
settings].
951
Functions available for dials
●: Default ○: Available for customization
Function
Select AF area ○ ○ ○
Direct AF point selection ○ ○
AF area (hold metering button) ○
Change shutter speed ○
Change aperture value ○
Exposure compensation ○ ○ ○
Set ISO speed ● ○ ○
Change shutter spd. (hold meter. btn) ○
Change aperture (hold meter. btn) ○
Exposure comp. (hold meter. btn) ●
Set ISO speed (hold meter. btn) ○
Flash exp comp (hold meter.btn) ○
Shutter speed setting in M mode ● ○ ○
Aperture setting in M mode ○ ○ ●
White balance selection ○ ○ ○
Select color temperature ○ ○ ○
Picture Style ○ ○ ○
Select WB (hold meter. btn) ○
Color temp. (hold meter. btn) ○
Select (hold meter. btn)
○
No function (disabled) ○ ○ ○ ○
952
Note
The < > dial cannot be customized in [ ] mode.
< >: Control ring on RF lenses and mount adapters.
953
Clear customized settings
1.
Select [
: Clear customized settings].
2.
Select [OK].
[Customize buttons] and [Customize dials] are restored to defaults.
954
[ 5]
switching ( / )
You can change the functionality of the still photo shooting/movie recording switch.
The movie recording screen is not displayed with this function set to [Silent shutter
function switching] or [Disable]. Pressing the movie shooting button starts recording a
movie as specified for Custom shooting mode [
].
: Still photo/movie recording
: Silent shutter function switching
Setting the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to <
> sets [ : Silent
shutter function] to [On].
: Disable
Smart controller
Enables you to move AF points by dragging on the smart controller after pressing the
<
> button.
ON: Enable
Enables use of the smart controller in both vertical and horizontal shooting.
: Disable vertical only
Disables use of the vertical-grip smart controller. Note that the vertical-grip smart
controller is disabled even when assigned in [Customize buttons].
OFF: Disable
Disables use of the smart controller in both vertical and horizontal shooting, even when
assigned in [Customize buttons].
Caution
This function is not available if you have set the [ ] to [Disable] in [ :
Customize buttons].
Note
With [Enable] or [Disable vertical only] selected, you can press the < >
button to adjust sensitivity, which changes the amount of AF point movement in
response to dragging on the smart controller.
955
Vertical shooting controls
To prevent unintended operations, you can disable vertical shooting controls – buttons, dials,
and the Multi-controller and smart controller near the bottom of the camera.
ON: On
OFF: Off
LOCK: Disable using lock
Setting the multi-function lock switch to <
> disables the controls. Note that the
vertical-grip depth-of-field preview button and vertical-grip Multi-function button 2 can
still be used.
956
[ 6]
Add cropping information
Adding cropping information displays vertical lines for the aspect ratio specified in shooting,
so that you can compose shots as if shooting with a medium- or large-format camera (6×6
cm, 4×5 inch, and so on).
When you shoot, instead of cropping images recorded to the card, the camera adds aspect
ratio information to images for cropping in the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
You can import images to Digital Photo Professional on a computer and easily crop images
to the aspect ratio set at the time of shooting.
OFF: Disable
6:6: Aspect ratio 6:6
3:4: Aspect ratio 3:4
4:5: Aspect ratio 4:5
6:7: Aspect ratio 6:7
5:6: Aspect ratio 10:12
5:7: Aspect ratio 5:7
Caution
Cropping information can only be added when [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] is
set to [Full-frame].
JPEG or HEIF images are not saved at the cropped size if you use the camera to
process RAW images with cropping information ( ). In this case, RAW processing
produces JPEG or HEIF images with cropping information.
Note
Vertical lines indicating your specified aspect ratio are displayed on the screen.
957
Shutter release time lag
Normally, the camera controls shooting so that the shutter-release time lag is consistent, but
by setting [Shortened], you can disable this control to shorten the shutter-release time lag.
: Standard
: Shortened
Caution
Shutter-release time lag varies by shooting conditions, type of lens, aperture value,
and other factors.
Audio compression
Sets audio compression for movie recording. [Disable] allows higher audio quality than
when audio is compressed, but file sizes are larger.
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
Caution
Editing movie files recorded with [Disable] and then saving them with compression
will also compress the audio.
Audio is compressed even if [Disable] is selected when [ : Movie rec. size] is
set to
(NTSC) or (PAL).
958
Default Erase option
You can set which option is selected by default in the erase menu ( ), which is accessed
by pressing the <
> button during image playback or during review after shooting.
By setting an option other than [Cancel], you can simply press <
> to erase images
quickly.
: [Cancel] selected
: [Erase] selected
: [Erase ] selected
: [Erase non- ] selected
Caution
Be careful not to erase images accidentally when an option other than [Cancel] is
set.
Av setting without lens
You can specify whether the aperture value can still be set without a lens attached.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
Aperture value can still be set without a lens attached. Convenient when you want to
prepare for shooting and have already decided about the aperture value.
Release shutter w/o lens
You can specify whether shooting still photos or movies is possible without a lens attached.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
959
[ 7]
Retract lens on power off
You can set whether to retract gear-type STM lenses (such as RF35mm F1.8 Macro IS
STM) automatically when the camera's power switch is set to <
>.
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
Caution
With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
Note
When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens's focus mode
switch setting (AF or MF).
Add IPTC information
Registering IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council) information to the
camera from EOS Utility (EOS software) enables you to record (add) this information to
JPEG/HEIF/RAW still photos at the time of shooting. This is helpful in file management
and other tasks using the IPTC information.
For instructions on registering IPTC information to the camera and details on the
information you can register, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
Caution
IPTC information is not added when you record movies.
960
Note
During playback, you can check whether IPTC information was added.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to check IPTC information
in images.
IPTC information registered to the camera is not erased if you select [ : Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)] ( ), but the setting changes to [Disable].
961
[ 8]
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)
Selecting [ : Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] clears all Custom Function settings except
the following functions.
Customize buttons
Customize dials
switching ( / )
Smart controller
Note
To clear settings configured with [ : Customize buttons] and [ : Customize
dials], select [
: Clear customized settings].
Settings for [ : AE Microadjustment] and [ : FE Microadjustment] are set to
[Disable] but not cleared when [
: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] is performed.
Note that although information added using [
: Add IPTC information] is
retained, the setting changes to [Disable].
962
Registering My Menu
Creating and Adding My Menu Tabs
Registering Menu Items on My Menu Tabs
My Menu Tab Settings
Deleting All My Menu Tabs/Deleting All Items
Menu Display Settings
On the My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions you often adjust.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tabs
1.
Select [Add My Menu tab].
2.
Select [OK].
You can create up to five My Menu tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2.
964
Registering Menu Items on My Menu Tabs
1.
Select [MY MENU*: Configure].
2.
Select [Select items to register].
3.
Register the desired items.
Select an item, then press < >.
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
You can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2, press the < > button.
965
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items on the menu tab, and rename or delete the menu tab itself.
Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select [Sort registered
items], select an item to rearrange, then press <
>. With [ ] displayed, turn the
<
> dial to rearrange the item, then press < >.
Delete selected items/Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items] deletes one item at
a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all the registered items on the tab.
Delete tab
You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete the [MY MENU*]
tab.
966
Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1.
Select [Rename tab].
2.
Enter text.
Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then
press <
> to enter it.
By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode.
To delete single characters, select [ ] or press the < > button.
3.
Confirm input.
Press the < > button, then select [OK].
967
Deleting All My Menu Tabs/Deleting All Items
You can delete all the created My Menu tabs or My Menu items registered on them.
Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete all My Menu
tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be deleted and the [
] tab will
revert to its default.
Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] tabs. The
tabs themselves will remain. When [Delete all items] is selected, all the items registered
on all the created tabs will be deleted.
Caution
Performing [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs] will also delete tab names
renamed with [Rename tab].
968
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the menu screen that is to appear first when you press
the <
> button.
Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [
] tab selected.
Display only My Menu tab
Restricts display to the [
] tab ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] tabs are not displayed).
969
Importing Images to a Computer
Connecting to a Computer with an Interface Cable
Using a Card Reader
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer. There are
three ways to do this.
If you will import many images, consider using a household power outlet accessory (sold
separately).
Connecting to a Computer with an Interface Cable
1.
Install EOS Utility (
).
2.
Connect the camera to the computer.
Use the interface cable included with the camera.
When connecting the cable to the camera, use the cable protector ( )
and insert the plug in the digital terminal.
Insert the other end of the cable into the computer's USB terminal
(Type-C).
3.
Use EOS Utility to import the images.
Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
971
Using a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.
1.
Install Digital Photo Professional (
).
2.
Insert the card into the card reader.
3.
Use Digital Photo Professional to import the images.
Refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
Note
When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card reader
without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the computer.
972
Using an Optional USB Power Adapter to Charge the
Camera
Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1 (sold separately), you can charge Battery Pack LP-E19
without removing it from the camera.
1.
Connect the USB power adapter.
With the camera power switch set to < >, insert the USB power
adapter plug fully into the <
> terminal.
974
2.
Connect the power cord.
Connect the power cord to the USB power adapter and plug the other
end into a power outlet.
Charging begins, and the access lamp (1) is lit in green.
[ ] is displayed on the LCD panel.
When charging is finished, the access lamp turns off.
Caution
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it
continuously for more than 24 hours.
Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used.
If the charging lamp fails to light up or a problem occurs during charging (shown by
the access lamp blinking in green), unplug the power cord, reinsert the battery, and
wait a few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, take the
camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
The charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on ambient
temperature and remaining capacity.
For safety, charging in low temperatures takes longer.
The camera cannot be powered with USB Power Adapter PD-E1.
Some commercially available power adapters have been confirmed to charge and
power the camera. For details, check the Canon website.
975
Troubleshooting Guide
Power-related problems
Shooting-related problems
Problems with wireless features
Operation problems
Display problems
Playback problems
Sensor cleaning problems
Computer connection problems
Problems with the multi-function shoe
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide. If this
Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, take the camera to the nearest Canon
Service Center.
Power-related problems
Batteries cannot be charged with the battery charger.
The included Battery Charger LC-E19 is designed exclusively for Battery Pack LP-E19.
In case of charging or charger issues, see Charging the Battery.
The charger's lamp blinks at high speed.
If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication with the battery
failed (with a non-Canon battery pack), the protection circuit will stop charging, and the
charge lamp will blink in orange at a constant high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the
charger's power plug from the power outlet, reattach the battery, wait a few minutes, and
then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the problem persists, take the
camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger's lamp does not blink.
If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is high, the charger will
not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp off). During charging, if the battery's
temperature becomes high for any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks).
When the battery temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.
976
Batteries cannot be charged with the USB power adapter (sold
separately).
Batteries are not charged while the camera power switch is set to < >. However,
batteries are charged during auto power off.
Operating the camera will stop charging in progress.
The access lamp blinks during charging with the USB power adapter.
In case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green and a protective circuit
stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord, reattach the battery, and wait a few
minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, take the camera to the
nearest Canon Service Center.
The access lamp is not lit during charging with the USB power adapter.
Try unplugging the USB power adapter and plugging it in again.
The camera is not activated even when the power switch is set to
<
>.
Make sure the battery is inserted properly in the camera ( ).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed ( ).
Charge the battery ( ).
The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power switch is set
to <
>.
If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the access lamp
will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When the image recording is
complete, the power will turn off automatically.
977
[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is
displayed.
Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E19.
Remove and install the battery again ( ).
If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
Use a fully charged battery ( ).
The battery performance may have degraded. See [ : Battery info.] to check the
battery recharge performance level ( ). If the battery performance is poor, replace the
battery with a new one.
The number of available shots will decrease with any of the following operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture
• Using GPS
• Using the lens's Image Stabilizer
• Using the wireless communication functions
• Using accessories compatible with the multi-function shoe
The camera turns off by itself.
Auto power off is in effect. To deactivate auto power off, set [Auto power off] in [ :
Power saving] to [Disable] ( ).
Even if [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen and viewfinder will still turn off
after the camera is left idle for the time set in [Screen off] or [Viewfinder off] (although
the camera itself remains on).
978
Shooting-related problems
The lens cannot be attached.
To attach EF or EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera cannot be
used with EF-M lenses ( ).
No images can be shot or recorded.
Make sure the card is properly inserted ( ).
Slide the card's write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting ( ).
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make space
( , ).
Shooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you attempt to focus. Press
the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus manually ( , ).
The card cannot be used.
If a card error message is displayed, see Inserting/Removing Cards and Error Codes.
An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in another
camera.
Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this camera and
then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed and it may not be possible
to use the card.
The image is out of focus or blurred.
Set the lens's focus mode switch to < > ( ). For lenses without a focus mode
switch, set [
: Focus mode] to [ ].
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake ( ).
With a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the Image Stabilizer switch to
<
>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter speed ( ), set a
higher ISO speed ( ), use flash ( ), or use a tripod.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF ( ). Shooting with the focus locked is not
possible with Servo AF ( ).
979
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
High-speed continuous shooting may be slower depending on the battery level, ambient
temperature, flicker reduction, shutter speed, aperture value, subject conditions,
brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, shooting settings, and other
conditions. For details, see Selecting the Drive Mode or Still photo file size / Number of
possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
Shooting intricate subjects such as fields of grass may result in larger file sizes, and the
actual maximum burst may be lower than the guidelines in Still photo file size / Number
of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for
continuous shooting does not change.
Estimated maximum burst indicated in the viewfinder does not change when you switch
cards, even if you switch to a high-speed card. Maximum burst listed in Still photo file
size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting is based on
the standard Canon test card, and the actual maximum burst is higher for cards with
faster writing speeds. For this reason, estimated maximum burst may differ from actual
maximum burst.
High-speed display is not available during high-speed continuous
shooting.
Refer to the high-speed display requirements in High-Speed Display.
Some image quality options are not available with cropped shooting.
/ image quality options are not available when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S
lenses.
The aspect ratio cannot be set.
Aspect ratios cannot be set for EF-S lenses ([1.6x (crop)] is set automatically).
Aspect ratios cannot be set when [ : Add cropping information] is set to an option
other than [Disable].
ISO 100 cannot be set for still photo shooting.
The minimum speed in the ISO speed range is ISO 200 when [ : Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].
980
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be selected for still photo shooting.
Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to
[Enable] or [Enhanced].
Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : HDR shooting ] is set to
[Enable].
Check the [ISO speed range] setting under [ : ISO speed settings].
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image comes out
bright.
Set [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] ( ). When [Low], [Standard], or
[High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure compensation or flash exposure
compensation, the image may come out bright.
I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual exposure
and ISO Auto are set.
See M: Manual Exposure to set the exposure compensation.
Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.
With [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [Standard] or [High], [Chromatic aberr corr] and
[Diffraction correction] are not displayed, but they are both set to [Enable] for
shooting.
[Digital Lens Optimizer] is not displayed in movie recording.
Images are not displayed after shooting in multiple-exposure shooting.
When [On:ContShtng] is set, images are not displayed for review after capture, and
image playback is not available ( ).
Using flash in [
] or [ ] mode lowers the shutter speed.
Set [Slow synchro] in [ : External Speedlite control] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] (or
[1/250-1/60sec. auto]) or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (or [1/250 sec. (fixed)]) (
).
The flash does not fire.
Make sure any flash units are securely attached to the camera.
981
The flash always fires at full output.
Flash units other than EL/EX series Speedlites used in autoflash mode always fire at full
output ( ).
When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering mode] is set to [TTL flash
metering] (autoflash), the flash will always fire at full output ( ).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, flash exposure
compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the Speedlite's flash exposure
compensation is canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the
camera.
High-speed sync is not available in [ ] or [ ] mode.
Set [Slow synchro] in [ : External Speedlite control] to an option other than [1/200
sec. (fixed)] (or [1/250 sec. (fixed)]) ( ).
Remote control shooting is not possible.
In still photo shooting, set the drive mode to [ ] or [ ] ( ). In movie recording, set
[
: Remote control] to [Enable] ( ).
Check the position of the remote control's release timing switch.
If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see Remote Control Shooting or
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control.
A white [ ] or red [ ] icon is displayed during shooting.
Indicates that the camera's internal temperature is high. Image quality of still photos may
be worse when a white [
] icon is displayed. Display of a red [ ] icon indicates that
shooting will soon stop automatically ( ).
[
] or a red [ ] icon is displayed during movie recording.
Indicates that the camera's internal temperature is high. A red [ ] icon will be displayed
if you continue recording while [
] is displayed. If this condition continues, movie
recording will automatically stop, and you will be unable to record movies or shoot still
photos until the camera has cooled down.
982
Movie recording stops by itself.
If the card's writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop automatically. For details
on cards that can record movies, see Card performance requirements. To find out the
card's writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer's website, etc.
Perform low-level formatting to initialize the card if the card's writing or reading speed
seems slow ( ).
Movie recording stops automatically if you record a high frame rate movie for 89 min. 29
sec.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie recording.
ISO speed is set automatically in [ ] recording mode. In [ ] mode, you can manually
set the ISO speed ( ).
The minimum speed in the ISO speed range is ISO 200 when [ : Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be selected for movie recording.
Check the [ISO speed range] setting under [ : ISO speed settings].
Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to
[Enable] or [Enhanced].
The exposure changes during movie recording.
If you change the shutter speed or aperture value during movie recording, the changes
in the exposure may be recorded.
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming during
movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure changes or lens
sounds to be recorded, or loss of focus.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie recording.
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be caused by
fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during movie recording. Also,
changes in the exposure (brightness) or color tone may be recorded. In [
] mode,
using a slower shutter speed may reduce the problem.
983
The subject looks distorted during movie recording.
If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving subject, the
image may look distorted.
Sound is not recorded in movies.
Sound is not recorded in High Frame Rate movies.
A time code is not added.
Time codes are not added when you record High Frame Rate movies with [Count up] in
[
: Time code] set to [Free run] ( ). Additionally, no time code is added to HDMI
video output ( ).
Time codes advance faster than the actual time.
Time codes in High Frame Rate movie recording advance 4 sec. per second ( ).
I cannot take still photos during movie recording.
Still photos cannot be taken during movie recording. To shoot still photos, stop recording
the movie, then select a shooting mode for still photos.
I cannot record movies during still photo shooting.
It may not be possible to record movies during still photo shooting if operations such as
extended image display increase the camera's internal temperature. Turn off the camera
or take other measures, and wait until the camera cools down.
Lowering the [ ] movie recording quality may enable movie recording.
Cannot record movies.
Format (initialize) the card with this camera ( ).
Use an SDXC card as card [ ].
The camera vibrates.
Image stabilization by the camera may make the camera seem to vibrate. This does not
indicate damage.
984
Problems with wireless features
Cannot pair with a smartphone.
Use a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specification Version 4.1 or later.
Turn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen.
Pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone's Bluetooth settings screen.
Install the dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) on the smartphone ( ).
Pairing with a previously paired smartphone is not possible if pairing information
registered for another camera remains on the smartphone. In this case, remove the
camera's registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on the smartphone and try
pairing again ( ).
Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.
With a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting and playback may not
be possible. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.
Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.
Even with a combination of the same camera and smartphone, if you have changed the
settings or selected a different setting, reconnection may not be established even after
selecting the same SSID. In this case, delete the camera connection settings from the
Wi-Fi settings on the smartphone and set up a connection again.
A connection may not be established if Camera Connect is running when you
reconfigure connection settings. In this case, quit Camera Connect for a moment and
then restart it.
985
Operation problems
Settings change when I switch from still photo shooting to movie
recording or vice versa.
Separate settings are retained for use when shooting still photos and recording movies.
Settings cannot be changed with <
>, < >, < >, < >, < >,
<
>, or < >.
Set the power/multi-function lock switch to < > and release the multi-function lock
( ).
Check the [ : Multi function lock] setting ( ).
Settings cannot be changed with <
>.
Set [ : Smart controller] to [Enable] or [Disable vertical only].
Settings cannot be changed with <
>, < >, < > or < > for
vertical shooting.
Set [ : Smart controller] to [Enable].
Set [ : Vertical shooting controls] to [On] or [Disable using lock].
Touch operation is not possible.
Make sure [ : Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive] ( ).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
In movie recording, check the [ : Shutter btn function for movies] setting ( ).
Check the [ : Customize buttons] and [ : Customize dials] settings ( ).
986
Display problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.
Tabs and items on the menu screen vary for still photos and movies.
The display starts with [
] My Menu, or the [ ] tab alone is displayed.
[Menu display] on the [ ] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or [Display only
My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] ( ).
The file name's first character is an underscore (“_”).
Set [ : Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first character will be an
underscore ( ).
The fourth character in the file name changes.
[ : File name] is set to [*** + image size]. Select either the camera's unique file name
or the file name registered in User setting 1 ( ).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start from
0001 ( ).
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
Make sure the correct date and time are set ( ).
Check the time zone and daylight saving time ( ).
The date and time are not in the image.
The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and time are recorded
in the image data as shooting information. When you print photos, this information can
be used to include the date and time (
).
[###] is displayed.
If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the camera can
display, [###] will be displayed.
987
The screen does not display a clear image.
If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may look black in
high temperatures, but it will return to normal at room temperature.
988
Playback problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
[ : Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] ( ).
A red box is displayed on the image.
[ : AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] ( ).
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are played back:
• Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.
• Cropped images.
• Images from HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable].
The image cannot be erased.
If the image is protected, it cannot be erased ( ).
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
The camera may not be able to play back images taken with another camera.
Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Only few images can be played back.
The images have been filtered for playback with [ : Set image search conditions]
( ). Clear the image search conditions.
Mechanical sounds or sounds of camera operations can be heard
during movie playback.
The camera's built-in microphone may also record mechanical sounds of the lens or
sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera or lens
is operated during movie recording. If so, it may help reduce these sounds if you use an
external microphone equipped with an output plug and position it away from the camera
and lens.
989
Movie playback stops by itself.
Extended movie playback or movie playback under high ambient temperature may
cause the camera's internal temperature to rise, and movie playback may stop
automatically.
If this happens, playback is disabled until the camera's internal temperature decreases,
so turn off the power and let the camera cool down a while.
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
Significant change in the exposure level during autoexposure movie recording may
cause recording to stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes. In this case, record
in [
] mode ( ).
The movie is played in slow motion.
High Frame Rate movies are recorded at 29.97 fps or 25.00 fps, so they are played in
slow motion at 1/4 speed.
No picture appears on the television.
Make sure [ : Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] correctly for the video
system of your television.
Make sure the HDMI cable's plug is inserted all the way in ( ).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie recording.
If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created automatically ( ).
However, if you use an SDXC card formatted with the camera, you can record a movie
in a single file even if it exceeds 4 GB.
My card reader does not recognize the card.
Depending on the card reader used and the computer's operating system, SDXC cards
may not be correctly recognized. In this case, connect the camera to the computer with
the interface cable, then import the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS
software,
).
990
Images cannot be resized or cropped.
This camera cannot resize JPEG images, RAW images, or frame-grab images from
4K movies saved as still photos ( ).
This camera cannot crop RAW images or frame-grab images from 4K movies saved as
still photos ( ).
Dots of light appear on the image.
White, red, or blue dots of light may appear in captured images if the sensor is affected
by cosmic rays or similar factors. Their appearance may be reduced by performing
[Clean now
] under [ : Sensor cleaning] ( ).
991
Sensor cleaning problems
The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.
Although there is a mechanical sound from the shutter during cleaning after [Clean now
] is selected, no image is recorded to the card ( ).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
Repeatedly turning the power switch < > and < > within a short period may
prevent the [
] icon from being displayed ( ).
992
Computer connection problems
I cannot import images to a computer.
Install EOS Utility (EOS software) on the computer ( ).
Make sure the main EOS Utility window is displayed.
Check the version of the application.
Problems with the multi-function shoe
A message was displayed on the screen when I attached an accessory.
If [Communication error Reattach accessory] is displayed, reattach the accessory. In
case this message is displayed again after reattachment, make sure the terminals of the
multi-function shoe and accessory are clean and dry. If you cannot remove the dirt or
moisture, contact a Canon Service Center.
If [Accessory unavailable status] is displayed, check the terminals of the multi-function
shoe and accessory and make sure the accessory is not damaged.
993
Error Codes
(1) Error number
(2) Cause and countermeasures
If there is a problem with the camera, an error message will appear. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
If the problem persists, write down the error code (Err xx) and request service.
994
ISO Speed in Movie Recording
In [
], [ ], and [ ] mode
ISO speed is set automatically in a range of ISO 100–25600.
Setting [Max for Auto] in [ : ISO speed settings] to [H(204800)] ( ) expands the
maximum speed in the automatic setting range to H (equivalent to ISO 204800).
The minimum speed in the automatic setting range is ISO 200 when [ : Highlight
tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced] ( ). The maximum limit is not
expanded, even when expansion is set in [Max for Auto].
The minimum speed in the automatic setting range is ISO 800 when [ : Canon Log
settings] is set to [On (
)] ( ). ISO 100–400 represents an expanded ISO speed
(L).
In [ ] mode
With ISO speed set to [AUTO], ISO speed is set automatically in a range of ISO 100–
25600.
Setting [Max for Auto] in [ : ISO speed settings] to [H(204800)] ( ) expands the
maximum speed in the automatic setting range to H (equivalent to ISO 204800).
ISO speed can be set manually in a range of ISO 100–25600. Setting [ISO speed
range] in [
: ISO speed settings] to [H(204800)] ( ) expands the maximum
speed in the manual setting range to H (equivalent to ISO 204800).
The minimum speed in the automatic or manual setting range is ISO 200 when [ :
Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced] ( ). Even when ISO speed
expansion is set, the maximum limit will not be expanded.
The minimum speed in the automatic setting range is ISO 800 when [ : Canon Log
settings] is set to [On (
)] ( ). ISO 100–400 represents an expanded ISO speed
(L).
995
Information Display
LCD Panel
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Movie Recording Screen
Playback Screen
LCD Panel
Still photo/movie standby screen 1
(1) Eye control
(2) Shooting mode
(3) Battery level
(4) Flash exposure compensation
(5) Exposure compensation
(6) Bluetooth function
(7) Wi-Fi /wired LAN
(8) Shutter speed
(9) Aperture value
(10) Exposure level indicator/Exposure compensation amount/AEB range
(11) ISO speed
(12) Highlight tone priority
996
Still photo/movie standby screen 2
(1) AF area
(2) Drive mode
(3) AF operation
(4) Metering mode
(5) Card slot
(6) Movie recording mode
(7) White balance
(8) Picture Style
(9) Movie recording size
(10) Movie recording format
997
Movie standby screen 3
(1) AF area
(2) Image Stabilizer (IS mode)
(3) Card slot
(4) White balance
(5) Picture Style/Canon Log
(6) Movie recording time available
998
Movie recording in progress
(1) Movie recording mode
(2) Battery level
(3) Recording in progress/External recording in progress (10-bit, via HDMI)
(4) Elapsed recording time
999
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Each time you press the <
> button, the information display will change.
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
1000
(1) Maximum burst
(2) Number of available shots/Sec. until self-timer shoots
(3) Focus bracketing/HDR/Multiple exposures/Multi Shot Noise Reduction/Bulb timer/Interval
timer
(4) Shooting mode
(5) AF area
(6) AF operation
(7) Card
(8) Image quality
(9) Drive mode
(10) Metering mode
(11) Accessory compatible with the multi-function shoe attached
(12) No. of remaining shots for focus bracketing, multiple exposures, or interval timer
(13) Movie recording time available
(14) Battery level
(15) Image Stabilizer (IS mode)
(16) Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
(17) Set AF point to center
(18) Quick Control button
(19) Anti-flicker shooting
(20) White balance/White balance correction
(21) Picture Style
(22) Subject to detect
(23) Still photo cropping/Aspect ratio
(24) Wi-Fi signal strength
(25) Bluetooth function
(26) Electronic level
(27) AF point (Flexible Zone AF 1)
(28) Wi-Fi function
(29) Airplane mode
1001
(30) AEB/FEB
(31) View Assist
(32) HDR PQ
(33) Flash ready/FE lock/High-speed sync
(34) Electronic shutter
(35) Touch Shutter/Create folder
(36) AE lock
(37) Shutter speed/Multi-function lock warning
(38) Aperture value
(39) Overheating warning
(40) Still photo image quality warning
(41) Focal length
(42) Display simulation
(43) Magnify button
(44) ISO speed
(45) Highlight tone priority
(46) Exposure compensation
(47) Exposure level indicator
1002
Movie Recording Screen
Each time you press the <
> button, the information display will change.
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
1004
(1) Battery level
(2) Movie recording time available/Elapsed recording time
(3) Shooting mode
(4) Image Stabilizer (IS mode)
(5) AF area
(6) Audio recording level indicator (manual input)
(7) Movie recording size
(8) Audio recording level (manual input)
(9) Headphone volume
(10) HDR movie
(11) Movie Servo AF
(12) Electronic level
(13) AF point (Flexible Zone AF 1)
(14) Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
(15) Set AF point to center
(16) Quick Control button
(17) [
] Movie shooting button
(18) Card for recording/playback
(19) White balance/White balance correction
(20) Picture Style
(21) Subject to detect
(22) Wi-Fi signal strength
(23) Magnify button
(24) Bluetooth function
(25) Wi-Fi function
(26) Airplane mode
1005
(27) Overheat control
(28) Movie self-timer
(29) AE lock
(30) Shutter speed
(31) Aperture value
(32) Canon Log
(33) Overheating
(34) Overheating warning
(35) Focal length
(36) ISO speed
(37) Highlight tone priority
(38) Exposure compensation
(39) Exposure level indicator (metering levels)
Caution
You can specify the information displayed in response to pressing the < >
button ( ).
The electronic level is not displayed when the camera is connected via HDMI to a
television.
The electronic level, grid lines, and histogram cannot be displayed during movie
recording (and if they are currently displayed, recording a movie will clear the
display).
Time available per recording changes to elapsed time after movie recording begins.
1006
Note
Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
1007
Playback Screen
Each time you press the <
> button, the information display will change.
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Basic information display for still photos
1008
(1) HDR View Assist
(2) Bluetooth function
(3) Wi-Fi signal strength
(4) Wi-Fi function
(5) Battery level
(6) Current image no./Total images/No. of images found
(7) Shutter speed
(8) Aperture value
(9) Exposure compensation amount
(10) Already sent to a computer/smartphone
(11) Voice memo
(12) Rating
(13) Image protection
(14) Card no.
(15) Folder no.-File no.
(16) Image quality/Edited image/Cropping/Frame Grab
(17) ISO speed
(18) Highlight tone priority
Caution
If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may not be
displayed.
It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other
cameras.
1009
Detailed information display for still photos
(1) Aperture value
(2) Picture Style/Canon Log/Settings
(3) Shutter speed
(4) White balance correction/Bracketing
(5) Shooting mode/Multiple exposure/Frame Grab
(6) White balance
(7) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(8) First image of scene
(9) Image quality/Edited image/Cropping
(10) Exposure compensation amount
(11) Shooting date and time
(12) Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
(13) Scroll bar
(14) ISO speed
(15) Highlight tone priority
(16) Metering mode
(17) File size
(18) Flash exposure compensation amount/Bounce/HDR shooting/Multi Shot Noise Reduction
* For simplicity, explanations are omitted for items also included in
Basic information display for still photos, which are not shown
here.
* For images captured in RAW+JPEG/HEIF shooting, indicates RAW file sizes.
* Lines indicating the image area are displayed for images taken with the aspect ratio set (
) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set
for image quality.
* Images with added cropping information are displayed cropped.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, [
] will be displayed.
* [
] indicates images shot with bounce flash photography.
* The dynamic range adjustment amount is shown for images captured in HDR shooting.
* [
] indicates images captured in multiple-exposure shooting.
1010
* [ ] indicates images processed with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* [
] indicates images created and saved by performing RAW image processing, resizing, cropping, or frame-grabbing.
* [
] indicates images cropped and then saved.
1011
Detailed information display for movies
(1) Movie playback
(2) Movie recording mode
(3) High Frame Rate
(4) Movie recording size
(5) Video frame rate
(6) Movie compression method
(7) Movie orientation information
(8) Recording time/Time code
*
For simplicity, explanations are omitted for items that are also included in
Basic information display for still photos and Detailed
information display for still photos, which are not shown here.
Note
During movie playback, “*, *” is displayed for the [Fineness] and [Threshold]
parameters of [Sharpness] in [
: Picture Style].
1012
Specifications
Type
Type: Digital single-lens non-reflex AF/AE camera
Lens mount: Canon RF mount
Compatible lenses: Canon RF lens group
* Using mount adapter EF-EOS R: Canon EF or EF-S lenses (excluding EF-M lenses)
Lens focal length: Same as the focal length indicated on the lens
* Using EF-S lenses: Approx. 1.6 times the indicated focal length
Image sensor
Type: Full-frame back-illuminated stacked CMOS sensor
Effective pixels
*1*2
Max. approx. 24.1 megapixels
Total pixels
*1
Approx. 26.7 megapixels
Screen size Approx. 36.0 × 24.0 mm
Dual Pixel CMOS AF Supported
* 1: Rounded to the nearest 100,000.
* 2: Using RF or EF lenses.
The effective pixel count may be lower with certain lenses and image processing.
Recording system
Image recording format: Compliant to Design rule for Camera File system 2.0 and Exif
2.31*
* Supports time difference information
Image type and extension
Image type Extension
Still photos
JPEG JPG
HEIF HIF
RAW
CR3
C-RAW
Movies
ALL-I, IPB MP4
RAW CRM
1013
Still photo recording
Still photo pixel count
Image size
Resolution (Pixels)
Aspect ratio
3:2
1.6× (crop)
*1
1:1 4:3 16:9
JPEG/HEIF
L
24.0
megapixels
(6000 × 4000)
Approx. 9.3
megapixels
(3744 × 2496)
16.0
megapixels
(4000 × 4000)
Approx. 21.3
megapixels
*2
(5328 × 4000)
Approx. 20.2
megapixels
*2
(6000 × 3368)
M
Approx. 10.6
megapixels
(3984 × 2656)
Approx. 7.1
megapixels
(2656 × 2656)
Approx. 9.5
megapixels
(3552 × 2664)
Approx. 8.9
megapixels
*2
(3984 × 2240)
S1
Approx. 5.9
megapixels
(2976 × 1984)
Approx. 3.9
megapixels
(1984 × 1984)
Approx. 5.3
megapixels
(2656 × 1992)
Approx. 5.0
megapixels
*2
(2976 × 1680)
S2
Approx. 3.8
megapixels
(2400 × 1600)
Approx. 3.8
megapixels
(2400 × 1600)
Approx. 2.6
megapixels
(1600 × 1600)
Approx. 3.4
megapixels
*2
(2112 × 1600)
Approx. 3.2
megapixels
*2
(2400 × 1344)
RAW
/
24.0
megapixels
(6000 × 4000)
Approx. 9.3
megapixels
(3744 × 2496)
24.0 megapixels
*2
(6000 × 4000)
* Values for recorded pixels are rounded off to the nearest 100,000th.
* RAW/C-RAW images are generated in [3:2], and the set aspect ratio is appended.
* JPEG images are generated in the set aspect ratio.
* These aspect ratios (M / S1 / S2) and pixel counts also apply to resizing.
* 1: Angle of view of approx. 1.6 times the focal length.
* 2: Aspect ratios are slightly different for these image sizes.
1014
Still photo file size / Number of shots available / Maximum burst for continuous
shooting
When using the electronic shutter
Image quality
File size
[Approx. MB]
Available
shots
[Approx.]
*1
Maximum burst [Approx.]
CFexpress
card
*1
SD card
*2
SD card
*3
[Hi-
speed]
JPEG
*4
L 8.7 37560 540 410 530
M 4.7 67860 530 530 530
S1 3.2 99010 530 530 530
S2 1.9 163960 530 530 530
HEIF
*5
L 8.1 34800 460 420 450
M 4.7 59400 580 560 560
S1 3.4 85030 590 560 560
S2 1.8 143310 590 560 570
RAW
*4
29.3 11860 150 150 150
15.1 24130 420 320 420
RAW+JPEG
*4
+L
29.3+8.7 9010 150 140 150
+L
15.1+8.7 14690 400 260 330
RAW+HEIF
*5
+L
29.1+8.1 7970 150 140 150
+L
15.4+8.1 12240 290 290 290
* 1: Number of shots available and maximum burst for CFexpress cards apply to 325 GB CFexpress cards
conforming to Canon testing standards.
* 2: Maximum burst for SD cards applies to 32 GB UHS-I SD cards conforming to Canon testing standards.
* 3: Maximum burst for Hi-speed SD cards applies to 32 GB UHS-II SD cards conforming to Canon testing
standards.
* 4: When set to [HDR shooting
: Disable].
*
5: When set to [HDR shooting
: Enable].
* Maximum burst as measured under conditions conforming to Canon testing standards (High-speed
continuous shooting+ in One-Shot AF mode, JPEG/HEIF image quality of 8, ISO 100, and Standard Picture
Style).
* File size, number of shots available, and maximum burst vary depending on shooting conditions (including
cropping/aspect ratio, JPEG/HEIF image quality, subject, memory card brand, ISO speed, Picture Style, and
Custom Functions).
1015
When using the mechanical shutter/electronic first-curtain
Image quality
File size
[Approx. MB]
Available
shots
[Approx.]
*1
Maximum burst [Approx.]
CFexpress
card
*1
SD card
*2
SD card
*3
[Hi-
speed]
JPEG
*4
L
See “
When using the
electronic shutter.”
1,000 or more 980 1,000 or more
M 1,000 or more 1,000 or more 1,000 or more
S1 1,000 or more 1,000 or more 1,000 or more
S2 1,000 or more 1,000 or more 1,000 or more
HEIF
*5
L 1,000 or more 950 1,000 or more
M 1,000 or more 1,000 or more 1,000 or more
S1 1,000 or more 1,000 or more 1,000 or more
S2 1,000 or more 1,000 or more 1,000 or more
RAW
*4
1,000 or more 160 290
1,000 or more 410 1,000 or more
RAW+JPEG
*4
+L
1,000 or more 140 140
+L
1,000 or more 300 770
RAW+HEIF
*5
+L
300 150 170
+L
600 310 600
* 1: Number of shots available and maximum burst for CFexpress cards apply to 325 GB CFexpress cards
conforming to Canon testing standards.
* 2: Maximum burst for SD cards applies to 32 GB UHS-I SD cards conforming to Canon testing standards.
* 3: Maximum burst for Hi-speed SD cards applies to 32 GB UHS-II SD cards conforming to Canon testing
standards.
* 4: When set to [HDR shooting
: Disable].
*
5: When set to [HDR shooting
: Enable].
* Maximum burst as measured under conditions conforming to Canon testing standards (High-speed
continuous shooting+ in One-Shot AF mode, JPEG/HEIF image quality of 8, ISO 100, and Standard Picture
Style).
* File size, number of shots available, and maximum burst vary depending on shooting conditions (including
cropping/aspect ratio, JPEG/HEIF image quality, subject, memory card brand, ISO speed, Picture Style, and
Custom Functions).
1016
Movie recording
Movie recording format: MP4, RAW
Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, and file size
Canon Log 3: Off, HDR PQ: Off
Movie recording size
Total recording time (Approx.)
Movie bit
rate
(Approx.
Mbps)
File size
(Approx.
MB/min.)
64 GB 256 GB 1 TB
6K RAW
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
RAW
(Standard)
3 min. 13 min. 50 min. 2600 18728
RAW (Light) 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 13 min. 1800 13006
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
RAW
(Standard)
4 min. 16 min. 1 hr. 6 min. 2000 14376
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
RAW
(Standard)
5 min. 21 min. 1 hr. 22 min. 1600 11503
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
RAW (Light) 9 min. 37 min. 2 hr. 26 min. 900 6508
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
RAW (Light) 11 min. 46 min. 3 hr. 3 min. 720 5209
4K DCI
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
ALL-I 9 min. 36 min. 2 hr. 21 min. 940 6734
IPB
(Standard)
36 min. 2 hr. 27 min. 9 hr. 35 min. 230 1656
IPB (Light) 1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 40 min.
18 hr. 17
min.
120 869
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
ALL-I 18 min. 1 hr. 12 min. 4 hr. 42 min. 470 3373
IPB
(Standard)
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 40 min.
18 hr. 17
min.
120 869
IPB (Light) 2 hr. 18 min. 9 hr. 14 min. 36 hr. 6 min. 60 440
119.88 fps
100.00 fps
ALL-I 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 1880 13447
1017
4K UHD
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
ALL-I 9 min. 36 min. 2 hr. 21 min. 940 6734
IPB
(Standard)
36 min. 2 hr. 27 min. 9 hr. 35 min. 230 1656
IPB (Light) 1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 40 min.
18 hr. 17
min.
120 869
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
23.98 fps
ALL-I 18 min. 1 hr. 12 min. 4 hr. 42 min. 470 3373
IPB
(Standard)
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 40 min.
18 hr. 17
min.
120 869
IPB (Light) 2 hr. 18 min. 9 hr. 14 min. 36 hr. 6 min. 60 440
119.88 fps
100.00 fps
ALL-I 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 1880 13447
Full HD
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
ALL-I 47 min. 3 hr. 8 min.
12 hr. 14
min.
180 1298
IPB
(Standard)
2 hr. 18 min. 9 hr. 14 min. 36 hr. 6 min. 60 440
IPB (Light) 3 hr. 53 min.
15 hr. 34
min.
60 hr. 49
min.
35 261
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
23.98 fps
ALL-I 1 hr. 33 min. 6 hr. 12 min.
24 hr. 16
min.
90 655
IPB
(Standard)
4 hr. 30 min. 18 hr. 2 min.
70 hr. 27
min.
30 226
IPB (Light)
11 hr. 35
min.
46 hr. 23
min.
181 hr. 13
min.
12 88
119.88 fps
100.00 fps
ALL-I 23 min. 1 hr. 34 min. 6 hr. 10 min. 360 2575
* Bit rate only applies to video output, not audio or metadata.
* The same values apply to 4K DCI, 4K UHD, and Full HD whether [Movie cropping] is set to [Enable] or
[Disable].
* Movie recording stops when the maximum recording time per movie is reached.
* Sound is not recorded for approx. the last two frames when the compression method for movie recording
quality is IPB or IPB Light (audio: AAC) or [C.Fn 6 Audio compression] is set to [Enable]. Moreover, the
video and sound may be slightly out of sync when movies are played back in Windows.
1018
Canon Log 3: On, or HDR PQ: On
Movie recording size
Total recording time (Approx.)
Movie bit
rate
(Approx.
Mbps)
File size
(Approx.
MB/min.)
64 GB 256 GB 1 TB
6K RAW
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
RAW
(Standard)
3 min. 13 min. 50 min. 2600 18728
RAW (Light) 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 13 min. 1800 13006
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
RAW
(Standard)
4 min. 16 min. 1 hr. 6 min. 2000 14376
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
RAW
(Standard)
5 min. 21 min. 1 hr. 22 min. 1600 11503
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
RAW (Light) 9 min. 37 min. 2 hr. 26 min. 900 6508
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
RAW (Light) 11 min. 46 min. 3 hr. 3 min. 720 5209
4K DCI
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
ALL-I 8 min. 34 min. 2 hr. 13 min. 1000 7164
IPB
(Standard)
24 min. 1 hr. 39 min. 6 hr. 30 min. 340 2443
IPB (Light) 49 min. 3 hr. 18 min.
12 hr. 57
min.
170 1227
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
ALL-I 18 min. 1 hr. 12 min. 4 hr. 42 min. 470 3373
IPB
(Standard)
49 min. 3 hr. 18 min.
12 hr. 57
min.
170 1227
IPB (Light) 1 hr. 38 min. 6 hr. 34 min.
25 hr. 40
min.
85 619
119.88 fps
100.00 fps
ALL-I 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 1880 13447
4K UHD
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
ALL-I 8 min. 34 min. 2 hr. 13 min. 1000 7164
IPB
(Standard)
24 min. 1 hr. 39 min. 6 hr. 30 min. 340 2443
IPB (Light) 49 min. 3 hr. 18 min.
12 hr. 57
min.
170 1227
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
23.98 fps
ALL-I 18 min. 1 hr. 12 min. 4 hr. 42 min. 470 3373
IPB
(Standard)
49 min. 3 hr. 18 min.
12 hr. 57
min.
170 1227
IPB (Light) 1 hr. 38 min. 6 hr. 34 min.
25 hr. 40
min.
85 619
119.88 fps
100.00 fps
ALL-I 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 1880 13447
1019
Full HD
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
ALL-I 36 min. 2 hr. 27 min. 9 hr. 35 min. 230 1656
IPB
(Standard)
1 hr. 33 min. 6 hr. 12 min.
24 hr. 16
min.
90 655
IPB (Light) 2 hr. 45 min. 11 hr. 2 min. 43 hr. 7 min. 50 369
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
23.98 fps
ALL-I 1 hr. 2 min. 4 hr. 9 min.
16 hr. 16
min.
135 977
IPB
(Standard)
3 hr. 3 min.
12 hr. 13
min.
47 hr. 45
min.
45 333
IPB (Light) 5 hr. 1 min. 20 hr. 7 min.
78 hr. 37
min.
28 202
119.88 fps
100.00 fps
ALL-I 18 min. 1 hr. 12 min. 4 hr. 43 min. 470 3362
* Bit rate only applies to video output, not audio or metadata.
* The same values apply to 4K DCI, 4K UHD, and Full HD whether [Movie cropping] is set to [Enable] or
[Disable].
* Movie recording stops when the maximum recording time per movie is reached.
* Sound is not recorded for approx. the last two frames when the compression method for movie recording
quality is IPB or IPB Light (audio: AAC) or [C.Fn 6 Audio compression] is set to [Enable]. Moreover, the
video and sound may be slightly out of sync when movies are played back in Windows.
1020
Card performance requirements (Movie recording) [Write/Read speed]
Movie recording size
CFexpress card SD card
8 bit / 10 bit 8 bit 10 bit
6K RAW
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
RAW (Standard)
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B
[400 MB/s or
higher]
RAW (Light)
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
RAW (Standard)
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
RAW (Standard)
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
RAW (Light)
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B
[200 MB/s or
higher]
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
RAW (Light)
4K
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
ALL-I
IPB (Standard)
CFexpress 2.0
UHS Speed
Class 3 or higher
Video Speed
Class V60 or
higher
IPB (Light)
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
24.00 fps
23.98 fps
ALL-I Video Speed Class V60 or higher
IPB (Standard)
UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
IPB (Light)
119.88 fps
100.00 fps
ALL-I
CFexpress 2.0
Type-B
[400 MB/s or
higher]
Full HD
59.94 fps
50.00 fps
ALL-I
CFexpress 2.0
UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
IPB (Standard)
SD Speed Class
10 or higher
UHS Speed
Class 3 or higher
IPB (Light)
29.97 fps
25.00 fps
23.98 fps
ALL-I UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
IPB (Standard) SD Speed Class 6 or higher
IPB (Light) SD Speed Class 4 or higher
119.88 fps
100.00 fps
ALL-I Video Speed Class V60 or higher
1021
Built-in and external microphones
Built-in microphone: Monaural microphone
External microphone: Connected to the multi-function shoe or 3.5 mm diameter stereo
mini jack
Recording media
Recording media:
CFexpress memory card
* Type B
* VPG400 support
SD memory card
* Compatible with UHS-II
Autofocus
Focusing method: Dual Pixel CMOS AF
Focusing operation
Still photo shooting Movie recording
AF operation
One-Shot AF
Servo AF
One-Shot AF
Movie Servo AF
Manual focus (MF) Supported Supported
Lens compatibility based on AF area: Refer to the Canon website
Number of AF area available for automatic selection
AF area Horizontal: Approx. 100%, Vertical: Approx. 100%
Number of AF
zones
Still photos Max. 1053 zones (39 × 27)
Movies Max. 819 zones (39 × 21)
* May vary depending on settings.
Selectable positions for AF point
AF area Horizontal: Approx. 90%, Vertical: Approx. 100%
Numbers of
positions
Still photos Max. 4779 positions (81 × 59)
Movies Max. 3969 positions (81 × 49)
* When set to [1-point AF] and selected using the Multi-controller.
1022
Focusing brightness range (still photos): EV –7.5 to 20 (with an f/1.2 lens,* center AF
point, and One-Shot AF, at room temperature, and ISO 100)
* Except RF lenses with a Defocus Smoothing (DS) coating
Focusing brightness range (movies): EV –4.5 to 20 (with an f/1.2 lens,* center AF point,
and One-Shot AF, at room temperature, ISO 100, and 29.97 fps)
* Except RF lenses with a Defocus Smoothing (DS) coating
Eye control
The feature can be used in still photo shooting but not movie recording.
Detection type: Line-of-sight detection using corneal reflections (Purkinje images) acquired
using infrared LEDs and an image of the user's pupil
Viewfinder
Type: OLED color electronic viewfinder
Screen size: 0.5 inch
Dot count: Approx. 5,760,000 dots
Magnification / angle of view: Approx. 0.76× / Approx. 35.7° (with 50 mm lens at infinity,
−1 m
−1
)
Coverage: Approx. 100% (at L image size, an aspect ratio of 3:2, and approx. 23 mm
eyepoint)
Eyepoint: Approx. 23 mm (at –1 m
–1
from eyepiece lens end)
Dioptric adjustment: Approx. –4.0 to +2.0 m
–1
(dpt)
Screen
Type: TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Screen size: 3.2 inch (aspect ratio of 3:2)
Dot count: Approx. 4,150,000 dots
Angle of view: Approx. 170° vertically and horizontally
Coverage: Approx. 100% vertically and horizontally (at L image size and an aspect ratio of
3:2)
Touch-screen: Capacitive sensing
LCD panel
Type: Reflective memory LCD
Display format: Dot-matrix display
Dot count: 128 × 128 dots
HDMI output
HDMI video / audio output: HDMI micro OUT terminal (Type D)
* HDMI CEC not supported
HDMI resolution: Auto / 1080p
1023
Exposure control
Metering functions under various shooting conditions
Item Still photo shooting Movie recording
Metering sensor
384-zone (24×16) metering using image sensor output signals
*1
Shooting mode
Fv / P / Tv / Av / M / BULB / C1 / C2 /
C3
P / Tv / Av / M / C1 / C2 / C3
Metering mode
Evaluative
metering
○
○
*
When faces are detected
Partial metering
○
*
Approx. 5.9% in the center of the screen
Spot metering
○
*
Approx. 2.9% in the center of the screen
Center-weighted
average
metering
○
○
* When no faces are detected
* When set to Canon Log 3
Metering brightness range (at room
temperature, ISO 100)
EV –3 to 20 EV –1 to 20
* 1: Same applies when set to [1.6x (crop)].
ISO speed (recommended exposure index) in still photo shooting
Manual ISO speed setting for still photos
ISO speed
Normal ISO speed ISO 100–102400 (in 1/3 or 1-stop increments)
Expanded ISO speed L (equivalent to ISO 50), H (equivalent to ISO 204800)
* When set to [Highlight tone priority], the available manual setting range is ISO 200–102400.
* Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set in HDR mode or for HDR shooting (HDR PQ).
Manual ISO speed setting range for still photos
ISO speed range ISO speed
Minimum L (equivalent to ISO 50) to ISO 102400 (in 1-stop increments)
Maximum ISO 100 to H (equivalent to ISO 204800, in 1-stop increments)
ISO Auto setting range for still photos
Auto range ISO speed
Minimum ISO 100–51200 (in 1-stop increments)
Maximum ISO 200–102400 (in 1-stop increments)
1024
ISO Auto details for still photos
Shooting mode No flash Using flash
P
ISO 100
*1, *2
–102400
*2
ISO 100
*1, *2
–6400
*2, *3
Tv
Av
M
BULB
ISO 400
*4
ISO 400
*4
* 1: ISO 200 when set to [Highlight tone priority: Enable/Enhanced].
*
2: Varies depending on the [Maximum] and [Minimum] settings for [Auto range].
* 3: ISO 1600 when using a lens that is not compatible with “Variable control of maximum ISO Auto limit for
E-TTL”.
* 4: If outside the setting range, changed to the value most close to ISO 400.
Variable control of maximum ISO Auto limit for E-TTL: Supported
ISO speed (recommended exposure index) in movie recording
Manual ISO speed setting for movies (in M mode)
Canon Log 3 ISO speed
Normal ISO
speed
Off ISO 100–25600 (in 1/3 or 1-stop increments)
On ISO 800–25600 (in 1/3 or 1-stop increments)
Expanded ISO
speed
Off H (equivalent to ISO 32000, 40000, 51200, 64000, 80000, or 102400)
On
L (equivalent to ISO 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, or 640)
H (equivalent to ISO 32000, 40000, 51200, 64000, 80000, or 102400)
* Maximum ISO speed when set manually corresponds to the [ISO speed range] setting.
* When set to [Highlight tone priority], the setting range is ISO 200–25600.
* Expanded ISO speeds are not available in HDR PQ, HDR, RAW or High-frame rate movie recording.
* H expansion is not available when set to RAW movie recording with Canon Log 3, but L expansion is
available.
* The default setting range when set to Canon Log 3 is L and ISO 800–25600.
1025
Automatic ISO speed setting for movies (in P / Tv / Av mode, and in M mode with ISO
Auto)
Canon Log 3 ISO speed
Normal ISO
speed
Off ISO 100–25600 (in 1/3 or 1-stop increments)
On ISO 800–25600 (in 1/3 or 1-stop increments)
Expanded ISO
speed
Off
H (equivalent to ISO 32000, 40000, 51200, 64000, 80000, or 102400)
On
* Maximum ISO speed when set automatically corresponds to the [Max for Auto] setting.
*
When set to [Highlight tone priority], the setting range is ISO 200–25600.
* Expanded ISO speeds are not available in HDR PQ, HDR, RAW or High-frame rate movie recording.
Manual ISO speed setting range for movies
ISO speed range ISO speed
Minimum ISO 100–25600 or H (equivalent to ISO 51200, in 1-stop increments)
Maximum ISO 200–25600 or H (equivalent to ISO 51200 or 102400, in 1-stop increments)
Maximum ISO Auto setting for movies
ISO speed
Max for Auto
ISO 6400–25600 or H (equivalent to ISO 51200 or 102400, in 1-stop
increments)
1026
Shutter
Still photo shooting
Type:
Rolling shutter, using the image sensor
Electronically controlled focal-plane shutter
Shutter mode: Mechanical shutter / Electronic 1st-curtain / Electronic shutter
Shutter speed
Mechanical shutter / Electronic 1st-
curtain
1/8000 to 30 sec. (in 1/3 or 1/2-stop increments), bulb exposures
Electronic shutter
1/64000 sec., 1/32000 sec., 1/16000 sec., 1/12800 sec., 1/10000 sec., or
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (in 1/3 or 1/2-stop increments), bulb exposures
* In electronic shutter shooting, shutter speeds of 1/10000 sec. or faster are only available in Tv or M mode
(up to 1/8000 sec. in Fv, P, or Av mode).
*
Adjustments by the camera when the shutter speed is set to 1/64000 or 1/32000 sec. in electronic shutter
shooting may involve the aperture value or ISO speed in some shooting conditions, because exposure
cannot be controlled in 1/3 or 1/2-stop increments.
* Maximum shutter speed is 1/8000 sec. in HDR mode or with focus bracketing or high-speed sync, or when
set to maintain the same exposure when the aperture value changes.
X-sync speed
Mechanical shutter 1/200 sec.
Electronic 1st curtain 1/250 sec.
Electronic shutter 1/180 sec.
Movie recording
Type: Rolling shutter, using the image sensor
Shutter speed: 1/4000
–1/25* sec.
* Varies by frame rate; for details, see
Shutter Speed.
Movies in Tv or M mode: 1/4000–1/8* sec.
* Varies by shooting mode and frame rate.
* Minimum speed is 1/125 sec. (NTSC) or 1/100 sec. (PAL) when set to [High Frame Rate: Enable].
1027
Image stabilization (IS mode): Provided
Drive
Drive mode and continuous shooting speed
Drive modes AF operation Mechanical shutter Electronic 1st curtain Electronic shutter
Single shooting ○ ○ ○
High-speed continuous
shooting+
One-Shot AF
Max. approx. 12
shots/sec.
Max. approx. 12
shots/sec.
Max. approx. 30
shots/sec.
Servo AF
High-speed continuous
shooting
One-Shot AF
Max. approx. 6.0
shots/sec.
Max. approx. 8.0
shots/sec.
Max. approx. 15
shots/sec.
Servo AF
Low-speed continuous
shooting
One-Shot AF
Max. approx. 3.0
shots/sec.
Max. approx. 3.0
shots/sec.
Max. approx. 3.0
shots/sec.
Servo AF
Self-timer: 10 sec. / remote control ○ ○ ○
Self-timer: 2 sec. / remote control ○ ○ ○
External flash
Accessory shoe contacts: 21 pins for accessories compatible with the multi-function shoe,
5 pins for X-sync and communication
Playback
Item Still photo Movie
AF point display ○
Playback grid Off / 3×3 / 6×4 / 3×3+diag
Magnified view 1.5×–10× (15 levels)
Setting image search
conditions
Search conditions
Rating / Date / Folder / Protection / Type of file (1) / Type of file (2)
Ratings
OFF / ★ to ★★★★★
Select images / Select range / All images in folder / All images on card / All found images
Protect images
Select images / Select range / All images in folder / Unprotect all images in folder / All
images on card / Unprotect all images on card / All found images / Unprotect all found
images
In-camera RAW image
processing
Supported
Resizing Supported
Cropping Supported
1028
Frame grab from 4K movies
Individual frames in 4K movies recorded with the camera can be saved as JPEG or HEIF
still photos.
4K
DCI
Approx. 8.8 megapixels (4096 ×
2160)
UHD
Approx. 8.3 megapixels (3840 ×
2160)
* Frame grab is not available for RAW movies or Canon Log 3 movies.
* From normal movies, still photos are saved as JPEGs, and from HDR PQ movies, as HEIF images.
* Frame grabbing from 4K ALL-I, IPB (Std), and IPB (Light) is supported.
* In-camera resizing or cropping is not supported for extracted still photos.
Print order (DPOF)
Compliant with DPOF Version 1.1
External interface
Digital terminal
Terminal type: USB Type-C
Transmission: SuperSpeed Plus USB (USB 3.2 Gen 2) equivalent
Applications:
For computer communication / smartphone communication
For in-camera charging with USB Power Adapter PD-E1
* Powering the camera while using PD-E1 is not supported.
Ethernet terminal: RJ-45 terminal
HDMI output terminal: HDMI micro OUT terminal (Type D)
External microphone input terminal: Compatible with 3.5 mm stereo mini plugs, plug-in
power
Headphone terminal: Compatible with 3.5 mm stereo mini plugs
Remote control terminal: N3 type terminal
1029
Power source
Battery
Compatible battery packs LP-E19
Quantity used 1
USB charging: Using USB Power Adapter
PD-E1
AC power source
AC adapter AC-E19
DC coupler DR-E19
Number of shots available
Shooting method Temperature
Available shots (Approx.)
Power saving Smooth
Viewfinder
+23°C / 73°F
620 440
Screen 860 760
* Using a new, fully charged LP-E19 and recording to an SD card, based on CIPA guidelines.
Available operating time
Conditions of use Temperature
Available operating
time
Time available for bulb exposure +23°C / 73°F Approx. 8 hr. 30 min.
Time available for Live View shooting
*
Using the screen
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 5 hr. 40 min.
Time available for
movie recording
*
Movie Servo AF:
Disable
6K RAW movies (29.97 fps)
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 3 hr. 10 min.
0°C / 32°F Approx. 3 hr.
4K DCI
• IPB (Standard)
• 29.97 fps / 25.00
fps
• Without movie
cropping
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 3 hr. 20 min.
0°C / 32°F Approx. 3 hr. 10 min.
Full HD
+23°C / 73°F Approx. 5 hr. 20 min.
0°C / 32°F Approx. 5 hr.
Time available for
continuous playback
Movies (normal playback) +23°C / 73°F Approx. 6 hr. 20 min.
*
Using a fully charged LP-E19 and recording to a CFexpress card.
1030
Battery information
Remaining capacity
In 1% increments
5-level indicator
Number of shots Supported
Recharge performance 3 levels
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
(W) × (H) × (D) Approx. 150.0 × 142.6 × 87.2 mm
(W) × (H) × (D) Approx. 5.91 × 5.61 × 3.43 in.
* Based on CIPA guidelines.
Weight
Body (including battery and CFexpress card)
*
Based on CIPA guidelines.
Approx. 1015 g Approx. 35.80 oz.
Body only Approx. 822 g Approx. 29.00 oz.
* Not including body cap, eyecup, or multi-function shoe cover.
Operating environment
Operating temperature: 0–40°C / 32–104°F
Operating humidity: 85% or less
1031
GPS
Position data Latitude, longitude, elevation, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Position update interval
Every sec. / Every 5 sec. / Every 10 sec. / Every 15 sec. / Every 30 sec. / Every
min. / Every 2 min. / Every 5 min.
Supported GPS signals
Supports the following GPS signals
• American GPS satellites
• Russian GLONASS satellites
• Japanese MICHIBIKI Quasi-Zenith Satellites
* Error correction functions using multiple MICHIBIKI satellites are not supported.
Log data
NMEA format
One file is generated every 24 hours in the time zone set in the date and time.
Users can copy log data to a computer and view the shooting locations and
route traveled on a map shown on the computer.
Position data retention 10 min. / 30 min. / 1 hour / 3 hours / 6 hours / Unlimited
1032
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) communication
Supporting standards (Equivalent to IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac standards)
Wi-Fi standard Transmission method Maximum link speed
IEEE 802.11b DS-SS modulation 11 Mbps
IEEE 802.11g
OFDM modulation
54 Mbps
IEEE 802.11n 72.2 Mbps
IEEE 802.11a 54 Mbps
IEEE 802.11ac 86.7 / 200 / 433.3 Mbps
Transmission frequency (Center frequency)
2.4 GHz band
Frequency 2412 to 2462 MHz
Channels 1 to 11 ch
5 GHz band
Frequency 5180 to 5825 MHz
Channels 36 to 165 ch
* Specifications vary by country/region.
Authentication and data encryption methods
Connection method Authentication Encryption
Camera access point
WPA2/WPA3-Personal AES
Open Disable
Infrastructure
Open
WEP
Disable
Shared key WEP
WPA/WPA2/WPA3-Personal
TKIP
AES
WPA/WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
1033
Bluetooth
Standards compliance: Bluetooth Specification Version 5.0 compliant (Bluetooth Low
Energy technology)
Transmission method: GFSK modulation
All data above is based on Canon testing standards and CIPA (Camera & Imaging
Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for
camera body only).
Product specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, contact the
respective lens manufacturer.
1034
Trademarks and Licensing
Trademarks
About MPEG-4 Licensing
Accessories
Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
App Store and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google LLC.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and
is used under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA (CompactFlash Association).
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo and the Wi-Fi Protected Setup mark are trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
1035
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for
encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was
encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
STANDARD (''AVC VIDEO'') AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY
A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED
OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
* Notice displayed in English as required.
1036
Accessories
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with genuine Canon
accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as
malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a
leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that repairs arising out of the malfunction
of non-genuine accessories will not be covered by the warranty for repairs, although you
may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Caution
Battery Pack LP-E19 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for
which Canon cannot be held liable.
Check the following website for details on compatible accessories.
https://cam.start.canon/H002/
1037
